JP7235982B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine that uses game balls as game media.

In general, some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines are equipped with operation buttons called chance buttons or the like, and the player can change the effect by operating the chance buttons (Patent Document 1, paragraph 0012, etc.). Furthermore, there is a gaming machine that enables environment settings such as adjustment of the sound volume and the amount of light by the player's operation (paragraph 0246 of Patent Document 1, FIG. 19(b), etc.). .
JP 2015-164587 A

By the way, in gaming machines of recent years, the function of making use of the player's button operations for effects has become indispensable for improving the taste of the game. For this reason, in game machines, it is necessary to determine in more detail control modes related to button operations and effects so that unexpected actions are not performed in association with button operations. In addition, since the player's button operation is also performed in the environment setting for adjusting the sound volume and light amount of the effect, it is desirable to determine an appropriate control mode for many situations involving button operation.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of optimizing button functions related to effects.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention is capable of performing a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) , variably displaying symbols as an effect related to the game , and then stopping the display. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the displayed pattern is in a predetermined display mode,
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
effect display output means (such as a effect display device) that outputs a effect display under the control of the sub-control means ;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can cause an effect display to be executed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to execute a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means ,
When the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the repeated hitting operation effect , it is possible to execute an effect display (normal repeated hitting effect, etc.) according to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times. can be,
Even if the player's operation of the first operation means is not performed multiple times in the repeated hit operation effect, the player's operation of the first operation means a single time is longer than a predetermined time (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds or more). ) If it is performed continuously, it is considered that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player's operation of the first operating means a single time has continued for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to execute a production display (such as an automatic repeated hitting production) according to what is being done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the effect sound, the volume level display can be executed so that the player can grasp the current volume level of the effect sound,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. Triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means under a situation in which an effect display is executed in response to the player's operation of the first operation means being performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer. The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted, and the effect display and the sound volume level display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more are displayed in parallel. is executable and
During the execution of the volume level display, both displays can be executed simultaneously by executing the performance display corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means for a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer. can be,
Both displays can be executed simultaneously by executing the volume level display during the execution of the effect display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more. can be,
The volume level display has a higher display priority than the performance display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more,
The sound volume level display is switched from non-execution to execution when the player operates the second operation means during the variable display of the symbols,
When a specific time has passed since the execution of the sound volume level display during the pattern fluctuation, the sound volume level display is not executed, but if the player operates the second operating means before the specific time passes, the above-mentioned The specific time is set again,
The specific time is the first operation set in the predetermined repeat operation effect capable of executing an effect display in response to the player's operation of the first operation means being performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. shorter than the operational validity period of the means,
In the situation where the sound volume level display is being performed, even if the player continues to operate the second operation means a single time, the sound volume level changes only by one step,
When the player's operation of the second operation means is continuously performed a single time before the power is turned on, the state of the signal indicating the player's operation of the second operation means continues after the power is turned on. The volume does not change in the situation,
Even if the effect display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is executed in a situation where the sound volume level display is executed first, the sound volume level is displayed. Display execution can continue without termination, and
A third operation means, which is an operation means different from the first operation means and the second operation means, is provided, and the initial sound volume level after the power is turned on is adjusted based on the setting operation by the third operation means before the power is turned on. It is possible to differentiate which stage to use,
Predetermined standby performance can be executed in a game standby state after the stop of pattern variation, and execution of the volume level display and volume by operating the second operating means even during execution of the predetermined standby performance. While the level can be adjusted, the predetermined standby performance is not terminated even if the operation is performed, and the volume level display has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby performance.
It is a gaming machine characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of optimizing button functions related to effects.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the functions of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing the main board configuration of the pachinko game machine. (a) is a front view showing a substrate case in which a main substrate is accommodated, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion along line AA in (a). 3 is a block diagram showing basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub-board; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a main pattern display substrate of the main control display device. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device while the effect symbols are changing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a display example of the effect symbols being stopped. (a) is a chart showing a success/failure determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for losing. (a) is a chart showing a big hit symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing a big win symbol determination table for the second lottery, and (c) is a small winning symbol determination table used at the time of a small win. FIG. 4(d) is a diagram showing a losing symbol determination table used when losing. FIG. 11 is a chart showing a variation pattern table used when losing, (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used for a 15R big hit, and (c) is a chart showing a variation pattern table used for a 5R big win. is a chart showing hit values and payout rates for each set value. (a) is a diagram showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. 4 is a flowchart showing power-on processing in the main board. 4 is a flowchart showing initialization processing; 7 is a flowchart showing setting value change processing; It is a flow chart showing a game progress interrupt process in the main board. 10 is a flow chart showing lottery determination processing in the main board. 4 is a flowchart showing power-off processing in the main substrate; A perspective view showing operation buttons, a cross key, and their surroundings as seen from the front and above, (b1) is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of power-on in an example of detecting button operations that continue from before power-on, and (b2). FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse signal for detecting button operation when power is turned on; (a) is a perspective view showing the lever device before the operation button is projected, (b) is a perspective view showing the lever device with the lever upright and the operation button is projected, and (c) is the lever with the lever tilted. It is a perspective view which shows an apparatus. 10 is a flowchart showing sub-main initial setting processing in the sub-main board; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing in a sub-main board; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in a sub-main board; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big win start demonstration screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a during-round screen, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an during-hit specific effect screen. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hit specific effect screen different from FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a middle specific effect screen; (a) is a time chart showing an example of game progress during single-shot operation, (b) is a time chart showing an example of game progress during normal repeat operation, and (c) is an example of game progress during auto repeat operation. It is a time chart showing. (a) is a time chart showing a specific example related to the progress of the game during the auto-punching operation, and (b) is a time chart showing an example of the progress of the game when the start time of the auto-repeat valid period and the button repeat valid period are different. Chart. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting function and the back button effect, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting function and the variable advance notice effect. (a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting function and the pending look-ahead effect, and (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting function and the button operation that continues before the button operation valid period. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button effect before a button operation, and an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button effect during repeated hitting. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode related to an indicator effect, and (b) to (d) are explanatory diagrams sequentially showing how the indicated amount of the indicator effect increases. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an indicator effect during fluctuation, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume adjustment effect during fluctuation. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a volume control effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount control effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sound volume adjustment effect during fluctuation stop, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a light amount adjustment effect during fluctuation stop. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the reference timing and the automatic repeated operation, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the reference timing and the single-shot operation, and (c) is the same reference timing and the buttons from before the reference timing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship with operations; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect when effects are assembled, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect after effects are assembled. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example when light amount adjustment is performed during execution of an auto repeated effect. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a button hold effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the occurrence timing of power-off and the button effect.

An embodiment of a pachinko game machine according to the present invention will be described below. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment will be described, and then the game procedure, performance, control mode, etc. in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic Configuration of Pachinko Machines>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of a pachinko game machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the pachinko game machine 10, a game board 50 is attached to a game machine frame 11, which will be described later. Of these, the game board 50 has different structural elements such as accessory devices and designs depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 10 . Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection and structural connection with the game machine frame 11 .

In addition, by standardizing the structural and electrical connections with the game machine frame 11 for the game board 50 of a plurality of models, so-called model change in which the game machine frame 11 is shared between different models becomes possible. there is In the following description, the game machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board configuration of the game board 50 will be described.

The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also called “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also called “curtain plate”) 14. . Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a plate unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 . Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame body used to fix the pachinko game machine 10 to a predetermined position in an island facility in a game hall (game parlor), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the plate unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 have an opening that is closed on the front side.

Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, nailing is generally performed. At least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island facility is made of wood. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. Moreover, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island facility, it is possible to employ a construction method other than nailing.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 swings forward from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 with the left edge in FIG. Further, the front frame 13 swings rearward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks therein, and returns to the closed state. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 closes the portion between the upper short portion of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

Locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the lock device is disposed below the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through the aforementioned plate unit 16. - 特許庁When the game parlor clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is placed in the open state. Become.

Unlike the front frame 13, the aforementioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12 .

The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 arranged in front of the front frame 13 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the tray unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. The glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are, for example, horizontally swung forward by a game parlor clerk to be in an open state, and then horizontally swung backward from the open state to be locked to the front frame 13.例文帳に追加This results in a closed state.

Locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned lock device (not shown). That is, when the game parlor clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key, for example, in the clockwise direction opposite to when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. , and the glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and pushed in so that the glass door 15 is parallel to the front frame 13, whereby the locking device is operated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. It locks onto the frame 13 .

Also, by opening the glass door 15, the locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable. By performing the pushing operation, the plate unit 16 is brought into an open state. Further, the plate unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and pushed in so that the plate unit 16 is parallel to the front frame 13, thereby activating the locking mechanism and the plate unit 16 is released again. It locks onto the front frame 13 .

Further, the glass door 15 detachably holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates, and the game board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko game machine 10 through these transparent plates in the closed state. I'm trying As the transparent plate, in addition to a glass plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although illustration is omitted, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage and the like for guiding and collecting game balls, which are game media.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a shooting handle 20 and the like on its front surface. Of these, the upper ball tray 18 stores game balls, supplies game balls to a shooting device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via a shooting handle 20, and supplies game balls to the lower ball tray 19. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball ejection. In addition, the lower ball tray 19 stores game balls, receives game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and transfers game balls to a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko machine 10. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ejection. In some cases, the ball box is provided integrally with the island facility.

In addition, in this embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided at the upper corner of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14, and other parts. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball tray 18 facing the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper spherical plate 18 and positioned near the center of the upper spherical plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown), and performs light output according to the effect pattern to be executed.

In addition, the operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a driving source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in this embodiment is displaced in such a manner that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward when driven by an elevating motor, thereby forming an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It has a crescent-shaped eccentric cam for generating vibrations in the drive train of the operating lever.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(a), in addition to the operation buttons 22, a cross key 96 is provided, and the player can use the cross key 96 to set various environments. Examples of the contents of the environmental settings include adjusting the volume of the speaker 21 (volume adjustment), adjusting the brightness (brightness adjustment) and light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) of the effect display described later, and changing the effect mode described later. . Furthermore, as the content of the environmental settings, automatic button operation for presentation (also referred to simply as "automatic button operation") is performed so that the same presentation as if the player operated the operation button 22 proceeds even if the player does not operate the operation button 22. ) can also be exemplified. Further, it is possible to provide, for example, the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11, with a display device capable of displaying effects related to the game and the above-described environment settings. Here, how to set the environment and various effects and control modes related to the environment setting will be described later.

Furthermore, other than the cross key, it is possible to use, for example, lever-shaped operation means, various types of touch panels, and the like. In addition, the code 97 in FIG. 20(a) is a ball lending button, and the code 98 is a return button. Further, reference numeral 98 in FIG. 20(a) is a ball release button for the upper ball tray 18. As shown in FIG.
<Back structure of pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting game balls, and a set base (also referred to as a "back set board") 31 serving as a winning ball path forming mechanism. is attached, and below this set board 31, there are a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire game machine, and a payout control (also called "prize ball control") board for controlling the game machine frame side. 103 are attached in a state in which they are each housed in a dedicated transparent case. In addition, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and a sub-board 104 that executes effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are respectively dedicated. It is housed in a transparent case and provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set board 31 . Furthermore, the set board 31 also includes a launcher 43 and a launch control board 105 that controls the launcher 43 .

In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island facility to become prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from above the game board 50 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. It is

The prize ball passage 34 described above rectifies and guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side. In addition, the aforementioned payout unit 35 can discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 in communication with the prize ball passage 34 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game balls flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball tray (upper ball tray 18 or lower ball tray 19) as prize balls.

The aforementioned power supply unit 32 is provided at the lower left portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from outside the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the voltages to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub-board 104, and the like. A power switch 40 for activating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as indicated by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion of the figure. The power switch 40 is installed so that it is turned on when the lower part of the power switch 40 is pressed and tilted downward so that it will not be turned off even if a dropped game ball hits it directly.

The aforementioned payout control board 103 is arranged at the lower right portion of the set board 31 when the pachinko game machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 according to a payout instruction from the main board 102 or a lending request from the outside. Further, the above-described shooting control board 105 has a shooting control function of controlling the shooting device 43 so as to shoot a game ball (hit ball) into the game area with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the shooting handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The main board 102 described above is arranged at the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly functions such as various lottery functions, setting change functions, payout control board 103 and sub-board 104 control functions, etc. It has a central processing function in the pachinko game machine 10 . The sub-board 104 described above is arranged in the upper central part on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

The sub-board 104 includes a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) responsible for the main function of effect control, and a sub-sub-board specializing in a specific effect function such as image creation (in this embodiment sub-sub-board 302), but the term "sub-board" encompasses these. In addition, on the lower right part on the back side of the set board 31, there is an external relay terminal board (such as a "frame relay terminal board") that relays signals from the main board 102, payout control board 103, etc. to devices outside the pachinko game machine 10. ) 46 is provided.

The setting change function of the main board 102 described above is a function that can change the setting value that defines the theoretical probability of winning (the degree of advantage for the player). In this embodiment, six types of integer values "1" to "6" are provided as set values. The ball output rate is different. Changes to such set values, the probability of big hits for each set value, and the like will be described later.
<Board configuration of the game board>

Next, the aforementioned game board 50 and the parts (board parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (eg, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). Also, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding game balls to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is attached to the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board surface components are attached facing forward, and is closed by the closed glass door 15 and the like. The front is covered. Furthermore, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is formed by combining inner rails and outer rails formed in a curved belt shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 52 includes a first starting winning opening 62 and a second starting winning opening 63, a large winning opening device 90 (attacker unit), an operating opening 68, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and , an out port (58) which is located at the bottom of the game area 52 and is hidden behind the operation button 22 in FIG. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display capable of displaying for effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown) and mechanisms such as windmills. In addition, it is also possible not to provide a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the game board 50 at the bottom left of the game area 52 . The specific configuration and functions of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the above-described board structure of the game board 50 may vary depending on, for example, the game characteristics employed in the pachinko game machine 10 .
<Functions of board parts>

Next, specific functions and configurations of the individual board components described above will be described. First, the above-mentioned first starting prize winning port 62 is a starting prize winning port related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance for game balls is always open and the size of the entrance for game balls is not changed. Furthermore, the first start winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is the same as the above-mentioned is input to the main substrate 102 of the .

The above-mentioned second starting prize winning port 63 is a starting prize winning port related to the second game, and is arranged on the right side of the first starting prize winning port 62 . The second starting winning opening 63 is a starting opening related to normal electric accessories (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and when the normal pattern described later is stopped and displayed in a win mode, one side A blade (opening/closing blade) for opening operation is provided on the right side of FIG. 1 . Then, the second starting prize winning port 63 expands the opening and closing blades for a predetermined time based on the operation of the normal electric accessory, so that the game ball enters the second starting prize winning port 63. It becomes possible. It should be noted that, without being limited to the mode of the present embodiment, it may be a configuration in which the normal electric accessory is not provided at the start port related to the second game, or a configuration in which the normal electric accessory is arranged at the start port related to the first game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting winning port 63 includes a second starting winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal electric accessory solenoid 76 for opening and closing the opening and closing blades. . The output signal of the second starting winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102 .

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second start winning opening 63 . These open modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) mode (referred to as "short open" or "short open") and a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.). It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to an opening time between short opening and long opening.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-described general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of game balls. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102 .

When the general prize winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general prize winning ports 72, the game balls entered into the plurality of general prize winning ports 72 are collected at a location where the general prize winning detection device 73 is arranged, It is possible to detect In addition, it is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for each number of prize balls (common use of the general winning detection device 73).

The above-described big winning slot device 90 is formed in a case shape by combining transparent synthetic resin parts, and although not shown in the figure, it has a big winning slot visible to the player inside. . The big winning opening has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is internally equipped with an opening/closing door 91 (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening and closing this opening. Then, when a predetermined winning occurs, the big winning opening is opened in a predetermined manner. Here, in this embodiment, the big prize opening is open upward, and the opening/closing door 91 can be slid in the front-rear direction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the big winning gate device 90 includes a big winning gate detection device 78 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a big winning gate (opening) solenoid for opening and closing the opening/closing door 91. It has 80. Of these, the big winning detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of game balls into the big winning opening device 90 , and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102 .

Various devices can be employed as the big winning mouth device 90 . For example, as the big winning slot device 90, it is possible to adopt a big winning slot that opens forward or upward. In addition, as the big winning gate device 90, a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening/closing patterns) relating to the opening/closing door 91 for opening and closing the big winning gate are provided, and a plurality of different operation patterns (opening/closing patterns) are provided during a jackpot game in which a special game is executed. It is possible to employ a device that operates the open/close door 91 with the . Furthermore, as the big winning hole device 90, it is possible to employ a device that has a plurality of big winning holes and distributes game balls to each big winning hole according to the game situation.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation port 68 described above is provided with a passage detection device 69, and this passage detection device 69 has a sensor for detecting passage of a game ball through the operation port 68. As shown in FIG. The output signal of the sensor in the passing detection device 69 is input to the main substrate 102, and the passing detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball entering.

The aforementioned out port 58 is provided with an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82, as shown in FIG. The out-port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out-ball) that has entered the out-port 58 without becoming a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52 . The detection result of the out-port sensor 82 is used for counting out-balls and for display (base display) in a performance display unit (ball-in state display 808 in FIG. 5, which will be described later). there is

The aforementioned center decoration 64 has a performance function and the like, and an LED board on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64 . By driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration (light effect). Furthermore, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game, but also during waiting for the start of the game, during game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (light amount setting), and the like.

In addition, a plurality of movable production members are provided on the back (inner side) of the center decoration 64, and these movable production members constitute a gimmick for production. These movable production members are normally hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60, although illustration is omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, light decoration (light effect) is also performed on the movable effect member. Furthermore, the light decoration on the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also during waiting for the start of the game, during game preparation for the player to adjust the amount of light, and the like.

Furthermore, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 as viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 functions as a flow path for game balls in addition to the performance function as described above. have.

Also, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88 . As the light guide plate 88, although illustration is omitted, for example, it is possible to employ a plate provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with their plate surfaces facing forward and backward. Furthermore, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64 and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60 . The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64 .

This light guide plate 88 can be configured, for example, as follows. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in strips so as to face, for example, one of the right and left end faces of the transparent plate. Normally, the display contents of the effect display device 60 are transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize them without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.例文帳に追加

However, inside each transparent plate that constitutes the light guide plate 88, minute unevenness that cannot be seen under normal circumstances is formed. Then, when a predetermined effect is executed, for example, the above-described light source facing the end surface of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light from the light source is emitted from the end surface of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. be. Further, the light is diffused by the projections and depressions of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light causes a predetermined illustration or the like to emerge in a color that can be recognized by the player.

In addition, the other transparent plate of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88 is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-described illustrations. By driving the light source facing the end face during a predetermined effect, an illustration different from the one described above emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, not only one of the right and left end faces of the transparent plate but also one of the upper and lower end faces of the transparent plate can be faced with a light source, and the light from this light source can be used to project other illustrations or the like. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Also, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. Also, a transmissive liquid crystal display may be used in place of or in combination with the light guide plate 88 .

As shown in FIG. 7, the aforementioned main control display device 53 has a pattern display board (main pattern display board) 256 on which a large number of LED indicator lamps are arranged. The symbol display board 256 has a normal symbol display portion 59 for displaying the above-described normal symbols, a first special symbol display portion 70 for displaying a first special symbol (to be described later) corresponding to the first game, and a second game. A second special symbol display portion 71 for displaying a second special symbol (to be described later) and various other display portions are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the gaming machine. In addition, the above-described normal symbol display unit 59 constitutes a normal symbol display device. The first special symbol display section 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display section 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device.

In the following, the normal design is "General", the special design is "Special", the first special design is "1st Special", "Special 1", "Special 1", and the second special is " It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", etc. Further, the first special symbol may be called "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be called "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the main control display device 53 described above means one provided on the game board 50, but as will be described later, a setting display section (setting in FIG. 5A described later) provided on the main board 102 The display 807) and the performance display unit (ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5A, which will be described later), etc., can also be included in the main control display device. In that case, the setting display section and the performance display section provided on the main board 102 can also be called, for example, a "main board side main control display device".
<Basic game procedure>

Next, a game procedure in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where game balls are supplied to the upper ball tray 18, when the player operates and rotates the shooting handle 20, the upper ball tray 18 is moved with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in are shot one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the inner rail and the outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is released to the game area 52 from between the inner rail and the outer rail.

In a normal game, the player shoots the game ball so that it flows down on the left side of the game area 52 and aims at the first starting winning hole 62 located in the lower central part of the game area 52 . A shooting mode that mainly uses the left side of the game area 52 is called left-handed shooting. Further, while the player is operating the shooting handle 20, the shooting device 43 described above shoots game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, intervals not exceeding 100 shots per minute). The game balls successively released to the game area 52 fall in a direction according to factors such as speed, incident angle (or reflection angle), etc. while interfering with a plurality of game nails, windmills, and the like.

When a game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-described general winning opening 72 and the first start winning opening 62, the entry of the ball is detected, and payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as prize balls through the above-described payout unit 35 according to the type of winning hole into which the balls enter. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with a large number of game balls and the following game balls that are put out cannot enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are led to the lower ball tray 19 as overflow balls. .

Also, game balls falling into various winning holes become safe balls and are guided from the surface side of the game board 50 to the back side. In addition, the game ball that does not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52 and falls into an out port (58), and is guided to the back side of the game board 50.例文帳に追加Then, the game ball that has reached the back side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter or a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 to the above-mentioned island facility side. is discharged.

The operation port 68 described above is a gate through which game balls pass, unlike the above-described winning port for generating the safe balls. It should be noted that hereinafter, the operation port 68 is referred to as a “winning hole”, and the terms “falling in”, “entering a ball”, and “winning a prize” in the present embodiment will not be used unless otherwise specified. ” shall be included.

In a game situation that is not a situation in which a big hit is won, if the game ball is detected as entering the operation hole 68, if a predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal pattern fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied , the main control display device 53, normal symbols (described later) are variably displayed. The normal pattern displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (normal pattern lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operation port 68, and is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time. be done.

When the game ball enters the starting hole (here, the first starting winning hole 62 or the second starting winning hole 63), a predetermined fluctuation start condition (special figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is established. For example, on the main control display device 53, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (jackpot lottery) executed based on the entry of the ball into the starting hole, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbols is performed. This effect display is based on the difference between whether the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner or when they are stopped, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbols is a big win or a losing one. In relation to this, various predetermined effects are performed.

In the jackpot game in which the special game is executed, the unit game in which the big winning slot device 90 operates and the big winning slot (not shown) is opened is repeated multiple times. Furthermore, special games include those in which a unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and those in which a unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) can be exemplified, and as the number of times less than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) can be exemplified. Also, setting the maximum number of times to 10 times (10R) and setting the number of times less than the maximum number of times to 6 times (6R) or 2 times (2R) can be exemplified. In addition, it is possible to provide a small winning game in addition to the game for operating the big winning mouth device 90 .

In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding big winning hole, or when the total open time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds), The end condition is satisfied and the big winning opening is closed. The total opening time as a condition for ending a unit game indicates that the upper limit is set even if the opening of the big winning opening is divided multiple times during one unit game. ing. In order to increase the degree of technical intervention by opening the big winning opening multiple times in a unit game, and to make it possible to easily get the ball by opening it once, to give a wide range of game characteristics during the big win. The mode of opening the big winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game feature is employed in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into the first game using the first starting winning port 62 and the second game using the second starting winning port 63 . In a situation where the second game is given priority over the first game and the conditions for starting the game are satisfied at the same time, the second game is preferentially executed and the first game is suspended. The first game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

In addition, it is not limited to this, for example, without providing priority between the first game and the second game, the first game and the second game, that is, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in parallel. It is also possible to adopt a game feature that is executed. And when such a game property is adopted, a situation may occur in which the first game and the second game (variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are executed at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the special game is finished, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. This specific game is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game in a mode different from the above-described special game. In this embodiment, as the specific game, a probability variation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability variation"), a variable time reduction game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry easy game are provided. As the specific game, there is a game in which only one of a variable probability game, a time saving game, and a game with easy ball entry is performed, and there is also a game in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time.

When the specific game is executed, a notification regarding the shooting position and shooting timing of the game ball recommended by the image and sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, a right-hand hitting effect to encourage right-hand hitting) is performed. When the player increases the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 20 clockwise to strengthen the shooting force and shoots the game ball toward the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is shot. , enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64 and flows down the center decoration 64. - 特許庁Furthermore, the game ball released from the center ornament 64 hits a plurality of game nails and other structures and falls in a direction corresponding to the way it hits.

Some of the many game balls released from the center decoration 64 pass through the operation opening 68 (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the passage detection device 69 (see FIG. 3). Then, as described above, when the game ball passes through the operation port 68, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7), and the variable display of the normal symbols is stopped in a predetermined win mode. Then, the normal electric accessory of the second starting prize opening 63 is expanded for a predetermined time according to the winning mode.

In this embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball that has reached the right side of the game area 52 to the vicinity of the second start winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 with a nail or the like. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a game that facilitates entry is added to the time saving that is a specific game, and during the time saving, the opening of the normal electric role is extended by the easy entry game, and the normal electric role The probability variation of the object and the time-saving combination of the ordinary electric accessory are performed, and the long opening of the ordinary electric accessory is easily executed. Then, during the time saving, when the normal electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 is expanded once, one or more game balls can enter the second starting winning opening 63. ing.

It should be noted that when a big win occurs and a special game is executed, the big winning opening (not shown) of the big winning opening device 90 is opened. It is possible to Then, in this case, it is conceivable to execute a right-handed effect to prompt the player to right-handed by means of an image, sound, or the like on the effect display device 60 before the start of the special game.
<Example of jackpot types: ST>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-described first game and second game will be described. First, as the big wins, there are provided a big win in which the unit game is repeated 15 times (hereinafter also referred to as a "15R big win") and a big win in which the unit game is repeated 7 times (hereinafter also called a "7R big win"). .

The above-mentioned unit game is started in the special game with the opening of the large winning opening in the large winning opening device 90, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 10 (more than 1) game balls fall in, the game ends and the big winning opening is closed. A special game that repeats such a unit game is based on a game accompanied by a so-called ball-out (sometimes referred to as a ball-out) for the purpose of allowing a player to win a game ball. Furthermore, among the various jackpots, the 15R jackpot and the 7R jackpot are intended to make the player win a relatively large number of game balls.

However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide, for example, a 15R jackpot or a part of the 15R jackpot that does not change probability (15R normal or 7R normal) as part of the jackpot. Also, for example, even if it is a 15R jackpot, the opening period of the big prize hole is short, and only the ball that is substantially the same as the 5R jackpot can be obtained (15R variable (actual 5R)). Even so, it is possible to provide a system in which it is almost impossible to obtain a ball (for example, only a minimum amount (for example, one ball) enters the big winning opening device 90 in each R).

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state such as the above-mentioned probability variation, time saving, etc. occurs when the jackpot game ends for a predetermined specific jackpot. As an occurrence mode of such a specific game state, for example, it is possible to provide a jackpot that does not provide at least one of the privilege functions such as probability variation, time saving, and easy ball entry game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit accompanied by only a variable probability or a big win accompanied only by a reduction in working hours. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the types of big wins depending on the difference in the duration of the probability variation and the difference in the duration of the short working hours. In addition, when the electric chewing support is also performed during the time saving, the "duration of the time saving" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chewing support". Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute only the electric chewing support out of the time saving and the electric chewing support, or to execute only the time saving out of the time saving and the electric chewing support.

However, the combinations of the big hits and the variable probability, time saving, etc. are not limited to those of this embodiment, and various combinations can be employed. For example, probability variation may occur for all jackpots. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in this embodiment are 15R jackpots with variable odds (15R odd odds), and all 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with odd odds (7R odd odds).
<Hit other than the jackpot>

In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a kind of win other than the big win. In the first game (or the second game), it is possible to adopt a game feature such that, for example, the big winning gate device 90 is opened once when the small win occurs.
<Main control display device>
<<Configuration of Main Control Display Device>>

Next, the aforementioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. The main control display device 53 on the game board side, as shown in FIG. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at regular intervals in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the intervals between the LED indicator lamps in the vertical positional relationship are also constant for all 18 pieces.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 LED indicator lights on the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to Special Figure 1, and the 10 LED indicator lights on the right end in the lower row are shown in Special Figure 2. It is designed to be used for such information display. And, in the upper stage and the lower stage, the two LED indicator lamps on the right end constitute a first special symbol storage display section 83 and a second special symbol storage display section 84 indicating the number of pending memories. The eight LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol storage display section 83 constitute the first special symbol display section 70 described above, and the eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the second special symbol storage display section 84 The LED indicator lamps constitute the second special symbol display section 71 described above.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game by the operation modes of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 62, and the variation display thereof is predetermined. A big win is generated and a special game is executed when the game is stopped in the winning mode. In addition, when the first special symbol display unit 70 stops displaying the first special symbol, a maximum of 255 (=2̂8) -1) The type identification information can be displayed. Specifically, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed. Since at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of turned off, it is possible to display up to 255 (=2^8-1) types of identification information.

Similarly, for the second special symbol display section 71 described above, due to the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lamps arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a maximum of 255 (=2 ^8-1) It is possible to display the type identification information. Specifically, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed. Since at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of turned off, it is possible to display up to 255 (=2^8-1) types of identification information.

Furthermore, in the upper stage, the four LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display section 70 are normally used for information display related to the symbol (normal pattern). The two LED indicator lamps arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display portion 70 constitute a normal symbol memory display portion 85 for displaying the number of reserved stored symbols of normal symbols. The two LED display lamps arranged side by side form a normal symbol display portion 59 .

The normal symbol display section 59 performs variable display and stop display of normal symbols according to the operation modes of the two LED indicator lamps. Then, the normal symbol display section 59 can display up to 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display. Specifically, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two LED indicator lamps is stopped and displayed. Therefore, a maximum of 3 (=2^2-1) types of identification information can be displayed. However, as a modification, unlike the first special symbol display portion 70 and the second special symbol display portion 71, the normal symbol display portion 59 may be completely turned off in the case of a failure, and in that case, a maximum of 4 (= 2^2) types of identification information can be displayed.

In addition, a round number display section 86 is composed of four LED display lights, two LED display lights arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display section 59 in the upper stage and two LED display lights at the left end of the lower stage located therebelow. Furthermore, the four LED indicator lights between the round number display section 86 and the second special symbol display section 71 in the lower row are, from the left, the first state display section (state display light 1) 87a, the second state display section (status indicator lamp 2) 87b, a third status indicator (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status indicator (status indicator 4) 87d.

The above-mentioned first state display unit 87a is designed to light up when the probability variation function related to the special figure is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is designed to light up when the probability variation function is activated according to the normal figure. there is In addition, the second state display portion 87b is also lit up during the open extension, which is a so-called electric support (electric support) state. Further, the third state display portion 87c is used as a hitting (right hitting) state indicator lamp. Further, the fourth state display portion 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-described third state display portion 87c (beating state indicator lamp) is lit up not only during the electric support state but also during the jackpot. It should be noted that during the big hit, even if the game is in continuous operation, the flag (electrical support flag) for setting the electrical support state is turned off. In addition, the third state display section 87c can also be lit in a state other than these states (normal time) such as when the normal electric accessory is long open.

The main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the aforementioned main board 102 as shown in FIG. Various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102 . In addition, in FIG. 3, only the normal symbol display portion 59, the first special symbol display portion 70, and the second special symbol display portion 71 are shown among the various display portions in the main control display device 53.
<<Main control display unit functions>>

When the game ball passes through the operation port 68, the normal symbol display portion 59 flashes, and the normal symbol variation display is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time) elapses after the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal pattern is displayed in a lost mode (disappeared mode), after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal pattern stop fixed time), if there is a ball entering the subsequent operation port, normally The next variable display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined win mode (hit mode), similar to the case of losing, while shifting to the next fluctuation display, the normal symbols stopped and displayed earlier win. Depending on the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

The number of reservations related to this normal pattern lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operation port 68 during the normal pattern fluctuation, and indicates the number of normal pattern lottery times in which the normal pattern fluctuation display has not yet been executed. That is, when the pattern variation performed earlier in the normal pattern storage and display unit 85 is not completed, the variation start condition is not established, and when the pattern variation is completed, the variation start condition is established and suspended. Based on the stored lottery result (reserved lottery result), a new pattern variation is started. The upper limit of the number of reserved items is four, and the number of reserved items is not exceeded.

The display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol memory display unit 85 is, for example, when the number of reservations is 0 (no reservations), both are turned off, and when the number of reservations is 1, one of them is turned on. It is possible to do so in such a manner that the other is turned off. Also, if the number of reservations is 2, both lights up, if the number of reservations is 3, either one lights up and the other blinks, and if the number of reservations is 4, both blink. can be displayed.

The display of the reserved number of the first special symbols by the first special symbol storage and display unit 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set. The display of the number of reserved second special symbols by the above-described second special symbol storage and display unit 84 is also performed by displaying four types of information using two LED indicator lamps as one set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned game situation arises in which the player should hit to the right, a display is performed in a predetermined manner using the third state display section 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third state display section 86c is set to be turned off when the game situation is left-handed, and is lit when the right-handed game situation is.
<Configuration and basic display contents of the effect display device>

Next, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60 . In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as the effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 and the story display are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started on the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. A variable presentation with variable display of a design (also called "decorative design") 190 is executed. In this embodiment, the effect pattern 190 is composed of a left effect pattern 190a, a middle effect pattern 190b, and a right effect pattern 190c. In the following description, the left, middle, and right effects patterns 190a to 190c may be referred to as "production patterns 190" or "production patterns 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the effect pattern 190 has nine types of element patterns (symbolic element effect patterns) having the meanings of symbols of numbers "1" to "9". Further, the middle effect pattern 190b and the right effect pattern 190c, which are other effect patterns, also have nine kinds of element patterns meaning numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect pattern 190a. The details of the above element symbols will be described later.

Along with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-described effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8(a)). In this embodiment, the variable display of the performance symbols is performed by individually moving (vertical scrolling) the left performance symbols 190a to the right performance symbols 190c in the vertical direction so that the above element symbols appear in the display area 194 sequentially. Executed by As for the direction of scrolling of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, it is possible to adopt various modes such as the horizontal direction, rotation, or turning, in addition to the vertical direction.

Also, the effect pattern 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the production patterns 190 (here, the left production pattern 190a and the right production pattern 190c) are the same number patterns such as "7" and "7", the same meaning, Alternatively, a combination is formed by symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one pattern (here, medium production pattern 190b) other than the production patterns 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach (tenpai) cannot constitute a combination with other production patterns. It is in the process of changing.

As the display mode of the production pattern 190, many kinds of "reach" and other various ones can be adopted, and the details of the various display modes will be described later. Also, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect pattern 190 are performed, and details thereof will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to this. can be anything. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to having only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding an additional display body, for example.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member, and configure a gimmick with the additional display body. Usually, an additional display body is placed outside the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the display area 194, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, an additional display may appear in front of display area 194 .
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the setting change described above and the setting change method will be described. FIG. 5(a) shows a partially enlarged view of the state in which the main board 102 is housed in a transparent board case 801, and FIG. It is enlarged and shown schematically. In FIG. 5A, a substrate case 801 is formed in a box shape with a split structure (for example, a split structure) from a colorless and transparent plastic material.

As a divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 is combined with a cover, and the substrate holder and the cover are joined via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation. can be adopted. In the substrate case 801, a connector 802 (only a part of which is indicated by a reference numeral) used for connection with other devices such as the sub-main substrate 301 is formed with a size that does not create a gap as much as possible. is exposed through a closed opening.

The main board 102 is visible through a transparent board case 801. In FIG. The spherical state indicator 808 is indicated by a dashed line, and illustration of other devices is omitted. Among these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area in which test terminals are mounted only when a ball payout test or the like is performed in the product testing stage, and the test terminals are not mounted on the main substrate 102 in the mass production stage. not

The setting display 807 described above displays the selected setting value only when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Then, the setting display 807 displays the current setting regarding the setting value for differentiating the operation probability of the role product continuous operation device (the operation probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric role product, the so-called jackpot probability). Values can be displayed. Furthermore, the setting display 807 uses a 7-segment display for one digit. Here, in this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, a dot display portion is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807 .

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as a “setting key switch”) 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as a “setting change switch”) 810 are arranged near the setting display 807 . A setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5(b), the setting change operation unit 811 opens a setting change opening/closing lid (hereinafter referred to as "opening/closing lid") 812 of the circuit board case 801, thereby changing the state shown in FIG. 5(a). It is exposed as shown.

The opening/closing lid 812 is, for example, integrally formed with the substrate case 801 through a resin hinge, and is opened as indicated by an arrow B by pulling the protruding knob portion 813 with fingers against elastic force. can be exemplified. When the open/close lid 812 is to be closed, it is laid down (not shown) from the state shown in FIG.

The aforementioned ball entry state display device 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and is capable of displaying a base for each game state (the value of the number of prize balls per number of shots). In this embodiment, as shown by the solid line in the enlarged lower right part of FIG. In addition, a dot display section (reference numeral omitted) is provided at the lower right corner of the 7-segment display for each digit of the ball entry state display 808 .

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry state display 808, the setting change operation section 811, and the setting display 807 are wrapped in plan view (rear view of the gaming machine). are arranged so that they do not overlap (so that they do not overlap). In addition, the entering state indicator 808 and the setting indicator 807 are arranged with a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more) between them so as to prevent misrecognition of the display.

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5(b) is the free end for opening the game machine frame 11, and the setting change operating section 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, consideration is given to making it possible to easily change the set values, etc., while the ball entry state indicator 808 is arranged on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when the game machine frame 11 is opened. Consideration is given to prevent the display information from being unintentionally viewed by the player when the game machine frame is opened. Of course, if priority is given to prevention of tampering when changing set values, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 (on the side of the rotation axis of the game machine frame 11) when viewed from the front. Just do it.

Here, in the present embodiment, in consideration of the above-mentioned points, an opening/closing lid 812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the setting change operation section 811 so that the setting change operation section 811 cannot be easily accessed. The operation unit 811 for changing settings is configured not to be exposed except when changing work or confirming setting information. The setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described below with reference to FIG. 5B.

First, the upper surface of the substrate case 801, which is in a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811, is arranged so that the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion opening (reference numeral omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. Also, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, a partition wall such as a side wall is formed from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main substrate 102 so that access to other electronic components (for example, the CPU 501) on the main substrate 102 cannot be made through the opening 816. It's becoming Also, a setting key cylinder 809 formed with a setting key insertion port (reference numeral omitted) corresponding to the opening 816 and a push-type setting change button 810 are arranged vertically when viewed from the back of the pachinko game machine 10. Further, an opening/closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable and closable while being urged in a direction to always close the opening 816 .

Next, a brief description will be given of an operation method for changing settings, etc., and an overview of the actions of changing settings and displaying settings. When confirming the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, without pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value (for example, if the setting value range is "1" to "6", the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed by the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is displayed. Some segments (here, dot portions) are driven to light up to indicate that there is. In this embodiment, when the gaming machine is activated (for example, when the game machine is activated (for example, a state in which control based on an input related to the progress of the game can be executed, such as detection of a winning at the starting winning opening), the setting value change processing is performed. is configured in such a way that

On the other hand, when changing the setting value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the open/close lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the biasing force, and the setting key is pressed. A setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and rotated clockwise. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current set value is displayed blinking on the setting display 807 formed of 7-segment LEDs, and some segments (here, dot portions) are extinguished (extinguished) to indicate that it is in the setting change mode. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value obtained by adding 1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807 . The manager of the game arcade operates the setting change button 810 so as to obtain an arbitrary (target) set value. In this embodiment, if the set value at the time of power-on is "1", each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once, "1", "2", ..., "5", "6", "1" is changed. ” is changed.

Then, by operating the setting change button, when the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated counterclockwise in a state in which the setting value is changed to an arbitrary value (an arbitrary setting value is displayed on the setting display 807), the setting value is changed. After the change processing is completed, the setting display 807 lights up the current set value for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1000 ms), and also lights up some segments (here, dots). and dots are both extinguished.
<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the main components of the electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the power supply board 251 is connected to the payout control board 103, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 106, the launch control board 107, and the like. A main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via a frame relay terminal board 108 . Further, the main board 102 is connected to a main pattern display board (also referred to as a "symbol display board") 256 that constitutes the aforementioned main control display device 53, and a sub-main board 301. The sub-main board 301 has , and the aforementioned sub-sub-board 302 are connected.

The power supply board 251 of the above various configurations is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). The power supply board 251 is connected to the frame effect connection board 300 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate (not shown). A ball handling board and the like used for coin handling are connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the firing handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20(a)) is connected to the firing control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a locking metal fitting for grounding. A touch switch (also referred to as a “touch sensor”) 310 detects when a player, amusement arcade clerk, or the like touches the shooting handle 20 with a finger, and changes the form of the output signal.

Further, the firing control board 105 is connected with a firing intensity volume 311, a firing stop switch 312, and the firing device 43 described above. Of these, the firing strength volume 1311 is used to change the firing strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 20 . The firing stop switch 312 is used to stop firing by detecting an operation with a part of the finger (such as the thumb) that grips the firing handle 20 .

Power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. 3, a main control display device 53, passage detectors 69a and 69b, and a normal electric motor are connected to the main board 102 via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Object solenoid 76, first start winning detection device 74, second start winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, big winning detection device 78, big winning opening (open) solenoid 80, and magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor (illustration ) etc. are connected. Here, in this embodiment, regarding the connection of the first start-up prize detection device 74 and the second start-up prize detection device 75 to the main substrate 102, they are directly connected without going through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. It is done.

Electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303 . Further, the sub-main board 301 includes the above-described frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, as well as the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306. Each device is connected.

Devices for presentation in the pachinko game machine 10 include a frame illumination L2 board 317, a frame illumination R2 board 318, a (left) speaker 21 (L), a (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, a performance button board, an elevation motor, a performance button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, etc. are also provided, but the diagram in FIG. 4 does not become complicated. Therefore, illustration of these parts is also omitted.

The sub-main board 301 is also connected to game board equipment, image display equipment, audio control equipment, and the like. Among these devices, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331 as a device for the game board. This board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and effect interface board 304 described above. A center illumination board 332 used for illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board face illumination connection board 331 . In addition, although illustration is omitted, the board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected with a production sensor board, other illumination boards, a production motor, and the like. Here, although illustration is omitted, the effect interface board 304 is connected with various electric decoration boards and effect motors.

The image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302. The sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also called a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. ) 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, another liquid crystal unit connected to the presentation interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, the aforementioned audio control equipment connected to the sub-main board 301 includes an audio control board (audio board) 339 and an audio ROM (ROM) board 340 .

Next, the configuration of the main board 102, the payout control board 103 and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the main board 102 is mounted with a CPU (main CPU) 501 , a ROM (main ROM) 502 and an RWM 503 . Of these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Note that "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are general concepts that include both those built into the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

In addition to the CPU 501, the CPU device mounted on the main board 102 includes a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, a random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers, and a A random number circuit for Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers, which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main substrate 102 is equipped with an input/output port 505 for inputting/outputting data to/from a device external to the main substrate 102 . Further, the main substrate 102 is formed with various circuit units such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit, although not shown.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform game-related processing, predetermined control data, and the like. The RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501 .

Subsequently, the payout control board 103 is equipped with a CPU (payout CPU) 511 , a ROM (payout ROM) 512 and an RWM 513 . Among them, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The ROM 512 also stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform payout-related processing, predetermined control data, and the like. In addition, the RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various processes, data generated during the process, etc. when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501 .

The sub-main board 301 described above includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. . The input side of the input port 527 is connected to the output side of the main substrate 102, and the output side of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, and the like.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (instruction) for symbol display transmitted from the main board 102 . The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 521. The work RWM 523 is for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. memory.

Data transmission/reception between the main substrate 102 and the sub-main substrate 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication mode from the main substrate 102 to the sub-main substrate 301 (one-way communication). Since one-way communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. FIG. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301 . In order to enable such one-way communication, for example, a communication restriction means (buffer circuit, etc.) is mounted on the main substrate 102, and data output to the sub-main substrate 301 is controlled by this communication restriction means. It is possible to do it through

The sub-sub-board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, bus lines (not shown), and the like. Additionally, the video controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540 . The input side of the input port 538 is connected to the output side of the sub-main board 301, and the output side of the input port 538 is connected to devices such as the CPU 531, work RWM 532, program ROM 533, and the like.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 60. By rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 can be changed. ) is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 60 . The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the patterns are superimposed in the order of the layers determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁
<Power supply and data backup>

The aforementioned power supply board 251 includes a power supply section 541 for supplying power to each section of the pachinko game machine 10 and an initialization switch circuit section 543 having an initialization switch 544 . The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating voltages to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside, and applies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc., to the main substrate 102, the payout control substrate 103, And supply to other prescribed equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal for clearing the backup data to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by, for example, the administrator of the amusement arcade when the power is turned on. is equipped with a circuit that outputs As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can hold (back up) stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the pachinko game machine 10 is powered on, when the above-described initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the data backed up in the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 (backup data) is restored. cleared. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when the power is turned on, the state changes to the setting change state according to the input state of the initialization switch 544 and the input state of the setting key. Whether or not to perform initialization, the range of initialization, etc. can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit section 543 and the input signal associated with the setting key.

The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103 so that the backed-up data can be cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. can be Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated when the power is turned on, the backup data for the main board 102 and part of the backup data for the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared when the payout initialization switch (not shown) is further operated.

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the pachinko game machine 10 is powered off, so that data can be retained (backed up). In other words, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to memories and areas (not shown) for temporarily storing various data. This backup area 503a is used for the stack pointer and the , registers, and I/O values. When the power is turned on normally or when the power failure is resolved, the state of the main board 102 and the like is restored to the state before the power shutdown based on the information in the backup area 503a. Here, with respect to the shutdown of the power supply, hereinafter, "power interruption" may be referred to as "power interruption" in addition to "power interruption", but both have the same meaning.

Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by power-off processing (described later) when the power is turned off, and each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by power-on processing (to be described later) when the power is turned on. . As the backup area 503a, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

Also, the RWM 513 in the payout control board 103, like the RWM 503 in the main board 102, is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 after the pachinko game machine 10 is powered off, so that data can be held (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to memory and areas (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is used to store the values of the stack pointer, each register, I/O, etc. at the time of power interruption when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. area. Then, along with the normal power-up and the cancellation of the power failure, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power shutdown based on the information in the backup area 513a.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by power-off processing in the payout control board 103 at the time of power-off, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is performed at the time of power-on, power-on processing in the payout control board 103 ( control start processing). As the backup area 513a, as in the case of the main substrate 102, an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to a backup power supply can be used.

The main substrate 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors power interruption due to power failure or the like as described above. This power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main substrate 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control substrate 103 when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors a stable DC voltage (for example, 30 volts), which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251, and when this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, it detects the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) and outputs the above-described power failure signal. Based on the input of such a power-off signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute predetermined power-off processing.

Note that the electrical characteristics of the main substrate 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage drops below the predetermined voltage at which the power interruption signal is output, there is sufficient time to execute predetermined processing such as power shutdown processing. During this period, the voltage output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 . However, not limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or is supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 separately in separate systems. You may do so.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a part other than the main board 102 . For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251 and a power failure signal may be input to each board from the power failure monitoring circuit part 506 on the power supply board 251 . It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103 . Furthermore, the function of the power supply board 251 may be performed by the main board 102 . In this case, it is conceivable to form the power source section 541 on the main board 102 .

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided in the payout control board 103, and the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may each output a power failure signal and perform power failure processing based on the power failure signal. Further, out of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, only the payout control board 103 may be provided with the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, and the power failure signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the aforementioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, etc. are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Triggers for the execution of the above-described power-off processing include hardware that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) when a power-off signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. Periodic interrupt processing based on settings, such as software-like processing that checks a power-off flag that is set when a voltage drop is detected.

In this embodiment, power-off processing is performed based on the hardware trigger of NMI. Signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed by, for example, inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506, but also due to noise entering the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. It should be noted that the transition to power-off processing can also be performed based on a software technique, as will be described later as another embodiment. It is also possible to set a power-off flag based on a power-off signal input to the NMI terminal and use it as a trigger for executing power-off processing. Here, data is backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but this is not limitative. It is also possible to perform data backup in the same manner as the board 102 or the payout control board 103 .

Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as determination of entering a ball, lottery, and command transmission by the functions of the components described above (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows representative functional means in each of the main substrate 102, sub-main substrate 301, and sub-sub-substrate 302. FIG. Among these, the main board 102 includes the entering ball determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the normal figure lottery means 113, the reservation control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening and closing control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120 and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102 uses these functional means to perform lottery for special symbols, lottery for normal symbols, hold control, main control display, special game, specific game, opening/closing control, advance information, and so on. Execute notifications, etc.

The above-described ball entry determining means 110 detects the entry of a game ball into each winning opening (actuating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.) by sensors provided in each winning opening. Based on the signal output from
<< Winning Lottery Function for Special Designs >>

The above-described first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning opening 62 . The first lottery means 111 has the functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121 , a first win/loss determination means 122 , a first symbol determination means 123 and a first pattern determination means 124 . The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display section 70 of the aforementioned main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7).

Similarly, the above-described second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning hole 63 . The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125 , a second win/loss determination means 126 , a second symbol determination means 127 and a second pattern determination means 128 . The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbols stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display section 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquiring means 121 provided in the above-mentioned first lottery means 111 converts the value of the jackpot random number related to the first lottery into the first lottery lottery value when the ball enters the first start winning hole 62. to get as In addition, the second lottery value obtaining means 125 provided in the second lottery means 112 described above obtains the value of the jackpot random number related to the second lottery with the entry of the ball into the second start winning opening 63 as the second lottery. Obtained as a lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). generated by the calculation (addition) used. A built-in random number generated by, for example, a 16-bit random number circuit is used as the hardware random number, and a value updated for each interrupt by a software random number generating program is used as the software random number. Either one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

A first success/failure determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 performs a success/failure determination based on the first success/failure lottery value, and determines whether the first success/failure lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (hit value) for winning. to judge. Similarly, the second success/failure determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 performs a success/failure determination based on the above-mentioned second success/failure lottery value, and the second success/failure lottery value becomes a predetermined value (hit value) to be a hit. Determine if applicable. In the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 122 and the second success/failure determination means 126, a success/failure determination table (for example, FIG. 9 ( a)) is used. Here, the normal time probability variable jackpot shown in FIG. 9(a) indicates a random number range that always results in a big hit, and the probability variable jackpot is a random value range that results in a jackpot only at the time of variable probability. It is shown that.

The first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are selected when one of the big hits is won in the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , the type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number (symbol random number) relating to symbol determination, and the type of special symbol.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as "symbol random number per special symbol" or "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of wins include small wins, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 select special symbols when winning a small win in a special symbol jackpot lottery. The type of symbol is determined based on the small winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 10(c)).

The symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting prize-winning hole, similarly to the win-or-no lottery value described above. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of winning, and the type of big winning and the presence or absence of a small winning are determined in association with the obtained symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbols in the corresponding special symbol display section based on the special figure variation pattern table. decide. The special figure variation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure variation patterns and the pattern lottery value, which is a random number (variation pattern random number) relating to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is obtained when the ball enters the starting prize-winning hole, similarly to the win-or-no lottery value described above. Furthermore, the variation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are, for example, at the time of the big hit, at the time of loss, presence or absence of reach, presence or absence of time saving, the number of reservations, the number of fluctuations after the big hit, etc. Depending on various game situations A plurality of different special figure variation pattern tables are provided.

The variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) related to the special symbol defines the time (variation time) from the start of variation to the stop in the variation display of the special symbol. And, the special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, such as from one second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, in each special figure variation pattern, the variation time is set as the end condition of the variation display, and in the above-described first special symbol display portion 70 or second special symbol display portion 71 (see FIG. 7), special After the variable display of the symbols is started and a prescribed variable time elapses, the special symbols are stopped and displayed.

For many of the special figure variation patterns to be selected during time saving, the variation time is set relatively shorter than the special figure variation pattern to be selected when non-time saving, In other words, during time saving It can be said that the average value per variation of the variation time to be selected is shorter than the average value per variation of the variation time selected during non-working hours. In addition, it can be said that the time reduction (time reduction game) is a game state (a state in which the time related to 1 change is short) in which the special symbol variation efficiency is high. However, the special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when it is non-time saving and the number of reservations is 4 includes those with a short fluctuation time compared to the specific special figure fluctuation pattern during time saving there is

In addition, in the present embodiment, most of the variation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as when the probability varies have extremely short variation times (for example, about 0.6 seconds). And, in such a situation, based on the fluctuation pattern of extremely short time, the variable display of the special symbols and the effect associated therewith are executed.
<<Relationship between the success or failure random number and the setting value related to the special symbol>>

Subsequently, the relationship between the success/failure random number and the setting value related to the special symbol will be described. FIG. 9(a) shows the success/fail random number for the set value "1" among the set values "1" to "6" in this embodiment. With regard to the hit/fail random number table with the set value "1" shown in FIG. is "0 to 205". Furthermore, in normal times, the random value range "206 to 64875" is an outlier for both the first lottery and the second lottery.

On the other hand, when the probability is high (variable probability), "206 to 615" is the jackpot value for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Also, for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random number range "616 to 64875" is a deviation value in both the normal time and the probability variable time. Furthermore, for both the first lottery and the second lottery, the random value range "64876 to 65535" is the small winning value both in the normal time and in the probability variable time.

FIG. 12 shows a list of winning values for each set value. As for the set value "1" among these, as shown in FIG. 9(a), "0 to 205" is the normal jackpot value. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 206, and the probability of a big hit at normal times is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value "2", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 206". Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/317 (≈207/65536).

Furthermore, for the set value "3", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 207". Then, the number of random numbers is 208, and the probability of a big hit at normal time is 1/315 (≈208/65536). As for the setting value "4", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 208". Then, the number of random numbers is 209, and the probability of a big hit at normal time is 1/314 (≈209/65536).

As for the set value "5", the jackpot value at normal time is "0 to 209". Then, the number of random numbers is 210, and the probability of a big hit at normal time is 1/312 (≈208/65536). As for the set value "6", the normal jackpot value is "0 to 210". The number of random numbers is 211, and the normal jackpot probability is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this manner, the range of jackpot values is determined so that the larger the numerical value of the set value, the higher the probability of the jackpot.

Regarding the high probability, the set value is "1", the jackpot value is "0 to 615", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For set values ``2'' to ``6'', the jackpot values are ``0 to 618'', ``0 to 621'', ``0 to 624'', ``0 to 627'', and ``0 to 630'' in order. , the approximate jackpot probabilities are "1/106", "1/105", "1/105", "1/104", and "1/104" in that order.

Here, the reason why the approximate jackpot probabilities include the same value such as "1/105" and "1/104" is that the decimal point numbers are rounded to indicate the jackpot probabilities. In this embodiment, the range of jackpot values is determined so that the larger the set value, the higher the jackpot probability. In addition, the multiplying factor of the probability at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability is "three times" for all set values, which is common.

As for the small hit, the random number range is "64876 to 65535" regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of occurrence of a small hit is 1/99 regardless of the probability state or set value. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 12, the design value of the ball payout rate is 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values "1" to "6," respectively.

In the examples of FIGS. 9A and 12, the minimum value of the numerical range, ie, 0, is used as the jackpot value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in preparation for fraud such as intentionally minimizing the pass/fail random value updated by resetting the power supply, for example. Furthermore, it is possible not to allocate "0" to the small win or to allocate the maximum value (here, "65535") to the big win or the small win.

In the present embodiment, prior determination (so-called look-ahead) is performed for the winning/failing lottery results using the winning/failing random numbers shown in FIGS. It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<<Various lottery functions related to normal patterns>>

Next, the above-mentioned general pattern lottery means 113 will be described. This general pattern lottery means 113 has general pattern lottery value acquisition means 129 , general pattern adequacy determination means 130 , general pattern determination means 131 , and general pattern pattern determination means 132 . Then, the normal pattern lottery means 113, when the passing of the game ball in the operation port 68 is detected by the above-described entering ball determination means 110, executes a lottery (normal pattern lottery) related to the normal pattern based on the detection result. do.

In this general pattern lottery, the general pattern lottery value acquiring means 129 acquires a general pattern lottery value that is a random number (normal pattern random number) related to the normal pattern, and the general pattern determination means 131 determines the general pattern determination table. Referenced. In this general pattern determination table, the correspondence relationship between the general pattern lottery value and the type of normal pattern is defined. Then, the normal pattern associated with the normal pattern lottery value is determined by the normal pattern correctness determination means 130 as to whether or not it corresponds to the hit, and if it corresponds to the hit, the type of hit is determined. be done.

In addition, the normal pattern lottery value is acquired with the entry of the ball into the operation port 68, and the normal pattern determination means 132 uses the acquired normal pattern lottery value to determine the fluctuation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation pattern ) is determined. Each normal pattern fluctuation pattern is associated with a normal pattern lottery value that is a random number (normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number) related to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, and is associated with the normal pattern lottery value obtained, and the game situation The normal figure fluctuation pattern according to is determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the normal pattern lottery value, which is a random number related to normal symbols, and the normal pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers.
<<Features related to holding special symbols>>

Next, the suspension control means 114 described above will be described. The reservation control means 114 has a first reservation means 133 , a second reservation means 134 and a normal figure reservation means 135 . Of these, the first holding means 133 is acquired by the entering ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the first special symbol is not satisfied when there is a new entering ball into the first start winning opening 62. Information (first special figure reservation storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the reservation related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and the reservation related to the first special symbol is possible within a range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been executed when the ball is entered is finished, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is generated before the ball is entered. If there is no suspension related to, the variation start condition related to the first special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation related to the first special symbol is permitted.

Regarding the above-mentioned second holding means 134, when there is a new entry into the second start winning opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by the entry. Information related to various random numbers (second win/fail lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily retained and stored.

When the variation display of the second special symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered is completed, the variation start condition related to the second special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation related to the second special symbol is established. will be allowed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to 4 as in the case of the first special symbol.

For the above-mentioned first special symbol and second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and the special game is controlled, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is finished.
<<Functions related to holding normal symbols>>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general pattern reservation means 135 will be described. The normal pattern holding means 135, when there is a ball in the operation port 68 (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the normal pattern is not satisfied, the random number acquired by the ball (normal pattern lottery value, etc.) is temporarily retained and stored. And, until the fluctuation start condition is established, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol relating to the above-described entering ball is not permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the reservation related to the normal design is set to 4, and the reservation related to the normal design is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit.

When the variation display of the normal symbol that has been executed when the above-mentioned ball is entered is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the condition for starting the variation related to the normal symbol is established, and the new normal symbol Design variation is permitted.
<<Functions related to main control display>>

Next, the aforementioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 has a first special figure control means 136 , a second special figure control means 137 , a general figure control means 138 , a pending display control means 139 and other display control means 140 . Of these, the first special symbol control means 136 is the first special symbol display section 70 (see FIG. 7) according to the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111, and the variation of the first special symbol. A display (for example, a flashing display in which a predetermined portion of the LED indicator lights flash every 100 msec) is performed. Then, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the determined symbol in the first special symbol display section 70 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

Furthermore, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned second special symbol is established, the second special symbol display unit 71 ( (see FIG. 7), the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the determined symbol in the second special symbol display section 71 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

In addition, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned normal pattern is satisfied, the normal pattern control means 138 follows the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery means 113, and the normal pattern display unit 59 (see FIG. 7 ), the variable display of normal symbols is performed. Further, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the determined symbols in the normal symbol display portion 59 after the variation time determined by the variation pattern has passed.

Furthermore, the reservation display control means 139 displays the number of reservations related to the above-described first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol. These pending numbers are displayed in the first special symbol memory display portion 83, the second special symbol memory display portion 84, and the normal symbol memory display portion 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. will be In addition, the other display control means 140 described above controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-described first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol, and various reserved displays.
<<Features related to special games>>

Next, the aforementioned special game control means 116 will be explained. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied when the special symbols are stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when winning the jackpot, and determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and determines that the special game operation condition is satisfied. A special game is executed to be opened in a manner (predetermined number of times of unit game and opening pattern of big winning opening during unit game).
<<Features related to specific games>>

Subsequently, the aforementioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control related to the above-mentioned probability variation, time saving, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a variable probability state, a time saving state, or the like, according to the type of the big hit. The probability variable state is attached to some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some big wins, the variable probability state continues until the next big win, and for other big wins with variable probability, it continues until the total number of variable display times after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). . During the variable probability state, the winning probability of the big win by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a higher value than the normal time when the probability is not variable.

In addition, the time saving state is continued until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined end condition number of times (for example, 100 times) counted from the end of the special game. Furthermore, during time saving, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 change the time saving variation pattern so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than the normal state. to select.

Furthermore, as described above, the entry facilitation game is executed in conjunction with the execution of the time saving as the specific game, the operation of the normal electric accessory is facilitated, and it is placed at the entrance of the second start winning opening. The opening and closing blades are easier to open. The opening/closing control of the opening/closing blades is controlled by opening/closing control means 118, which will be described later.
<<Functions related to open/close control>>

Next, the aforementioned opening/closing control means 118 will be described. The opening/closing control means 118 controls the opening/closing operation of the normal electric accessories (opening/closing blades) of the second starting winning opening 63 and the big winning opening device 90 . The opening/closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 76 to open the normal electric accessory of the second start winning opening 63 when the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner. Furthermore, the opening/closing control means 118 performs control for sending an opening instruction to the big winning gate (open) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the big winning gate device 90 .
＜＜Functions related to prior information notification＞＞

Next, the aforementioned prior information notifying means 119 will be described. The advance information notifying means 119 is acquired regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entering ball is withheld when the ball enters the first starting winning hole 62 or the second starting winning hole 63. Information related to the various random values obtained is transmitted to the sub-board (the sub-main board 301 in this case) as advance notification information.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each winning lottery value obtained above (first winning lottery value or second winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), each pattern Information can be exemplified as to what kind of success or failure range, pattern range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

It should be noted that transmission of such advance notification information enables various prefetch effects on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a pending notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<<Functions related to command transmission>>

Next, the aforementioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmission means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 . The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when starting winning, when special symbols start to fluctuate, when special symbols stop fluctuating, and when a big win occurs. .
<Basic functions of the sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the aforementioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 has main command receiving means 141, effect pattern determining means 142, sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling speaker output and the like, and a light control means 145 for controlling game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information designating a display effect to be displayed on the effect display device 60 and a sound effect and a light effect to be performed together with the display effect as necessary. During the variable display of the pattern 190, a performance suggesting a high degree of expectation for a big win is executed. Here, the "expectation" in this embodiment can be rephrased as "reliability". In addition, the ``expectation level'' is, for example, in a broad sense, ``expecting the player to be in a suitable (favorable, desirable) gaming state (including a situation in which an effect that is not performed frequently is performed). It can also be explained as "the degree to which it is possible to In the following, regarding the "expectation level" of the big hit, the production stages (normal pattern, chance up pattern, fixed pattern) that increase the expectation of a big hit due to fluctuations when appearing among the patterns of the same kind of notice production will be described. When the winning variation pattern information (variation pattern in the winning variation) and the losing variation pattern information (variation pattern in the losing variation) for generating the performance 1 are confirmed, the winning variation pattern is included in the variation pattern corresponding to the performance 1. It may be used for each of the statements that describe the probability of being hit. In addition, in the following explanation, especially when referring to "expectation level", "development expectation level", "expectation level of performance execution", etc. without referring to "jackpot expectation level", "hit expectation level", etc. , sometimes means a broad sense of “expectation” that is not directly linked to the big hit.

When the effect pattern determination means 142 determines the effect pattern, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmitting means 143 . The command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 also includes sound information and the like for reading sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. In the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, thereby forming an animation image. Then, the animation for effect is displayed on the effect display device 60 .
<Examples of specific modes related to specific games>

Next, a specific aspect of the specific game mentioned above will be described. As mentioned above, as a specific game, the probability variation function of special symbols (probability variation), the variation time reduction function of special symbols (shortening of time), and the easy entry game (probability variation function of normal symbols, variation time reduction of normal symbols function, a combination of the opening extension function of ordinary electric accessories) is provided. At least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the jackpot lottery (stop display pattern of special symbols) or the game result during the jackpot. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, instead of the above-mentioned so-called ST machine, some jackpots adopt a specification in which the variable probability period continues until the next jackpot, and the specific aspect thereof will be described later.
<<Probability variation game>>

The probability change mentioned above changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit becomes higher than the normal probability state. In the pachinko game machine adopting ST, the duration of the variable probability state (variable probability period) is determined based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol.

The number of fluctuations of the special symbols is determined as one time from the fluctuation display of the special symbols to the stop display. And, in the probability variable period in ST, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). Such a function that allows the variable probability period to end before the next big hit occurs can be called ST or a variable probability of cutting the number of times.
<<Variation time reduction game>>

The above-mentioned reduction in time generally shortens the variation time of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) on the main control display device 53 as compared with the normal game. Here, "generally shortened" does not necessarily mean that the normal game is shortened in all cases. It means that it can contain And, according to this time saving, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, even if the winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening 62 and second starting winning opening 63) occurs continuously, special The variable display and stop display of patterns can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and many chances of a big winning lottery can be ensured.

Furthermore, the continuation period of the time saving state (short time period) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbols, as in the variable probability state. And, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the variable probability period and the short period of time are set to the same period, but the variable probability period and the short period of time may be different periods. For example, it is possible to set the variable probability period to 104 times and the short period of time to 100 times. In addition, the probability variable period and the short period of time are not limited to being constant. For example, it is possible to set the variable probability period to any of 4 times, 25 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the generated jackpot. In addition, it is possible to set the time period to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the big win that has occurred.

Also, it is possible to provide a so-called falling lottery function. The drop lottery may be exemplified as follows. For example, after reaching a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of variations (here, 100 times), the probability variation and time saving are reached for each special symbol variation until the maximum number of variations is reached, A lottery (specific game end lottery) is executed as to whether or not to end probability variation and time saving. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability variation and time reduction are terminated, and the game state from the next variation returns to the normal state without the probability variation and time reduction.

Furthermore, it is not limited to executing both probability variation and time reduction, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in a specific game. For example, depending on the type of the winning jackpot, it is possible to give only time reduction and not give probability variation, or to give only time reduction and only probability variation.
<<Easy entry game>>

Next, the above-mentioned easy ball entry game will be described. This ball entry facilitation game is a game state in which the function related to the normal electric accessory is set in favor of the player, and the opening state of the second start winning opening 63 makes it easier to accept game balls than usual. be. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the control modes such as time saving related to normal symbols, probability fluctuation related to normal symbols, open extension related to normal electric accessories, and a combination of these control modes, the second The easiness of entering the ball into the start winning opening 63 is enhanced, and an easy-ball-entering state is formed. In relation to this "easy ball entry game" and the above-mentioned "base", "electric sapo", etc., below, "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric sapo" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electrical support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electrical support state".

Among the above-described various control modes in the normal design, the time saving related to the normal design is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal design is the winning probability of the normal design. It is a control mode (probability variation related to normal symbols) that improves the normal state. Furthermore, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessary is a control mode in which the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened (long opening) longer than the opening (short opening) at normal time (during non-specific game) be.

As described above, the entry facilitation game during the specific game uses the three functions of shortening the normal pattern time, changing the probability of the open lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric role to enter the second start winning port 63. Increase ball ease. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to increase the ease of entering the second start winning hole 63 . Moreover, it is also possible to switch between a period in which at least one of the three functions is performed and a period in which it is not performed according to the game state.

The continuation period of such easy-entering game can be determined based on the short period of time related to the special symbols. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the easy-entering game is continued during the time saving related to the special symbols, and the easy-entering game ends when the time saving related to the special symbols ends. And, in this case, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern (normal pattern fluctuation pattern) in which the pattern fluctuation is started after the time saving of the special pattern is finished is provided for normal time (non-specific game time) It is possible to determine from among the fluctuation patterns.
<Main effects on pachinko machines>
<<Basic display mode of production pattern>>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on commands from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be mainly described. Here, first, the basic display mode of the production pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described. As for the effect pattern 190, an extremely wide variety of display modes and control modes are defined with respect to items such as its type, function, purpose, and cooperation with other effect displays. However, here, in order to avoid complicating the explanation, basic matters will be explained, and more detailed matters related to the production pattern 190 will be described later as appropriate.

The effect symbol 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8(a)). Furthermore, the effect pattern 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special pattern is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53 .

A stop pattern displayed along with the stop of the production pattern 190 is composed of a combination of three patterns of a left production pattern 190a, a middle production pattern 190b, and a right production pattern 190c. When the result of the jackpot lottery on the main board 102 is a jackpot, a combination of three patterns, such as "777" and "555", is used as the stop pattern representing the big win. Is displayed. In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a combination of one or all of the performance symbols different from the other performance symbols such as "767", "928", "331", etc. A symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, "stop symbol" and "symbol stop" in this embodiment mean that the three production symbols 190 are "determined and stopped". That is, even if the three production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the production display device 60 while maintaining the combination of, for example, "767" and "928", the "fixed stop" is achieved by itself. It doesn't apply to what you did. The state in which the effect symbols 190 have not yet reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such a "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect pattern 190 is vibrating (shaking) in small steps can be exemplified. The mode of temporary stop, in which the performance symbols 190 are shaking little by little while maintaining the combination, can be referred to as the mode of "fluctuation". As a mode of swinging of the production pattern 190 in this "temporary stop", vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, etc. can be exemplified, and the movement range can be exemplified by several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", it is possible to exemplify a state in which all the performance symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination through the temporary stop state. Furthermore, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been made. As an effect indicating that the fixed display has been made, the fixed stop state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed and stopped production patterns 190a to 190c are displayed in a state in which a special effect is added. (symbol effect), LEDs (lamps) provided in the center decoration 64, and the like can be exemplified.

By effecting a temporary stop (temporary stop display) in this way, it is possible to make it appear that a plurality of fluctuations are being executed during one fluctuation. In addition, depending on the effect of the temporary stop, the player is asked whether or not to make a fixed stop (in other words, whether it will change again without a fixed stop, whether it will be a hit with a fixed stop, or whether it will be a loss with a fixed stop etc.).

Here, as the pattern effect, each of the production patterns 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), a bright spot is circled once or multiple times around each of the production patterns 190a to 190c, and so on. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the patterns 190a to 190c, moving the performance patterns 190a to 190c by several millimeters and returning them to their original positions.

In addition, in the above-described "ready-to-win" display mode, there is a case where the effect symbol that maintains the combination of the ready-to-win is displayed in the above-described "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the ready-to-win display by this "temporary stop", the symbols (in this case, medium effect pattern 190b) that have been variably displayed constitute a combination of losing (combination of losing reach) and "temporarily stop" to stop the combination. An example of an effect can be exemplified in which "fixed stop" is performed while the variable display is finished. In addition, from the state in which the three production patterns 190a to 190c are performing "temporary stop" by combining the losing reach, through the display of a predetermined cut-in image (cut-in production), the middle production pattern 190b resumes fluctuation. Then, an effect (second half reach) can be exemplified in which the ready-to-win effect develops into a highly reliable one (relatively high reliability for a big hit).

It should be noted that the mode of scroll display of the effect symbols 190 is not limited to the vertical scroll described above, and various display modes can be employed. And, as other display modes, for example, a horizontal scroll mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.), and the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are individually rotated around the vertical axis (rotated). , and a rotation mode for performing a variable display can be exemplified. Also, for example, the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen toward the front along a straight or curved (circling) trajectory. A display mode in which the images are successively drawn out can also be exemplified. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a scrolling display mode in which the effect pattern that goes from the rear to the front descends from the top to the front.

Further, the scroll mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes described above. For example, when a predetermined effect is executed, a predetermined scroll mode is switched to another scroll mode. It is also possible to In addition, it is possible to vary the scroll mode for each of the plurality of presentation modes.

Furthermore, there is a case where a full-rotation effect is performed as a scroll mode for deterministically informing a big hit. In this full-rotation effect, the decorative patterns such as the effect patterns 190a to 190c are scrolled at a low speed while being aligned.

Also, when a reach occurs, it is possible to output a reach voice as a sound output. This ready-to-win voice is an announcement suggesting the degree of expectation of winning or the like by a sound generated when the ready-to-win is established or after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed after the ready-to-win is established. By executing this reach voice, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning and the like in combination with the image display, the movement of the accessory, etc., when reaching the reach.

8(a) and 8(b) exemplify a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the display area 194 in the vertical direction. It has only one line. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to set the number of effective lines to 2 lines or 5 lines.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the production pattern 190 is composed of a part representing a predetermined symbol such as a number (element pattern which is the above-mentioned symbolic element production pattern) and a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol. It is possible to configure by combining with other parts (element patterns that are non-symbolic element production patterns). Various design drawings, portraits, combinations thereof, and the like can be exemplified as the portions composed of patterns representing symbols other than predetermined symbols. It is also possible to In the example of FIG. 8(b), a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing symbols other than the predetermined symbol.

Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the aforementioned reduced effect symbol display area 361 is superimposed on the screen. This reduced effect symbol display area 361 displays the effect symbols (also referred to as "mini effect symbol" or "mini symbol") corresponding to each effect symbol 190a-190c in a size smaller than each effect symbol 190a-190c. It is something that can be shown. By displaying a mini pattern in the reduced production pattern display area 361, the situation of whether or not each production pattern 190a to 190c is fluctuating, the situation when each production pattern 190a to 190c is stopped (the situation at the time of temporary stop ) can be shown inconspicuously separately from each of the production patterns 190a to 190c.

In addition, by displaying the reduced performance pattern display area 361, even if the performance patterns related to the performance patterns 190a to 190c are made more transparent and invisible to the player, the performance patterns are diversified. The status of 190a-190c can be shown to the player. For example, when performing a background notice effect that covers the entire screen (a specific character is displayed large in the background with high expectations for a big hit), etc., this background notice effect is displayed with priority over the effect patterns 190a to 190c. In other words, for the player to see, the transparency of the effect patterns 190a to 190c is increased, so that the visibility of the background notice effect is not greatly lowered, and the reduced effect pattern display area 361 is displayed. It is possible to grasp the fluctuation situation, the stop situation, and the like.

Furthermore, in addition to such a reduced production pattern display area 361, whether each production pattern 190a to 190c is in the process of changing, and which of the special figures 1 and 2 is being displayed, For example, it is possible to display a pattern indicated by a small one-digit number difference in an inconspicuous manner. Such a symbol can be called a "guaranteed symbol" or the like. The display position of this guarantee pattern can be set to a position where it is not hidden even when a single or a plurality of movable production members appear in front of the production display device 60. - 特許庁Furthermore, it is possible to display the guarantee pattern at a position where it is not hidden even if any movable production member appears, or to change it according to the movable production member that appears.
<<Examples of Production Patterns>>

Next, the effect patterns described above will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102 . Furthermore, in the production pattern, the mode of production including the production pattern 190 is defined. More specifically, in the production pattern, the variation process from the start of variation to the stop of variation for the selected production pattern 190, and the production process such as the background displayed in combination with the production pattern 190 and the development of the story are defined. there is And, there are production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Among these, when the production pattern of "with reach" is executed, the production display device 60 performs the ready-to-win production in which if one more production pattern (in this case, medium production pattern 190b) is completed, a big win is achieved. Then, when the result of the winning lottery relating to the special pattern is a big win, the display of the odds such as ``777'' or ``333'' corresponding to the kind of the big win is performed by the determined and stopped performance pattern 190.例文帳に追加In addition, when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a loss, a combination indicating a loss such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been determined and stopped.

Furthermore, when the effect pattern of "no reach" is executed, the combination of the left effect pattern 190a and the right effect pattern 190c, such as "928" and "331", which is not a reach combination, It is performed by the production pattern 190 which has been determined and stopped.

These performance patterns include those with various long and short variation times, and in particular, the "with reach" variation pattern includes a variation time of several minutes. In addition, in the present embodiment, "no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)", "normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds A performance pattern without reach, a performance pattern of normal reach, and a performance pattern of super reach corresponding to "super reach (high hit reliability reach) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)" are provided. For these effect patterns, for example, one variation pattern is associated with a plurality of effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is more diversified than the above-described variation patterns. Furthermore, "super reach" can be rephrased as "SP (special) reach".
<<Holding effect display related to special symbols>>

Next, the suspension display (suspension effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. A second reserved number display portion 197 indicating the number of reserved winning/failed lottery values in two games is displayed. In order to simplify the description and illustration here, individual pending displays are represented by perfect circles, but the pending displays may be made using other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display section 196 described above. In addition, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four reservations are displayed in the first reservation number display section 196. FIG.

Further, the pending display in the first pending number display section 196 can be performed at the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first reservation number display portion 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the right end portion of the first reservation number display portion 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. A second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, hereinafter, the suspension displays performed at the first display position to the fourth display position are referred to as "H1", "H2", "H3", and "H4", respectively.

For example, in the production display device 60, while the production pattern 190 related to the first game is being performed, and in a situation where no holding display is performed on the first holding number display unit 196, a hold occurs. Then, a hold display is performed at the first display position on the right end (position of "H1" described above). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "H2" to "H4" have not occurred. In this situation where "Hold 1" is occurring and another hold occurs, the display related to the hold that has occurred is displayed at the position of "Hold 2" to the left of "Hold 1". In a situation where "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed and "Hold 3" and "Hold 4" are not displayed, if a further hold occurs, "Hold 3" will be displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. or "Save 4" is displayed.

Then, if the variable display being executed when "Hold 1" occurs ends, and other variable start conditions related to the first game are satisfied, the above-described suspended storage information related to "Hold 1" is displayed. When the stage is reached, the pending display of “Hold 1” moves to the right side of the first pending number display section 196 . The change information display section 195 is provided on the right side of the first pending number display section 196 . The variation information display section 195 is an area for displaying information (the variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. In other words, the pending display of “Hold 1” moves to the variable information display section 195 and changes to the variable information display 198 when the variable display related to the corresponding pending storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the pending display of "Hold 1" to the variable information display section 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is enlarged when the pending display of “Hold 1” is changed to the variable information display 198. FIG. 8A and 8B illustrate a state in which three pending displays of "H1" to "H3" are displayed in the first pending number display section 196. FIG.

Here, the display of a moving image representing a new pending display when a hold occurs can be called a "calling display" or a "calling pending animation" related to the hold. In addition, when the hold is digested, the display of the moving image when moving the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 (or the second hold number display unit 197) is "shift display" or "shift animation and so on. Further, the display of the variation information display 198 on the variation information display unit 195 can also be referred to as "holding digestion transmission image", "variation corresponding image", or the like. In addition, in order to distinguish from the pending number display area 367, which represents the number of pending pending numbers, the first pending number display section 196 and the second pending number display section 197 are changed to the first pending image display section 196 and the second pending image display section. 197 can also be called.

As described above, when the hold display in "H1" moves to the change information display section 195, the waiting order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and "H2" shifts to the position of "H1". Furthermore, when "H3" and "H4" exist, "H3" is shifted to the position of "H2", and "H4" is shifted to the position of "H3". In such a situation, if a further hold occurs, a new "hold 4" will occur, and the number of holds will reach the upper limit. Also, if no new hold occurs, the hold display is shifted along with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is moved up.

It should be noted that, in a broad sense, including the state of change from the pending display of "H1" to "H4" to the variable information display 198 in the variable information display unit 195, it can be regarded as a pending effect. Not limited to this, the pending display in "Holding 1" to "Holding 4" is treated as a pending display, and the state changed to the variable information display 198 in the variable information display unit 195 is not included in the pending display. is also possible.

In addition, when the variable display related to the production pattern 190 is not performed and the number of reservations is 0, and the ball is entered in the first start winning opening 62, the display of "Hold 1" is not performed (or displayed for a moment ), and the variation information display 198 is displayed directly (or through shift animation) on the variation information display section 195 . Only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the change information display 198 in the change information display section 195 is not included in the pending display.

Subsequently, the above-described second reservation number display section 197 will be described, but the description of the same points as the first reservation number display section 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second pending number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first pending number display unit 196 (on the right side as viewed from the player) across the above-described variation information display unit 195. ) are arranged in a color different from that of the image of the first reservation so that the relationship of “H1” to “H4” is symmetrical.

Further, the pending display can be performed in a mode corresponding to various game states. For example, when the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability and when it is a high probability, it can be exemplified that, when controlled in different production modes, the states of the pending display are different from each other.

Further, the positional relationship between the first pending number display unit 196, the second pending number display unit 197, and the variation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above-described one, and the second game is displayed as the second game as in the present embodiment. The pachinko game machine of the type that performs variable display of special symbols and performance symbols 190 in the order of occurrence of start winnings related to the first game and the second game instead of executing one game preferentially has the variation information display unit The left side of 195 may be lined up with 8 pending indications. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pending display and the variation information display 198 may be performed in association with the operation and effect related to the operation button 22 described above, but a specific aspect of such effect will be described later.
<<Pending look-ahead effect related to special design>>

Next, the reserved prefetch effect, which is one of the notice effects (prefetch effects) related to the special symbols, will be described. This reserved look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-described reserved storage information (first special figure reserved storage information or second reserved storage information). Furthermore, the pending read-ahead effect uses the above-described advance information notification function, and a reach or a big hit occurs with respect to the suspension that is digested after the effect performed using the effect pattern 190 etc. at that time. It is performed as a rendition that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, regarding the pending display that occurred at the position of "Hold 3" in the first pending number display unit 196 described above, unlike the display (for example, blue) that is the basic display mode in which pending changes are not made, green pending display By performing, it is shown that the expectation of reaching is higher than in the case of the normal blue mode. In addition to blue and green colors, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined patterns are provided, and a big hit is expected in the order of yellow, red, gold, rainbow color, and predetermined pattern rather than green. There is a production that shows that the degree is high.

Here, examples of the display mode of the "predetermined pattern" include an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like. In addition, it is possible to adopt not only the colors and patterns of the reserved display, but also items other than a perfect circular shape, human images, and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the various display modes described above with flashing and light emitting modes. In addition, a hold that wins a look-ahead effect including a hold look-ahead effect can be called, for example, a “trigger hold”.

The look-ahead effect related to suspension as described above may also be performed in the second game. As for the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow colors, and predetermined patterns. In addition, items other than the perfect circular shape, human images, and the like can be used as the pending display related to the second game.

Furthermore, the above-described look-ahead effect using the pending display in the first game and the second game can be called "suspended change" or the like. Such "hold change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the suspension occurrence, a display mode change at a timing after the suspension occurrence, and the like. be.

Among these, those that indicate a change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold include, for example, the occurrence of the hold, the start of the hold display, the progress of the hold, and the display of the hold, for example, "Hold 2", For example, the hold display changes while proceeding to "Hold 1". For example, when a hold occurs, a hold display is performed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "Hold 3", and when it moves to the position of "Hold 1", another color such as green is displayed. changes to .

Also, for both the first game and the second game, when the variable information display 198 is displayed, the pending display is displayed in a basic color, red, gold, rainbow color, predetermined pattern, etc., or a true display. In some cases, the degree of expectation for a big hit may be expressed by changing the display mode to an item other than a circular shape, a person image, or the like.

Furthermore, the following can be exemplified as a control mode related to the change of hold as described above. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) for determining the effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change is performed. A pending change pattern table is used for this pending change pattern lottery. In this pending change pattern table, the presence or absence of a pending change, and the timing when a pending change is executed (if there is a pending change) Matters relating to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are stipulated. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are determined.

In addition, when there are a plurality of holds selected in the hold change among "H1" to "H4", it is possible to cancel one of the holding prefetch effects. More specifically, for example, when "Hold 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hold 4" wins the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier If the holding change pattern that changes to rainbow color is won, the holding change related to the above-mentioned "holding 4" is canceled and not executed.

Furthermore, for example, when "Holding 4" occurs as in the above example, the holding related to "Holding 4" wins the holding change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all holdings that have occurred earlier However, if there is no change up to the rainbow color, and the change is only up to green or the like, the hold change that has already occurred is canceled and the change is not executed. It should be noted that, when the hold change is performed, it is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that the hold change will be performed (sometimes referred to as a “hold change suggestion effect”), which will be described separately later.
<<Continuous notice related to special design>>

Next, as another look-ahead effect pattern, a continuous notice (continuous effect) relating to special symbols will be described. This continuous notice includes genuine and pseudo ones, and the genuine continuous notice of these means that continuous notice production is performed over multiple variable displays related to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means performing an intermittent notice performance (pseudo continuous notice) such that the special symbols have changed a plurality of times for one time variation display related to the special symbols.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, a character who is the main character in the story in the production moves to different rooms sequentially aiming at the room that is the final destination for each change related to the special symbol. Examples of such things can be mentioned. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character fights against different enemies and wins each time the special symbol changes, aiming at the final target enemy. can also be exemplified.

Furthermore, the above-described genuine continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “continuous notice”) can be made based on advance notice information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 . More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "H3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 generates a production pattern corresponding to the variable display related to the subsequent special symbols. , a content that includes a continuous advance notice over three variable displays.

Then, when the suspension for one time is exhausted and the suspension of "Hold 3" is shifted to the position of "Hold 2", the first one of the selected production patterns according to the continuous notice An effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "Hold 2" to "Hold 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information display from "Hold 1" When moving to the part 195, the third and last notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the variation pattern related to the variable display being executed at the time when the above-described suspension of “H3” occurs, and the “H2” or “H1” occurring before that It is also possible to confirm such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "holding 3" is suspended, information indicating that a predetermined ready-to-win effect with a high degree of reliability of a big hit will be executed and a big hit will occur among various kinds of information already stored. If there is information indicating that the game is to be played, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the selected continuous announcement when the suspension of "H3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of the hold for "Hold 3", instead of immediately giving a continuous notice from the next fluctuation, wait for one fluctuation and change to "Hold 1" and look ahead. A case may be considered in which continuous notices are given across fluctuations.

In addition, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the ready-to-win display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the production pattern related to the one-time variable display of the special symbol. , a character that repeats acts a plurality of times, a temporary stop and re-change of the production pattern 190, and the like can be exemplified.

Furthermore, it is possible to display a pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern at the time of the pseudo-continuous advance notice. This pseudo-continuation suggesting pattern is one of the special decorative symbols displayed to arouse expectations as to whether or not a pseudo-continuation notice (so-called "pseudo-continuation") will occur. As the pseudo-continuous suggesting pattern, for example, a semi-transparent pseudo-continuous pattern accompanied by the character display of "NEXT" or "Continue" can be exemplified. The pseudo-run symbol described above can also be referred to as a re-fluctuation symbol, and is one of the special decoration symbols that indicates the occurrence of a pseudo-run with more certainty than the pseudo-run suggesting symbol.

As for the pseudo-continuous suggestive symbols and the pseudo-continuous symbols, scroll display or display in a fixed area can be exemplified. Further, as the "certain area" here, for example, the substantially central area of the display screen in the effect display device 60, the first pending number display unit 196 (or the second pending number display unit 197) and the like near can. Furthermore, it is also possible to display the pseudo-continuous suggesting symbols and the pseudo-continuous symbols in a fixed area through scroll display.

It should be noted that the content of the continuous notice as described above is merely an example, and various types of content other than those described can be adopted as the content of the continuous notice.
<<Production design related to normal design>>

Next, a description will be given of the effects associated with the above-described normal symbols. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform an effect related to normal symbols as part of the effect in the effect display device 60 . Then, when the effect display of the normal symbols is performed in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbols are displayed to such an extent that, for example, the types of winning and winning can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, a relatively large display body and a relatively small display body (a plurality of display bodies may be provided) are provided. Is possible. A large display can be called, for example, a "main display" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display can be called, for example, a "sub display" or a "sub liquid crystal". Furthermore, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the production pattern (199) relating to the normal pattern may be displayed on the small display body, for example. In addition, for example, a set of two LED indicator lamps may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device relating to normal symbols.

Further, in the case of performing an effect using the effect pattern related to the normal symbol, it is possible to perform the suspended effect display related to the normal symbol as part of the effect in the effect display device 60. - 特許庁Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect pending display related to the normal symbol can be replaced with, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. Also, at a predetermined portion of the above-mentioned center decoration 64, for example, a set of two LED indicator lamps is provided, thereby performing the production display of the number of reservations related to the normal symbols from "1" to "4". good too.
<<Production related to the limited frequency pattern>>

Next, an effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as part of the aforementioned effect patterns. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is a effect set so as to appear easily in a predetermined game state in correspondence with the variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is the content of the effect that indicates a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific change during a time-saving game, a predetermined change pattern is displayed on the main board. It can be exemplified by determining and surely generating a highly reliable reach as an effect.

In addition, as a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a no-ball hit), during a predetermined effect mode (variable probability, During the time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. Further, in addition to these, as a gaming situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of reservations related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces), or the number of reservations A case where it does not exist can also be exemplified. Furthermore, in a situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is executed, a limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern determined in this limited frequency table. selected.
<<Production using operation buttons>>

Next, an effect using the operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) (hereinafter referred to as "button effect") will be described. Regarding the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, various matters have been studied regarding the effect mode related to the operation buttons 22 and the relationship with the environmental settings related to the above-described volume control and the like. However, in order to avoid complicating the explanation here, basic matters will be explained, and detailed matters will be explained later.

The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when the button presentation is executed, and exhibits the function of giving the player the feeling of participating in the presentation of the game or the winning lottery. be. As a button effect, for example, during the variable display process of the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, a pattern of the operation button 22 (also called a button image) is displayed. , "Press the button", "Press repeatedly", "Press and hold", etc., or animations of various indicators indicating the remaining time, the amount of repeated presses, etc. can.

Here, FIG. 31(a) shows an example of a button image 401 accompanied by an indicator image 402, and FIG. 32(a) shows an example of the indicator image 402. As shown in FIG. In addition, when displaying the button image, etc., it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that arouses expectations for the display of the button image. Examples of this preliminary effect include a effect in which the button image gradually darkens from semi-transparent to display the button image, and a effect in which the button image remains semi-transparent and is erased so that the button image is not displayed. be able to. Further, there are a plurality of types of indicators, which can be distinguished by their functions, for example, by calling them "remaining time indicator" or "operation amount indicator".

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the guide display described above, a effect in which a character issues a comment, or a effect in which a friend character attacks an enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member (reference numeral omitted) is operated to notify that reach is reached. Further, a button performance may be performed during the ready-to-win performance, and in that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable performance member is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit.

Further, regarding the operation button 22 described above, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally disabled, but during the button presentation, the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button operation valid period. The button operation effective period is a preset fixed time. In addition, a plurality of types of button operation valid periods may be provided according to the type of button effect. Operation effect has a longer button operation effective period The average value of the button operation effective period in the effect is relatively longer), (2) There are multiple types of single-shot operation effects, and the first single-shot operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs before reach in the low base state) Also, the second one-shot operation effect (for example, the effect that occurs during reach in the low base state) has a longer button operation effective period. The effective period of the button operation may be longer for the second continuous hitting operation effect (for example, effect occurring during reach in high base state) than effect occurring before reach in low base state. In addition, having multiple types of one-shot operation effects and repeated hit operation effects means that, for example, a single-shot operation effect executed before reach (for example, an effect in which a dialogue notice is generated by pressing a button) or repeated operation effects (for example, button repeated ), a single-shot operation effect that is executed after reach (for example, a final effect in which a button is pressed to notify whether it is a big hit or not), and a repeated-hit operation effect (for example, if the button is repeatedly hit, the meter becomes 0) If it hits, it will be a big hit), a single operation effect that is executed during the big hit (for example, an effect that the movable production member is activated by pressing the button and notifies that the probability will change after the big hit) or a repeated operation effect (for example, It means that various types of button effects are provided, such as an effect that notifies that the probability fluctuates after a big hit if all enemies are defeated by repeated button presses.

A vibration motor or solenoid (not shown) may be combined with the operation button 22 to create a vibration effect that vibrates the operation button 22. For example, a drive source such as a motor may be used to expand the operating range of the operation button 22, thereby It is also possible to employ an effect mode such as causing 22 to plunge. Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is retracted, it is possible to set the amount of protrusion relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to a button having a small external size (for example, about several centimeters), and a hemispherical button of about ten and several centimeters may be used. Furthermore, as the operation input device (operation input means) such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. , models (figures) of the characters to which a touch sensor is added can also be adopted. Also, as the operation input means, the operation button 22 (or a smaller operation button, etc.) and the one having the form of an operation lever or the like are provided side by side, and it is possible to use them properly according to the situation such as the content of the production. .

In this embodiment, the operation button 22 is provided with a projecting/retracting mechanism and a vibrating mechanism, and is capable of projecting/retracting with respect to the upper ball plate 18 and vibrating the upper ball plate 18 . The operation button 22 is provided on the upper portion of a lever device (lever device unit) 184 as shown in FIG. 21(a). The lever device 184 is constructed by attaching a motor (here, a stepping motor) 186 as a drive source, a movable mechanism portion 187 and a lever body 188 to a base body 185 . Furthermore, a decorative portion 189 is provided on the upper portion of the lever body 188 to decorate the periphery of the operation button.

The lever device 184 is built in the plate unit 16 of the game machine frame 11 as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 21(a), the lever device 184 accommodates the lever body 188 so that the decorative portion 189 constitutes a surface substantially continuous with the outer surface of the upper spherical plate 18 in the normal state. are doing.

However, when a predetermined effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21(b), the lever body 188 protrudes, and the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 rise at a predetermined angle and protrusion amount. In this case, although not shown, the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 protrude from the outer surface of the upper ball plate 18 . Here, it is possible to collectively refer to the lever body 188 and the decorative portion 189 as a "lever". In addition, it is also possible to refer to these including the operation button 22 as a “lever”. Hereinafter, the lever body 188, the decorative portion 189, and the operation button 22 are collectively referred to as a "lever" and denoted by L.

The above-described lever L can be tilted forward as shown in FIG. 21(c) in a protruded state as shown in FIG. 21(b). Then, for example, during a predetermined ready-to-win effect, the lever L changes from the retracted state to the protruded state, and the effect display device 60 displays a moving image showing how the lever L falls down, a character display of "Pull the lever", and the like. When the player pushes the lever L forward, other movable performance members etc. are operated, cut-in performance is performed, the SP reach is developed with a higher expectation for a big hit, or the SP reach is continued, or the success or failure is determined. A series of effects such as notification that the result of the lottery is a big hit can be performed.

Here, it is possible to display development symbols during the development of the reach. The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the ready-to-win effect will occur. By displaying the development pattern, it is possible to definitely notify that the ready-to-win effect will occur.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(a) in an enlarged manner, the cross key 96 is provided near the operation button 22 as described above, and the operation button 22 is determined in a situation such as setting the environment. It may be used as a key or the like. In this embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 can be performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing a variable display of the effect pattern 190 or the like, or in a situation where the variable display is not being performed. may be done. Thus, the cross key 96 also functions as a kind of operation input means that can be operated by a player or the like.

Subsequently, the aforementioned guide displays such as "Press the button", "Press repeatedly", "Press and hold", etc. are designed to distinguish and specify the operation mode of the operation button 22 (button operation mode). For example, if a single operation (single-shot operation) is detected, the character display such as "press the button" is used as a guide display when proceeding with subsequent control processing, assuming that the requested operation (request operation) has been performed. exemplified. Those that require such a single-shot operation and generate some effect when the single-shot operation is performed are called, for example, "single-shot operation effect", "single-shot push effect", "single-shot effect", "single-shot button effect", etc. is possible. Also, a single operation can be called a "single push" or the like, and a single operation function can be called a "single operation function", a "single push function", or a "single push function".

Further, for example, a character display such as "Keep hitting" is exemplified as a guide display when a plurality of operations (repeat operations) are required operations. Those that require such a repeated hitting operation and generate some kind of effect when the repeated hitting operation is performed are called, for example, ``repeat operation effect'', ``repeat effect'', ``repeat button effect'', and ``repeat possible effect''. is possible. In addition, the continuous hitting operation in which the button is pressed intermittently is called "continuous pressing", "continuous pressing", "intermittent operation", etc., and the function of the continuous pressing operation is "continuous pressing function", "continuous pressing function". , a “repeating function” or the like.

In addition to the production prompting the repeated hits (before the repeated hits) as described above, the repeated hits effect related to the repeated hits operation can be considered including the effect when the repeated hits are performed afterwards (during the repeated hits effect). An example of this continuous-hit effect is that an image changes in response to the operation each time the operation button 22 is pressed repeatedly at relatively short intervals. A specific example of such an effect during repeated hits will be described later.

Further, as the repeated hit effect, an indicator (here, an operation amount indicator) is displayed, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the pressing operation is repeated. The display of such an indicator can be started before repeated hits or after repeated hits are started. A specific example of indicator display will be described later.

Further, for example, a character display such as "press and hold" is exemplified as a guide display when a continuous operation (long-press operation) for a predetermined time or longer is a request operation. Those that require such a continuous operation and generate some effect when the continuous operation is performed can be called, for example, "long-press operation effect", "long-press effect", "long-press button effect", etc. It is. Further, the continuous operation can be called "long press", and the function of the long press operation can be called "long press operation function" or "long press function".

As a long-press effect associated with the long-press operation, for example, an indicator (remaining time indicator in this case) is displayed, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the time during which the operation button 22 is pressed increases. I can give an example. Further, as the long-press effect, the speed of change (or the cycle of change, etc.) of the image in response to the operation can be exemplified by increasing with the increase in time during which the operation button 22 is pressed. Further, a combination of a plurality of effects such as these can also be exemplified as long-press effects.

As described above, the effect using the operation buttons 22 and the like is based on a mode (front button effect) accompanied by a guide display such as a button image prompting the button operation. FIG. 31(a) shows an example of a button image with reference numeral 401 attached thereto. However, in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to diversify the effects using the operation buttons 22 and the like, effects such as not performing the guide display or restricting the guide display can be performed. . Such effects can be called, for example, "back button effects" or "hidden button effects". Details of this back button effect and the function of the back button (back button function) will be described later.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment is equipped with an automatic repeated hitting function (auto repeated hitting function) that makes it possible to facilitate the above-described repeated hitting operation related to the operation button 22 . This auto repeated hit function can be used even in situations where repeated hits are required, such as when only one button operation is performed, or when repeated operations are performed at considerably longer intervals than usual. It is a function that treats the button operation in the situation as if it was repeatedly hit.

More specifically, a button operation is detected in which the pressing operation continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 seconds or more, for example, 0.55 seconds or 0.6 seconds) in a situation where the continuous hit effect is executed. For example, it is assumed that the automatic repeated hitting conditions (first and second conditions to be described later) are satisfied, and the control proceeds assuming that repeated hitting has been performed. A button operation that satisfies the conditions for automatic repeated hitting can be referred to as an "automatic repeated hitting operation" or the like.

By providing such an automatic repeated hitting function, even if repeated hitting is not necessarily performed, an effect similar to the repeated hitting can be performed. Then, for a player who finds it troublesome to actually hit repeatedly, it is possible to present an effect similar to that of repeated hitting by performing only one continuous button operation. In addition, the player is not excessively distracted by the repeated hits, and can easily pay attention to the effects being progressed on the effect display device 60 or the like.

In addition, since the automatic repeated hitting function is provided together with the normal repeated hitting function (normal repeated hitting function), the player who actually wants to enjoy the repeated hitting effect and the repeated hitting function by repeatedly hitting the operation button 22 can use the automatic repeated hitting function. It is possible to perform the normal repeated hitting operation (normal repeated hitting operation) as described above without using the function. Various correlations between various button effects, environmental settings, game characteristics, power interruptions, etc. are determined for such an automatic repeated hitting function, and the details of these correlations will be described later. Also, in this specification, there are cases where the term "automatic repeated hits" is simply used, but this term is used in the sense of contrasting with normal repeated hits. , ``automatic repeated hit effect'', and ``automatic repeated hit effect'', etc., are higher-level concepts of various terms related to automatic repeated hits.
<<Production when a big hit occurs>>

Next, an effect when a big hit occurs will be described. The effects when a big hit occurs include the effect at the start of the special game (jackpot start demo), the effect during the special game (round effect), the effect at the end of the final round (hit end demo), and the effect at the end of the special game. There is a performance (jackpot end demo). Here, the production of the above-mentioned jackpot start demonstration is the production of the period during which the attacker (big prize winning opening) is kept closed from the start of execution of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of execution of the first round (unit game). , and the effect of the above-mentioned jackpot end demo is the period in which the attacker (big prize opening) is kept closed from the end of the final round (unit game) to the end of the jackpot game (special game). It can be said that it is a performance.

When the performance pattern 190 described above is fixed and stopped, it is accompanied by the sound of fanfare, etc., and is displayed to the effect that a big win will start. As the display indicating that the big win is about to start, the display of the big win start demonstration screen shown in FIG. 25(a) can be exemplified. In addition, a right-handed guidance effect (right-handed guidance display) is executed as a hitting instruction during a special game, and the player is guided to increase the amount of rotation of the shooting handle 20 and perform right-handed hitting. can. In addition, as a display of guidance to hit the ball to the right, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the steering wheel to the right" in the right-hand hitting guidance display area 383 in FIG. 25(a).

Here, the performance contents at the start of the big win may be different between the first win (big win at a low base) and the renzou (big win at a high base). Specifically, a display such as "Jump start!" may be displayed at the time of the first win, and a display such as "Jumps continue!" Also, regarding the guidance for hitting to the right, the message ``Turn the steering wheel to the right'' is displayed at the first hit, but in Renso, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply ``right hitting'' is displayed. (for example, a large character is displayed for a short time). In this way, the demonstration of the start of the jackpot at the time of consecutive games may be shorter than the demonstration of the start of the jackpot at the time of the first win. Consecutive hours are shorter. Similarly, the time value of the jackpot end demonstration effect (jackpot start demonstration time) may be shorter during consecutive wins than during the first win.

As an effect during the above-mentioned special game, there is an example of a moving image that cannot be seen unless the player wins the jackpot. Also, at this time, a predetermined piece of music is output from the speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as the animation during the special game, for example, a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 depicts a state of fighting with a rival enemy, or a state of enjoying luck. can be exemplified. Here, (FIG. 25(b)) illustrates one scene of a video in which two women fight an enemy together as a video during a special game.

It should be noted that the switching of the rounds during the special game may be performed by, for example, "1R", "2R", . It is possible to notify by such a display. Furthermore, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrences of the big wins when the big wins occur during the specific game and the big wins continue.

In the display example of FIG. 25(b), at the bottom of the screen, a pending number display area 367 that distinguishes between the pending numbers of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25(b), a reduced performance symbol display area 361, a round number display area 368, and a count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25(b), in the upper right part of the screen, by displaying such as "1st probability change" and "Number of wins: 195", the number of consecutive games related to multiple jackpot games and , The number of winning balls during Renso is displayed.

Here, instead of displaying only the number of prize balls won by the game during the round (by entering the big prize hole (90)), the same launch position as the big prize hole (90) ( The number of won prize balls may also be displayed for the number of prize balls entered into a general prize opening (reference numeral omitted) arranged in the shooting direction). In addition, if a so-called over-winning, which is an excess winning (a ball that exceeds the specified number of counts in one round to the big winning opening) occurs, a production that suggests or notifies the occurrence (for example, Sound output such as "Good!", or display such as "Nice!" in production display) may be performed.

Further, as an effect during the special game, it is possible to perform a specific effect (a specific effect during winning) as shown in FIG. 25(c) and FIGS. 26(a) to (c). FIG. 25(c) and FIGS. 26(a) to (c) exemplify hit specific effect screens A to D. FIG. These hit specific effect screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the development of the story, or inserted as a turning point in the effect when the number of rounds is announced or promotion effect to probability change is performed during the big win game. It can be used for purposes such as

As the above-mentioned promotion effects, the production patterns 190a to 190c are changed from, for example, non-probability variation patterns (such as "666"), which are non-probability combinations, to probability variation patterns ("777", etc.). It is possible to exemplify an effect (variable promotion effect) that arouses expectations of whether or not. Further, as the promotion effect, an effect (round promotion effect) that arouses expectations as to whether or not a low round win (such as a 5R win) will be changed to a high round win (such as a 15R win) can be exemplified.

Subsequently, as the effect after the special game described above, the effect related to the result of the content of the effect during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it can be exemplified that the winner expresses emotion according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can also be called an ending effect.

Further, as the effect after the special game, additional display of the number of consecutive big wins, display of the number of winning balls won by the player in the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of big wins in a case where big wins occur during a specific game and the big wins continue. As for the succession of big wins, when the number of occurrences of big wins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute a performance pattern that has not been selected before.

Also, although not shown, when the special game ends, a screen for the big win end demo (big win end demo screen) is displayed. As an example of this jackpot end demonstration screen, there is a display of characters such as "end" indicating the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, it is also possible to display the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game at that time or during the consecutive games on the jackpot end demonstration screen.

In addition, when the types of jackpots include jackpots that do not involve probability variation, the notification of whether or not the probability variation will occur after the end of the special game is not notified during the special game or until the end of the special game. is also possible.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, the player is not given an effect to inform the player of whether or not he/she has won the prize until the end of the 8th round, and after the end of the 8th round, the definite variable It is possible to employ an effect and a control mode such that, when the player wins, an effect to that effect (specific effect during winning) is performed over one or a plurality of rounds.

Similarly, in a pachinko game machine including a jackpot that does not involve probability variation, at a predetermined timing such as before the start of a special game, during a special game, or at the end of a special game, when a game ball is detected in a predetermined area It is also possible to adopt an effect and a control mode such as changing probability.

In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a game ball detection area (herein referred to as a "V ball entry device") is added to a portion below the big winning opening in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). provided. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing such as the end of a special game, the V-ball entering device is set to a state where it is possible to accept a game ball, and in this state, when a game ball is detected by the V-ball entering device, the probability state after that is , to be in a variable probability state over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V ball entering device or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V ball entering device, control is performed so that the probability state after that does not become the variable probability state. It is conceivable that

Moreover, it is also possible to give such a probability change by entering a ball only as an effect. Namely, when winning a jackpot with variable probability in a jackpot lottery, the V ball entry device is set to a state capable of accepting game balls at a predetermined timing. A sorting mechanism is provided in the V ball entry device, and when a jackpot with variable probability is won in advance, the game ball entering the V ball entry device is guided to the area of variable probability, and the player is guided to the area of variable probability. Execute the production to the effect that it has been acquired. In addition, when winning a jackpot without probability variation in advance, it is conceivable to guide the game ball to a non-variability (normal) area and execute an effect to the effect that the player has won the probability variation.

Subsequently, as the effect after the special game described above, the effect related to the result of the content of the effect during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it can be exemplified that the winner expresses emotion according to the result of the fight between the characters. Such an effect after the special game can also be called an ending effect.

Further, as the effect after the special game, additional display of the number of consecutive big wins, display of the number of winning balls won by the player in the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of big wins in a case where big wins occur during a specific game and the big wins continue. As for the succession of big wins, when the number of occurrences of big wins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute a performance pattern that has not been selected before.

In addition, when a small win occurs, the effect of informing the occurrence of the small win is not performed, and during the game after the occurrence of the small win, it is the same as the normal time, and it is impossible to distinguish whether the probability is changing or not. It is conceivable to perform the production of the contents.
<<Production by superimposing multiple production components>>

Next, various specific effects that can be implemented in the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 88 described above, and the effect by superimposing the movable effect members. This kind of performance is a composite performance by positioning a movable performance member in front of the performance display device 60 and combining the display contents of the performance display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable performance member.

For example, in a state in which one of the movable production members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the production display device 60, at least part of the display area 194 of the production display device 60 is visible outside the movable production member. For example, when an image of a blazing flame is displayed on the performance display device 60, a combination performance is executed in which the movable performance members perform optical decorations and actions in front of the flame. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect such as a flashing flame pattern or a flashing ripple pattern, the distance between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 Visual effect can be exhibited.

Furthermore, in this state, by executing an effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially an obstacle. Furthermore, by synthesizing the pattern-like display changes in front and behind the movable production member, it is possible to superimpose a complicated situation display on the movable production member, and to express the environment in which the movable production member is placed in a complicated manner. .

As a result, the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60 enables more complicated effects and diversification of effects. Even if the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display can be viewed as a part of the movable effect member behind or a part of the display contents of the effect display device 60. By making the transparent state as much as possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88 .

In addition, as modes of utilization of the light guide plate 88 and transmissive liquid crystal display (herein referred to as the light guide plate 88 and the like), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like and a mode of combination with the effect display device 60 are adopted. Is possible. The above-mentioned "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 and the like" uses most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 and the like to perform color display in which a predetermined image emerges, and the display contents of the effect display device 60 behind it are displayed. This is a display mode in which the player's consciousness is not directed as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode of combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion where the color development display is performed in the light guide plate 88 or the like is suppressed to a predetermined level, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode in which an effect combining the display of the light guide plate 88 and the display of the effect display device 60 is presented to the player so that the player's consciousness is directed to the content. Then, in a predetermined case, an effect is executed in the ``mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88, etc.'', and in other predetermined cases, the effect is performed in the ``mode of combination with the effect display device 60''. , and so on.
<<Production suggesting pending change>>

Next, various effects can be further exemplified as effects using the above-described hold display. For example, a pending change suggestion effect that suggests that a pending change is to be performed is illustrated, and the change information display 198 of the change information display section 195 shown in FIGS. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestive information) that suggests that the degree of expectation increases by changing the reserved color, such as "color change?" Then, after such state transition suggestion information is displayed, the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 may change to, for example, red, rainbow, or the like, which means a high degree of expectation. do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned "color change?" For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?" Display the drum object. Then, in the variation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "red", and "rainbow" sequentially changes, and the subsequent variation information display 198 is performed. It is also possible to display objects such as roulette and rotating drum without erasing the variable information display 198 .

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the pending display, when the pending change is performed in the first pending number display unit 196 and the second pending number display unit 197 in FIGS. It is conceivable to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a hold change will occur immediately, for example, by displaying hold change information such as "hold change", "red hold", "rainbow hold", etc. be done. Here, the display of such pending change information may be performed in the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or in the first pending number display section 196 or the second pending number display section 197, the pending change It may be done in the vicinity of the hold indication to be done.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggestion effects are provided to suggest that a hold change will be performed, and the rate at which the hold change is made and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggestion effect is executed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B, etc.). In addition, when there are a plurality of pending indications and a pending change can be performed for a plurality of pending indications, at the start of the pending change suggesting effect, it is not known which of the pending changes will be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest from the point of view of whether the hold that has changed before will change further or whether the hold that has not changed will change.

Further, when the pending change suggesting effect is executed, the timing of the pending change can be various timings during the symbol variation. For example, if the pending change suggestion effect is to use an area or image object dedicated to the pending change suggestion, multiple starts and ends at an arbitrary timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative pattern (production pattern) You can set the timing.

On the other hand, if the pending change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the pending change suggestion, but is performed in conjunction with the decorative pattern variation effect, for example, a pseudo decorative pattern that suggests the pending change using the display area of the decorative pattern (For example, “holding change pattern”) can be executed. In this case, it is possible to set the timing at which one or a plurality of rows of symbols are temporarily stopped and the timing at which the stop symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can also be changed at the start of the hold display or at the time of shift. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pending change may be performed in association with the button effect, and a specific aspect of such effect will be described later.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timing is during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the start of special symbol pattern fluctuation, at the time of special symbol confirmation, during special symbol confirmation, at the time of the jackpot start demonstration, There are times such as when the jackpot mid-big prize opening is open, when the jackpot mid-big prize gate is closed, when the winning demo ends, and when the jackpot ending demo ends. Among them, the period during which the initial screen is displayed is the period from when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is powered on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. Command transmission is performed in any of the following cases: when the game starts winning, when power is restored, and when an error is detected. Furthermore, command transmission is also executed when RWM is cleared.

Among these commands, commands for clearing RWM include the commands for initialization of effect display, initialization of effect LED, and various error commands. The effect display unit initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. FIG. The effect LED initialization command turns on part of the game effect lamps when communication is normal. Various error commands are used to display effects and the like in accordance with error states.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the performance display device 60 and the game effect lamps for the customer waiting demo and for erasing the voice.

Commands at the start of special symbol pattern variation include: symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number, communication test 1, communication test 2, number of effects A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, variable additional information, design 1 effect There are commands for pattern, pattern 2 production pattern, pattern 1 character production, and pattern 2 character production. The symbol 1 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 memory number command indicates the reserved memory number of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. Various commands for the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and various commands for the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. It is. The variable additional information command indicates information for adding an element (effect constituent element) for suggesting, for example, a degree of expectation for a big hit in the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is. The pattern 1 character production command is for sending a command corresponding to the pattern of the first special pattern, and the pattern 2 character production command is for sending a command corresponding to the pattern of the second special pattern. be.

Commands at the time of design determination of the special symbols include a symbol 1 production pattern stop command and a symbol 2 production pattern stop command. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect pattern 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

The command during the design determination of the special pattern is the number of times of fluctuation time reduction 0 (at low probability), the number of times of fluctuation time reduction A to Z (at low probability), the number of times of fluctuation time reduction 0 (at high probability), during probability fluctuation ( up to a predetermined number of fluctuations) command. These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time saving number display, and the like.

Commands for the jackpot start demonstration include a pattern 1 jackpot start demonstration, a pattern 2 jackpot start demonstration, and a launch position designation command. The symbol 1 jackpot start demonstration command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demonstration command are for displaying the start demonstration based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position specifying command is for notifying the launch position when the player is to separately hit the game ball by so-called left hitting or right hitting.

The commands for opening the jackpot middle/big prize opening include symbol 1 jackpot middle demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 jackpot middle demos 1 to 16 commands. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the number of rounds.

As a command for closing the big winning medium winning opening, there is a big winning opening closing effect command. This is for displaying the special winning slot closing effect.

Commands for the jackpot end demonstration include a one-symbol end demonstration and a two-symbol end demonstration. These are for displaying a winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Commands at the time of starting prize include hit notice (hit notice effect), pattern notice (hit pattern notice effect), variation notice (pattern notice effect), pattern 1 memory number, pattern 2 memory number commands. The hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice commands are commands (read-ahead commands) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notifying means 157 . The hit notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the hit/fail random number, and includes win/fail information according to the lottery probability. The symbol notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the symbol random number, and includes information regarding the type of winning. Furthermore, the fluctuation notice command is for transmitting the random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, or super reach, etc.). The symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command are for transmitting the pending memory number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, information such as the result of the lottery, the presence or absence of the look-ahead effect, the period, etc. is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of winning notice, symbol notice, and variation notice.

Commands for power failure recovery include communication test 1, communication test 2, power failure recovery game states A to E, number of effects A to Z, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect, There are commands for power failure recovery hit state, power failure recovery special symbol 1 state, power failure recovery special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, error a to d, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number.

The communication check 1 and communication check 2 commands are for checking whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands for game states A to E for recovery from power failure are for transmitting different commands according to the game state at the time of power failure. Commands for the number of times of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effects according to the limited frequency table described above, and commands for the effects selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table. be. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure return hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether the hit is in progress or not. Commands for the special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure return and the special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure return send commands according to the state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, such as waiting, fluctuating, hitting, etc. It is for The firing position designation command is for designating an appropriate firing position according to the situation, as described above. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of errors. The symbol 1 memory number command and the symbol 2 memory number command are for transmitting the pending memory number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Major control processing of the main board>

Next, main control processing in the main board 102 of the pachinko game machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "condition device", and "accessory continuously actuating device" used below will be explained. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control process of the pachinko game machine 10, and among them, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the big winning gate device 90. It is. In addition, the "condition device" is activated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous operation device" is to operate the special electric accessory continuously multiple times. is possible.

In addition, the main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is power-on processing shown in FIG. 17, the (win/fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power-off process shown in FIG.
<Processing when power is turned on>

Power-on processing schematically shown in FIG. 14 is control processing that is started after a security check using the production code of the CPU 501 is performed when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on. In this power-on process, an initial setting process (S101) is executed as shown in the drawing. In the initial setting process (S101), processes related to setting values and the like are executed. Details of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initialization process (S101), it is determined (S102) whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated. In S102, if the RWM clear button has been operated (S102: YES), RWM clear processing (S103) is executed, and RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub main board 301 side). (S4). Furthermore, information indicating that the power has been turned on normally (information that the power has been turned on normally) is stored in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is permitted (S106). This timer interrupt permission (S106) enables game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) at a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Furthermore, various random numbers are updated each time the loop processing (circulation processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, the random numbers to be updated in the random number update process (S107) include various initial value random numbers such as the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. can be done. Also, in updating various random numbers, it is possible to use a 2-byte soft random number update process as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above. Depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number described above It is also possible to generate random numbers by the calculation of

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not information indicating normal power-off is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, if the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM is checked (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (the data within the predetermined range) is normal. is performed (S113). In S113, if the data in the RWM is not normal (S113: YES), the process proceeds to RWM clear processing (S103).

In the above S111, if the power-off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and if the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113: NO), the power-off from the RWM Data of various information commands at the time are acquired (S116). Furthermore, the data of the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), the return setting of the solenoid is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (processing for saving the power-on normal information in the RWM). Move to
<Initial setting processing>

Next, the initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, each port register is set (S121), and it is determined whether or not a setting key has been inserted (S122). If a setting key has been inserted (S22: YES), setting value change processing (S126) is performed, and this setting value change processing (S126) will be described later.

If the setting key is not inserted in S122 (S122: NO), setting value information is read (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). . If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is finished, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the setting value abnormality information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S129), after which a loop state is established.
<Set value change processing>

Next, the aforementioned setting value change processing (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM in the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133). A set value corresponding to the information is displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the setting value information at S132 (S132: YES), the setting value is forcedly set, and the default value (here, "1") is set to the setting value information (S141). Then, after transmitting set value forced setting information to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set values are displayed (S133).

After S134, it is determined whether or not there is an operation to change the setting value (S135). If there is an operation to change the setting value (S135: YES), the setting value information at that time is incremented by one (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the setting value information has reached the setting upper limit value ("6" in this case) (S137). 1” (S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S139). ), and the set value change process ends.

In the above S135, if there is no change setting (S135: NO), without performing the process of adding the setting value information (S136) to the process of setting the lower limit value (here, "1") (S138) , the process proceeds to determination processing (S139) for determining whether or not the setting change is completed. If the set value information has not reached the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed without performing the process of setting the lower limit value in S137 (S138). to the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process of S134.

At S133, if there is no input from the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), a set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed (S146), as in S134. Furthermore, as in S139 above, it is determined whether or not the setting change has been completed (whether or not the setting key has been removed) (S147). The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased at S140), and the set value change process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to S136 for setting value display.

That is, in the above S133, when there is an input of the RWM clear switch (S133: YES), the setting value is displayed (S134), and the processing for changing the setting value (S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It becomes possible. However, in the above S133, if there is no RWM clear switch input (S133: NO), the setting values are displayed (S146), but the processing for changing the setting values as in S135 to S138 is performed. setting value display is performed in a state in which the setting value is not enabled (this state is sometimes referred to as a setting display mode).
<Game Progress Interrupt Processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt processing (FIG. 17) that is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. This game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as "timer interrupt processing") is omitted in the above description, but based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 14) repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, the interrupt operation conditions are set (S41, S42), the interrupt processing time monitoring means recurs (S43), the game machine is managed (S45 to S70), the interrupt is permitted ( S71) is performed in order to return to the process before the game progress interrupt occurred.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting processing (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. A value is set in a control register corresponding to a predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursive information, along with the previously set first recursive information, serves as a condition for recursively restarting the monitoring timing of the interrupt processing time monitoring means.

In the game machine management (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order to manage the game machine. First, input processing (S45) is executed to monitor the input of a specific signal. The objects to be monitored here are various switches attached to the game board surface, saucer full switch, open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, glass non-detection signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal is.

Subsequently, various random number update processing (S46) is executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, an initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. In addition, in order to update the 2-byte timer, timer subtraction processing (S49) is executed, and in order to set the validity period of the second start winning prize opening 63, the validity period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. .

Further, a winning monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of payouts of prize balls, create an output request for board external information, and request transmission of a command to be transmitted to the sub board 104. FIG. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation gate (operation port 68), normal symbol operation gate monitoring processing (S53) is executed in order to memorize the random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is displayed. A normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process related to the electric accessory. Furthermore, in order to monitor the start of normal symbol fluctuation, a normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. In addition, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol is displayed. In order to perform the processing related to the display section 71, the special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Subsequently, a special electric role product control process (S58) is executed in order to perform processing related to the special electric role product, and a large winning prize opening validity period setting process (S59) is performed in order to perform processing relating to the validity period of the special prize opening. , and a special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) is performed to monitor the start of variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, abnormality detection processing (S61) is executed in order to monitor magnetism, disconnection/short circuit/power supply, radio wave monitoring, glass frame set/game board frame open/close status, and double glass monitoring. Then, in order to detect an entering ball passing time abnormality, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Furthermore, in order to display the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error state, the number of operation pending balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol display device, the game state display processing (S63 ) is executed, and the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20 (including the state of the amount of operation). In addition, special symbol display, normal symbol display, special symbol display device (70, 71) operation pending ball number display, normal symbol display device operational pending ball number display, game state display, special electric accessories LED output processing (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times the has operated continuously and to display an error.

Subsequently, a shooting control signal output process (S66) is executed to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the shooting of game balls, and a test signal output process (S67) is performed to create and output a signal to be output to the test device. to run. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and external information output processing (S70) is executed in order to output signals to external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

Thereafter, interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-mentioned cyclic processing (repeated cyclic processing including the random number update processing of S107) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. .
<<Handle state signal inspection processing>>

In the handle state signal inspection process (S64) described above, the handle state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is a change in the handle state, the handle state monitoring timer is activated. is subtracted, the steering wheel status is updated, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for the steering wheel status effect is performed. If it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel status as a result of the inspection, the steering wheel status monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the steering wheel timer is being decremented during the subtraction of the steering wheel state monitoring timer, the subsequent processing relating to the steering wheel state is not performed.
<Lottery determination process>

Next, the aforementioned lottery determination processing (also referred to as “lottery determination processing”) will be described. This lottery judging process is a process of judging whether or not a win is made using probability data (a process of judging a big hit lottery). Further, the lottery determination process can be performed, for example, in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17).

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of a lottery determination process relating to winning or not. In this lottery determination process, first, when proceeding to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. After proceeding to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data, and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big win and "2" indicates a small win.

After proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 designates the address of the probability data corresponding to the game state (variable probability state or normal probability state) and the set value, and obtains the probability data corresponding to the designated address from the lottery table. and store it in a register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

After proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 performs a win/fail decision. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random number value for winning/failure determination acquired when winning the starting gate in the comparison register (for example, DE register) for the lottery, and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the obtained probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain a new value of the comparison register. Thus, the value of the compare register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the prize has been won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), if the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), "1" is set to the carry flag of the flag register. set. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "a carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1". Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not a win is made by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the lottery has not been won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the lottery has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set when "Yes" is determined in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by lottery determination (for example, winning number 1 is a big win, winning number 2 is a small win). It will happen.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (eg, C register) to make it a new value of the winning number data (eg, C register). That is, the value of winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

After proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repeat count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (eg, B register). That is, the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

After proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repetition count data (eg, B register) is "0", it indicates that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (eg, B register) is not "0" ("0"). greater) indicates that the number of iterations has not expired. Then, in step S1030, main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

Further, when "No" in step S1030, the same probability data as the previous time is used to perform the determination of whether or not step S1026 is successful again. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to "00(H)", which is non-winning data, and terminates the processing according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, so there is no need to store the winning number data in the lottery table. In addition, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the same probability data need not be set repeatedly in the lottery table, so the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number corresponding to each of the small win and the big win is provided, and the type of the big win or the small win is determined by the pattern random number obtained separately at the time of winning, but these types can be determined by this process. is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repeat count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and the probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine can be used. is also possible.
<Power off processing>

Next, a description will be given of power-off processing that is executed when a power-off occurs. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power-off process, the data of all used registers are saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt permission/prohibition state before power-off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84), The process proceeds to RWM access prohibition processing (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), save the value of the stack pointer in the stack pointer buffer (S85), save the power failure normal information in the RWM (S86), and calculate the RWM checksum. and save the checksum data (S87). Then, access to the RWM is prohibited (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while the control processing is looped.

In this power-off process, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are The information is set, the time for monitoring by the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the time is recurred. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the forced setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed immediately after the start of power interruption processing and before the processing of saving all used registers (S81). It is Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state in which the monitoring timekeeping is restarted. In other words, by forcibly recursing the monitoring time when a power failure occurs, in the control processing immediately after the power supply is restarted, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without recurring the monitoring time. It's becoming
<Other control processing aspects related to the main board>
<<Control mode related to command transmission timing>>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is once stored in the command buffer by command request before transmission. Command buffer is a function of a plurality of buffers as a ring buffer, in the control processing for command transmission (here effect control command transmission processing (S69)), in the order accumulated in the command buffer, once In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a technique in which commands with higher priority are transmitted first. Also, in various control processes, when a command requiring transmission occurs, it is also possible to perform command transmission at any time. When such a method is adopted, during one game progress interruption process, for example, production command transmission is performed collectively within one control processing module, such as production control command transmission processing (S69). Instead, command transmission is sequentially performed within each control processing module each time a command transmission is required. Therefore, it is difficult for the command transmission to be carried over to the next game progress interrupt process. And, for example, there is no delay in the transmission of commands at the time of start winning or command transmission at the start of fluctuation of special symbols, and prompt command processing becomes possible.
<<Control mode related to update of pending storage>>

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second game is prioritized, and regularity is provided in the execution order of the plurality of first and second games. are performed in order for each second game or first game. Therefore, updating of the reserved and stored information is completed by only updating the reserved and stored information for each second game or first game. However, it is not limited to this, for example, instead of prioritizing the first game or prioritizing any game, the pending memory is digested in the order in which the start winning was generated and stored pending (winning order digestion) It is also possible to adopt a configuration that Of these, when a configuration is adopted in which the reserved memory is consumed in the order in which the starting prizes are generated, the reserved memory information is updated according to the digestion, the total number of reservations of a plurality of games is updated, and the winning order is stored. Thus, as a whole, the pending stored information can be updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the reserved memory has been updated, a request for the pattern storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is made as described above. By including both the pattern 1 memory number command and the pattern 2 memory number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<<Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern>>

Next, various aspects related to the lottery of variation patterns will be described. In one pachinko game machine 10, one of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied, or may be used in combination as appropriate. Then, when a plurality of aspects are used together, it is possible to selectively use the aspects based on factors such as win/fail results, for example.

In the present embodiment, the determination of the variation pattern includes, as described above, the success/fail result, the number of balls on hold, the special symbol (may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol). Although used as elements, a variation pattern table corresponding to a combination of these determinant elements is selected. Then, along with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time paired with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, in this embodiment, regarding the determination of the variation pattern, the variation pattern table is made different depending on whether the result of the lottery is a big win or a loss. That is, in the case of a big hit, based on status information of special symbols such as the number of held balls, special symbols (group), and win/fail random numbers, a variation pattern table is selected from among those linked. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from those linked based on the game state, special symbols, number of retained balls, and hit/fail random number. Of these, in the case of a big hit, regarding the variation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given in the production, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special pattern group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determination result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 .

Further, when determining the variation pattern and the variation time, it is possible to determine additional variation information according to the determined variation pattern number, and subsequently determine the variation time based on the additional variation information. For example, when the selected variation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern presentation, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the variation time accordingly.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the time of starting the symbol variation of the special symbol, the sub-main board 301 can perform the variation previously determined in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol. An effect of adding additional time to the time can be performed later. Then, in such a manner, when determining the fluctuation time of the overall effect pattern, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as follows. is. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-run"), if the variation patterns of the pseudo-run are simply set individually, the same number of variation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. need to leave In addition, in the case where the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the variation patterns that are all individually determined by the main board 102, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 is large. As a result, it is conceivable that the number may exceed 256, for example. For this reason, in order to provide a code that can be identified with respect to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it becomes necessary to increase the number of bits and bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using variable additional information (variable additional pattern), it is possible to form a variable pattern after the fact by connecting, for example, random number lottery variable additional information to a relatively small number of basic variable patterns. is. As a result, new variation patterns can be formed by combining variation patterns, so that various variation patterns can be created without excessively increasing the number of variation patterns provided in advance. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable additional information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 as a command for the look-ahead effect at the time of start winning. Also, it is possible to set the appearance probability of the variable additional pattern so that the variable additional information is easily added when the limited frequency pattern presentation is executed. Further, if an example of using the variable additional information is given, when "777", which is a probability variable design, is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the production design 190, the setting of the variable additional information is not performed, and the combination of the production design 190 is , Once the non-variable pattern "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to be promoted to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the fluctuation mode ) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls, and the variation pattern table to be referred to differs depending on the number of held balls. The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0-4. The reason why the variation pattern table corresponding to the suspension 4 is provided in addition to the four suspensions 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of pending balls is four, and the number of pending balls is three. A state in which the number of pending balls is 3 at a stage during the game progress interruption process being executed at that point in time, where the control process has not yet reached the stage of determining the variation pattern, which is the process during the subsequent game progress interruption process. When a new starting prize is generated from , the number of pending balls is added to become 4 at the time of determining the variation pattern. Therefore, a variation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can be used as an element for determining the variation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of held balls 0-3. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to have a configuration in which the starting winnings from the state of the number of reserved balls of 3 to the determination of the variation pattern are not added. It should be noted that any aspect can also be applied to pachinko gaming machines of the type in which the maximum number of reservations other than four (for example, 8) is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variation pattern random number can be the timing of the variation pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of special electric accessories, etc., as an element for performing a proper game, compared to the win-or-fail random number, for example, in aiming for a fair game Less need for constraints. Therefore, it is conceivable to acquire and store the variation pattern random number at the time of variation pattern lottery as a separately provided timing, instead of daring to acquire the variation pattern random number at the time of starting winning. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of pieces of information to be stored at the time of start winning, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of programs and memory.
<<Control mode related to design designation>>

In the lottery of symbols, the design determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the random number, and then the design is determined from the determined design determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the random design number. is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numeric range of the symbol random numbers is set to "0 to 999", the binary code of these numeric values can be used. By doing so, the memory and program capacity can be reduced. In addition, the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of times of time saving are distributed to the winning patterns (may be a group of patterns), and according to the winning patterns, the number of subsequent rounds, the number of times of time saving, and the opening time of the big prize opening , an open pattern, or the like may be determined. By doing so, there is no need to store data unique to the game state or perform control processing, and the memory and program capacities can be reduced. Furthermore, information (game state designation information) that conveys a game state (game state designation information) is added to a command (for example, in the present embodiment, each command of a pattern 1 effect pattern and a pattern 2 effect pattern) that transmits a winning pattern or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. ) can also be added. This command is not sent to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created, temporarily stored, and sent to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<<Relationship between special design and production design fluctuation time>>

As described above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop varying in synchronization with each other. Depending on the situation, the fluctuation time of the production design 190 can be shortened to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special design (first special design or second special design).

That is, when the variation of the special symbols and the variation pattern are determined, and when the variation of the special symbols is started, the main board 102 transmits a command for starting the variation of the performance symbols (command at the time of starting the variation) to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command at the start of fluctuation), and the waiting time set in a command buffer (a ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) It is conceivable that the start of fluctuation of the production design is delayed from the start of fluctuation of the special design by the influence of the time until all commands (pre-insertion commands) are sent out. Furthermore, at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, a fluctuation stop command (command when special symbols are fixed) is sent to the sub-main board 301. ) and the congestion of the command buffer (the number of commands waiting for transmission), it is conceivable that the stop of fluctuation of the performance symbols may be delayed.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the production pattern is set to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special pattern based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the swing fluctuation, the special pattern starts the next fluctuation. This is to avoid a situation in which the last pattern is stopped and displayed later. Due to the delay in processing due to the number of commands, there is a risk that the display during fluctuations will extend over to the next fluctuation. is suppressed, and the performance design can be almost certainly fixed during the display fixation time of the special design (the design fixation time related to the special design).
<<Preliminary judgment of lottery results>>

First, in the present embodiment, as described above (FIGS. 9A and 12), the hit/fail random number range in the first lottery and the second lottery is "0 to 65535", and this hit/fail random number range " 0 to 65535” is divided into a plurality of random number ranges (here A to N) as shown in FIG. 13(a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13(a), of the right/wrong random number range of "0 to 65535", "0 to 205" belongs to the prefetch code A classification, and "206" belongs to the prefetch code B classification. belongs to Furthermore, the right/wrong random numbers "207" to "210" belong to the categories of prefetch codes C to F, respectively. Also, the right/wrong random numbers “211 to 615” belong to the prefetch code G category, and the right/fail random numbers “616 to 618” belong to the preread code H category.

Next, the random numbers "619 to 621", "622 to 624", "625 to 627", and "628 to 630" belong to the prefetch codes H to L, respectively. Also, the hit/fail random number values “64874 to 65534” belong to the prefetch code M category. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the hit/fail random numbers “631 to 64873” and “65534” belong to the prefetch code M category.

FIG. 13(b) shows the contents of each look-ahead code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means that all settings will result in a win (big win) regardless of the set value. Next, the look-ahead code B means that if the set value is "2" or more, it will be a hit regardless of whether it is a normal time or a probability variable time. In other words, if the set value of the look-ahead code B is "2" or more, it indicates a hit regardless of the normal probability or the high probability, but if the set value is "1", it indicates a loss. Furthermore, the look-ahead codes C to F mean that if the set value is "3" or more to "6", regardless of the probability state, both normal and high probability wins.

Next, the look-ahead code G means that any set value will be a hit as long as the probability is variable. In other words, the look-ahead code G indicates a win when the probability is high, but indicates a loss when the probability is normal. Furthermore, the look-ahead code H means that a set value of "2" or more is a hit if the probability is changing. Also, the look-ahead codes I to L mean that if the probability is variable, a set value of "3" or more to "6" will win. Further, the look-ahead code M means a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means a loss regardless of the set value or probability state.

Using the pre-reading codes classified and grouped in this way, the main board 102, for example, determines the pre-reading code to which the acquired random value belongs, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined pre-reading code is used as the advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub-main board 301 . Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a win notice effect as a look-ahead effect in relation to the win/fail determination result without waiting for the suspension to be completed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the prior determination of the type of special symbol and the prior determination of the type of variation pattern related to the special symbol are performed based on the random number range as in the case of the result of the winning lottery described above. It is supposed to be done. In addition, the types of special symbols and the types of variation patterns related to the special symbols are provided more than the types of the results of the lottery, and the number of pre-reading codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the lottery. It's becoming However, as a method of prior judgment based on the random number range, although the random number range and the type of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same preliminary judgment related to the winning/failing judgment as described above. . Therefore, here, a detailed description of the advance determination based on the random number range for the symbol announcement effect and the pattern announcement effect will be omitted.

By performing preliminary determination based on such a random value range, information can be rounded, and a command related to preliminary determination can be created with a small amount of information. That is, if the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random numbers exceeds 1 byte. For this reason, if the random number information is transmitted as it is (as raw information) to the sub-main board 301 for preliminary determination, information for identifying which random number has been transmitted is transmitted in MODE, and the random number is transmitted. A 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT), which is stored in EVENT and transmitted, may have to be transmitted twice in order to notify the random value.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random number value into information indicating the range to which it belongs and transmitting it to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced more than the number of random number values, and the random number value can be reduced. Even if the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (one byte), it is possible to command the attribute of the acquired random number with the amount of information of one byte. On the side of the main substrate 102, in preparation for a situation in which it is not desired to transmit prefetch information as described later, a code indicating that effect (for example, undefined or undetermined) is provided. , it is also possible to transmit a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Here, as the above-mentioned "situation where you do not want to send the prefetch information", for example, when a priority digestion side (eg, special figure 2 side) is held during a normal game in a priority digestion type 1 + 1 game machine, etc. can be exemplified. And, the "priority digestion type" in the above description is, for example, one of the second game and the first game (here, the second game) is prioritized over the other (here, the first game) as described above. means something like Furthermore, the "1 + 1 type gaming machine" in the above description means a gaming machine having a game feature in which a plurality (here, two) of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed as described above. there is

Also, as another "situation where you do not want to send prefetch information", there is also a hold on the non-prioritized digest side (for example, the special figure 1 side) during a specific game (high base) in a 1+1 type gaming machine of the priority digestion type. The case where it occurs can be mentioned. Also, as described above, when a priority digestion side (for example, special figure 2 side) hold occurs during normal play in a priority digestion type 1 + 1 type gaming machine, the pre-reading effect related to the hold on the special figure 1 side is executed If it is in the middle, it may be possible to cancel the look-ahead effect (eg, return the reserved image of special figure 1 that has changed to red to blue), etc. On the contrary, the game machine If a hold on the non-prioritized digestion side (e.g. special figure 1 side) occurs during a specific game (during a high base), even if the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the special figure 2 side is being executed, that look-ahead You may try not to stop the production (eg, to maintain what was changed to red pending image of special figure 2).
<Main control processing of the sub-board>

Next, main control processing of the aforementioned sub-board 104 will be described. Here, as main control processing, various interrupt processing, which is exception processing, and processing related to these will be described based on FIGS. 22 to 24. FIG.
<<Interrupt factor and priority level>>

First, in the present embodiment, in the sub-main substrate 301 constituting the sub-substrate 104, the CPU 521 has the highest priority interrupt factor (source of occurrence), which is a predetermined signal (reset signal) to the reset terminal provided in the CPU 521. There are inputs and occurrence of various abnormalities. Of these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, and so on. (see FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, interrupts when various abnormalities occur are executed depending on whether or not the watchdog timer function (watchdog function) is enabled. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, the processing of the CPU 521 is shifted to, for example, a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer when a predetermined abnormality occurs. do. Then, when a runaway is detected due to timeout in the watchdog function, sub-main initialization processing (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed. When the above-described various abnormalities and the input of the reset signal occur simultaneously, the reset (sub-main initial setting process) by the input of the reset signal is given priority.

Another factor that causes an interrupt in the sub-main board 301 is reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102 . Whether or not a command is being received from the main board 102 is determined by detecting the rise of a strobe signal (effect data strobe signal serving as a timing signal) from the main board 102 . When this main command reception interrupt occurs, main command reception processing (not shown) is executed. The priority level of the main command reception interrupt is set to level 7, which is the second highest priority above the highest priority.

Also, when the watchdog function described above is enabled, an interrupt occurs when a runaway of the CPU 521 is detected without intentional time-out processing, as in the case of the occurrence of various abnormalities described above. (runaway detection interrupt) is generated, and a sub-main initialization process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed. The priority level of an interrupt by such a normal watchdog timer is level 3, which is four levels lower than level 7 described above. In this embodiment, interrupts of levels 4 to 6 between level 3 and level 7 are not executed.

In addition, transmission/reception with the sub-sub board 302 is another cause of interrupt generation. An interrupt related to transmission/reception with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) occurs when a receive command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub board 302 is input. The received command from the sub-sub board 302 is to notify the sub-main board 302 of normal command reception when the sub-sub board 302 receives a command (sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301 . Then, when an interrupt related to transmission/reception with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, command transmission/reception management processing is executed. Command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 is performed when a monitoring toggle signal is normally sent from the sub-sub board 302, as will be described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission/reception with this sub-sub board 302 is level 2 .

Communication with the sub-sub board 302 is another cause of interrupt generation. An interrupt (sub-sub communication interrupt) relating to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this embodiment) as will be described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub board is executed. The priority of the interrupt relating to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is level 2, which is the same as the interrupt relating to transmission and reception with the above-described sub-sub board 302 .

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with the RTC clock (real time clock), generation of timer interrupts (sub-main timer interrupts), interrupt requests for various lamps, etc. These have the lowest priority. It is set to 1. Among these, when an interrupt related to communication with the RTC clock occurs, processing for communication with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-mentioned timer interrupt is used in general game effects such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, game timer management processing, and the like. Activation of the timer interrupt is performed immediately by the setting (initial setting) at the time of initialization, and the timer interrupt is repeated every predetermined period (approximately 1 ms in this embodiment). Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is executed.
<<Sub main initial setting processing>>

When the power of the sub-main board 301 is turned on like when the power of the pachinko game machine 10 is turned on, the sub-main initialization process shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In this sub-main initial setting process, first, a predetermined address is set as a stack pointer (S201), and then all interrupts are prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S202). Further, in hardware initialization processing (S203), basic hardware-related settings (register settings, port initialization, etc.) are performed. is done. In this RWM initialization, initial values are prepared for variables with initial values, and variables without initial values are cleared to zero. In addition, in the RWM initialization process (S204), development of ROM data (control program, etc.) to the RWM is also performed.

Further, in S205, interruptions other than reception of the main command are prohibited, and subsequently, a power interruption recovery error detection process (S206) for setting various error information is executed. In this power failure recovery error detection process (S206), a process is performed according to circumstances such as the nature of the game. In other words, the sub-main board 301 has a function of coping with various errors including vibration errors and radio wave errors. However, functions for coping with these various errors are selected in advance, and the error detection function is exhibited only for valid errors. For example, whether or not a predetermined hit occurs when a game ball passes through a specific area, such as a 1-type 2-type type combining so-called 1-type and 2-type game characteristics, or a so-called ball accuracy spec. Vibration error detection function is effective for models for which is determined. However, as in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, in a model in which a lottery is performed only by a random number lottery, even if the machine has a vibration error detection function, the function is selectively disabled in advance. and no special measures are taken for vibration errors and the like.

Subsequently, in the all lamps extinguishing process (S207), an extinguishing request is made to extinguish all the lamps. A watchdog timer is started. In FIG. 22, the processing from S201 to S208 is connected to the main processing (S209). is performed after the sub-main initial setting process (S201 to S208). Furthermore, in the main processing (S209), the main processing of the game is managed, and the details of this main processing (S209) will be described later.

A sleep process (S210) is arranged after the main process (S209). Normally, the main processing (S209) does not return to the reset operation for performing the sub-main initialization processing, so this sleep processing (S210) is not executed. When this sleep process (S210) is to be executed for some reason, a shift to the low power consumption mode is performed.
<<Main processing on sub-main board>>

In the main processing (S209) described above, as shown in FIG. 23, RWM allocation address acquisition processing (S221) is executed. The start address of the expanded program area is obtained so that the expansion can be performed.

Next, all interrupts are permitted (S222) in order to enable interrupts in subsequent processing. Furthermore, in the device initialization process (S223), various devices such as motors, solenoids, and lamps are initialized. In the following watchdog clear processing (S224), if the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared. Furthermore, in the symbol update process (S225), the lost symbols related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c are determined by the counter.

As the counter used here, a three-digit counter from "111" to "999" can be exemplified. It is possible to make 190 become "757". If the acquired counter value is a combination of squares such as "111", it is possible to offset a predetermined number of digits such as "121" to obtain a combination of mismatches.

This symbol update process (S225) may not be executed depending on the method of determining the lost symbols adopted. For example, if the winning pattern is determined by lottery, it is not executed, and as a specific example, it has the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the pattern combinations, and uses the lottery sheet to determine the missing pattern. A control mode such as determining can be exemplified.

In the subsequent error effect management process (S226), the error state is monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring results.

Next, in the advance notice lottery management process (S228), a lottery for determining the advance notice effect is executed. In order to increase the efficiency), it is divided into several times. That is, in the case where multiple announcement effects are executed during one variation, the lottery process for the multiple announcement effects is not performed entirely in one main loop, but in multiple main loops. It is executed after multiple lotteries divided into . Also, the timing of the lottery is related to the appearance timing of the announcement effect during the fluctuation. For example, for announcement effects that appear at a relatively early timing, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery timing is set high. A command can be sent to the sub-sub-board 302 on the side. Various processes performed in the advance notice lottery management process (S228) will be described later.

Next, in the device management process (S229), when there is a device operation request for a real-time clock (RTC), lamp, speaker, etc., a process for operating the corresponding device is executed.

Furthermore, in the command analysis process (S230), if there is a need to start processing for responding to a command (main command) received from the main substrate 102 or if there is command data in the command buffer, the command analysis is performed. conduct. Then, if the command has been analyzed (S231: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224), and the main loop is executed. Since there is command data in the command buffer immediately after receiving the command from the main board 102, the main loop is executed and the process returns to the process after the watchdog clear process (S224). However, when the main loop is repeated and the command buffer becomes empty before the next timer interrupt, which will be described later, is executed, command analysis becomes unnecessary, and command analysis is not performed. In such a case, the process does not proceed to the main loop (S231: NO), and the random number update process (S232), which has a lower priority than the command analysis, is executed using the generated time. This random number update process (S232) is a soft random number update process. Also, in this command analysis process (S230), the variation pattern (sub-variation pattern) in the sub-main board 301 is determined. In addition, if a lottery sheet (lottery table) data incorporating all the symbol combinations is provided, and a control mode is adopted in which the lottery sheet is used to determine the winning symbols, command analysis processing (S230) is performed. Determine the design.

As for the processing (S230, S231) related to these command analysis, in other words, for a certain command, immediately after receiving the command, the processing (here, the random number update processing (S232)) is not performed, and the main processing is performed. The other processes (S224 to S231) in the loop process (S224 to S232) are repeated, and if there are no more commands in the command buffer, the processing proceeds to the processing arranged thereafter, and as a result, command analysis processing is performed for a certain main command. Since command analysis is executed immediately after the start of (S230), it does not proceed to the program module placed later. It can be said that it is progressing. Note that if processing such as checksum calculation is performed after the processing of determining whether or not the command has been analyzed (S231), this processing is also executed immediately after receiving the command in the same manner as the random number updating processing (S232). It can be said that it is a process that is not performed.

In the random number update process (S232), the lottery random number (software random number) associated with the effect is updated, and each time the random number update process (S232) is executed, the software random number associated with the sub-main board 301 is updated. is updated to The values successively updated in the random number update process (S232) are used as random numbers for lotteries for various effects modes in the above-described advance notice lottery management process (S228) and the like. Furthermore, the values generated in the random number update process (S232) are processed with hardware random numbers for the lottery of various effects modes, similar to the generation of the predetermined random numbers in the main board 102 described above. It is sometimes used as a random number for
<<Sub-main timer interrupt processing>>

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt processing occurs every 1 ms, which is a predetermined cycle. Since this timer interrupt process is the interrupt process of level 1, which has the lowest priority, as shown in the figure, first, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S261). Further, port input processing (S262) is executed, and port data input processing and output processing are performed. In this port input process (S262), a process (input process) for confirming the port connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, position sensor for movable effect members, push button input detection sensor, etc.), and Information output (output processing) is performed from ports connected to various devices (motors, solenoids, lamps, etc.).

Further, in the port input processing (S262), in addition to these ports, processing related to the power supply voltage monitoring port to which a signal indicating power failure (power failure signal) is input at the time of power failure is also performed. . Then, when this power failure signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing, and shifts to transfer processing for backing up the stored information. The backup function of this sub-main board 301 will be described later.

Subsequently, device control data output processing (S263) is executed to output device control data for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps, and the like. For example, in the device management process (S229) of the main process shown in FIG. 23, if a drive control pattern is determined to excite a predetermined motor for 100 ms and then demagnetize it for 100 ms, this device In the control data output process (S263), a time count process of 100 ms is performed.

Further, a production timer update process (S264) is executed, and a timer value update process (S265) for measuring predetermined timings in various productions is carried out. Then, the button control timer update is executed, and the valid time management timer for managing the period during which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is valid is updated.

Furthermore, a push button monitor control process (S266) is executed. This push button monitoring control process (S266) is for control related to the aforementioned operation button 22, which is a sub-button (push button) for presentation, and is a process corresponding to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. to run.

Next, a task control counter update (S267) is executed, and a control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. This control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, with 16 times as one unit. In this embodiment, the task control counter sequentially counts the values from 0 to 15 every 1 ms, and loops the counting of the values from 0 to 15. FIG.

Further, as one of the predetermined tasks, a task related to a game effect lamp can be exemplified. Many of the driving modes of the game effect lamps are synchronized with the image on the effect display device 60, and the switching of the display of one frame (one unit of image frame) of the moving image takes about 16 ms or about 32 ms (about 33 ms). In some cases, it is performed with a period such as (16 ms period in this embodiment). For this reason, the control counters are designed so that the generation cycle of the control counters related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integral fraction of the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in the moving image display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect that matches the image and the timing.

As for the control counter, for example, if a certain process related to the game effect lamp is performed at intervals of 16 ms, the process is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter reaches a predetermined value such as 3. . In addition, for processing that is performed at intervals of 8 ms, such as the image CPU runaway monitoring processing described later, the processing is performed at two timings with a difference of 8, such as when the control counter is 1 and when it is 9. done.

Also, if the period generated by the control counter is adjusted to a relatively short period such as one period (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub-main timer interrupt), for example, it may take about 30 seconds for control such as error reporting. If control is performed to count a relatively long period of time, the data length to be secured for counting 30 seconds becomes long, and the number of memories required becomes large. For this reason, the cycle of the control counter is set longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle related to the other effect (image effect) to be superimposed and the integral multiple or 1/integer is determined. The period of one round of the control counter is set to a predetermined period (here, 16 ms) so that Another use of the control counter updated in the task control counter update process (S267) is runaway monitoring of the sub-sub board 302 (to be described later).

Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268) is executed, and the runaway monitoring process for the image CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is performed. Here, in this embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub-board 302 is integrated with the image controller 526 in FIG. As described above, the sub-sub board 302 outputs a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that repeats ON and OFF for each frame display of moving image control. When the toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms corresponding to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as runaway of the image CPU has occurred. A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from the main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 . After receiving this reset signal, the sub-sub board 302 executes a reset process (sub-main initialization process) for initializing the state of the sub-sub board 302 .

Following the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268), an error management timer process (S269) is executed. In this error management timer processing (S269), the error management timer is decremented, and predetermined processing is executed at timeout. As the processing at the time of timeout, processing for terminating the above-mentioned error notification can be given. This error management timer counts once per 16 timer interrupts. is one. When this error management timer processing ends, the main processing of the sub-main (see FIG. 23) returns to the original processing before the timer interrupt. Here, since the objects for which interrupts are permitted are restricted in S261, although illustration is omitted, after all interrupts are permitted, the process returns to the main processing of the sub-main.
<<Communication processing with sub-sub board>>

Next, communication processing with the above-described sub-sub-board 302 will be described. Command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 (sub-main command transmission) causes an interrupt (sub-communication interrupt) relating to communication with the sub-sub board 302 to occur at regular intervals (here, 500 μs). This is done by executing communication processing with the sub-sub board 302 each time. In the communication processing with the sub-sub board 302, a buffer check is sequentially performed to confirm the presence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, the settings related to command transmission are updated, and the communication process with Sab-Sab ends.
<<Command transmission/reception management processing>>

Further, when the sub-main board 301 transmits a command to the sub-sub board 302, the aforementioned received command (sub-sub-command) indicating that the command (sub-main command) was successfully received from the sub-sub-board 302 side is sent to the sub-sub-board. It is transmitted to the substrate 301 side. In this command transmission/reception management process, a command is read, command analysis is executed, and then the command is saved. In receiving the sub-subcommand, command reception interrupt processing is executed in the sub-sub board 302. In this command reception interrupt processing, a flag for executing the command reception interrupt processing is set in the aforementioned sub-communication interrupt. Executed by In other words, since the input of the sub-subcommand from the sub-sub board 302 occurs after the transmission of the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, the command reception interrupt process is performed incidentally to the process related to the sub-communication interrupt. It is a thing to be done.
<<Control processing in sub-sub board>>

In the sub-sub board 302, similarly to the sub-main board 301, a sub-sub initial setting process started after power-on, a main process executed after this sub-sub initial setting process, and a sub-sub timer interrupt generated at a predetermined cycle for the main process. sub-main command reception processing, which is an interrupt processing that occurs with the reception of a sub-main command, and the like. Of these, in the sub-main command reception process, when a sub-main command is received from the sub-main board 301, the above-described reception command (sub-sub-command) indicating that the sub-main command has been successfully received is transmitted. executed.
<Production control aspect related to operation input>
<<Specific aspects of the auto repeated tapping function>>

1. Next, various effects modes and control modes of effects related to operation inputs will be described. The "operation input" described here means the generation of a signal or the change in signal level through human operation of various operation input means such as the operation button 22, the lever L, the cross key 96, and the like. It has a meaning such as to let

In the present embodiment, as described above, the automatic repeated hitting function for the operation button 22 is installed. The operation mode (button operation mode) of the operation button 22 in which the automatic repeated hitting function is exhibited is continuous operation (long-pressing operation, continued pressing) for a predetermined time or longer. Then, when a long-pressing operation exceeding a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is detected during the effective period of repeated hits (for example, about 3 seconds), the long-pressing operation after a predetermined time (continued after the predetermined time) is detected. A control is performed assuming that a continuous press operation has been performed in response to a long press operation. Here, when the long-pressing operation is started (long-pressing operation start timing), since one single-shot operation is actually performed, an effect corresponding to the single-shot operation is executed. Then, when the long-pressing operation reaches a predetermined time (for example, when the long-pressing operation continues for 0.5 seconds), it is considered that one single operation in the repeated hitting operation has been performed (actual single operation is (Although it has not been performed, it is considered that a single operation has been performed after 0.5 seconds have passed), and a long press operation that exceeds a predetermined time is performed once every specific time (for example, 0.2 seconds) is deemed to have been performed (although no actual single-shot operation has been performed, it is assumed that a single-shot operation has been performed every 0.2 seconds after the lapse of 0.5 seconds), and this " The fact that the "assumed single-shot operation" is performed multiple times is the auto-rolling (auto-rolling effect, auto-rolling function).

FIG. 27(c) exemplifies the flow (progress) of the game when the automatic repeated hitting operation is performed by a time chart. 27(a) and 27(b) show an example of game progress (FIG. 27(a)) when a single-shot operation is performed for comparison with the automatic repeated-hit operation shown in (c), and a repeated-hit operation. An example of progress of the game (FIG. 27(b)) is shown in the case where a (normal repeated hitting operation, which is a normal repeated hitting operation) is performed.

First, in an example of a single-shot operation (example of FIG. 27(a)), which is a basic operation mode of button operation, a variable effect is started (variation start), normal reach is generated (normal reach effect is started to be executed), A button effect is being executed to prompt the player to perform a single operation. The button production here is the one-shot production described above. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect triggered by the button operation is executed, the effect develops, and the state shifts to the SP (here, special) ready-to-win effect state.

Here, as the effect triggered by the button operation, for example, the display content of the effect display device 60 is shifted to the next state, or the movable effect member hidden inside the center decoration 64 is changed to the effect display device 60. Examples include those that appear on the front surface and perform operations for deformation and coalescence, and those that combine these. Regarding the button effect, the effect until the button operation is performed is called, for example, "first half effect" or "pre-operation effect", and after the button operation is performed (the effect triggered by the button operation is started ) can be referred to as, for example, a “second half effect” or a “post-operation effect”.

Subsequently, in the example of the normal repeated hitting operation shown in FIG. 27(b), the variation effect is started (variation start), and the button effect is executed after the normal reach occurs. This button effect prompts the player to press repeatedly with characters such as "press repeatedly". Further, the button effect at the stage before the button is operated can be called, for example, "pre-continuous-hit effect".

Then, when the player repeatedly presses the button every short period of time (for example, every 0.2 seconds), a button effect is executed in which the image is changed every short period of time. The button effect when such an operation is performed can be called, for example, a "continuous hit effect" or the like. A specific example of this "continuous hitting effect" will be described later. Then, in the example of FIG. 27(b), the effect develops after that, and shifts to the SP (here, special) ready-to-win effect state.

In contrast to such a repeated hitting operation (normal repeated hitting operation), in the automatic repeated hitting operation shown in FIG. 27(c), a button effect prompting the player to perform a repeated hitting operation is executed as a button effect after normal reach occurs. The effect at this stage can be the same as the effect before repeated hits related to the normal repeated hit operation described above.

After the start of the button effect, if the player performs a long-pressing operation for a predetermined time or more, if the player continues to press the button after that, the above-described normal repeated hitting operation can be performed without performing repeated hitting operations. An effect similar to the continuous hitting effect (here, meaning the same or similar effect) is executed. Then, in the example of FIG. 27(c), similarly to FIG. 27(b), the effect develops after that and shifts to the SP (here, special) ready-to-win effect state.

27(b) and (c), in order to detect the button operation, for example, the time during which the operation button 22 continues to be pressed (press duration time) is measured. is possible. In the case of the normal repeated hit operation (Fig. 27(b)) among these, the duration of pressing the operation button 22 is is for a short time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds or 0.5 seconds), a normal continuous hit operation (intermittent operation) is performed once (that is, one single operation is performed in the continuous hit operation effect This short continuation of pressing is performed multiple times (repeatedly releasing the pressing once after continuation of pressing for a short time and then continuing to press again for a short time), so that normal continuous pressing is performed. It is possible to control operations.

On the other hand, in the case of the automatic repeated hit operation (Fig. 27(c)), in order to detect the button operation, for example, in a situation where a repeated hit effect is being performed (such as a situation where the repeated hit effect flag is set), When the pressing duration time of the operation button 22 exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), it is possible to determine that a long pressing operation has been performed, and to perform control related to an auto repeated pressing operation. This control related to the automatic continuous hitting operation continues even after the pressing duration of the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the first condition related to the automatic continuous hitting operation is established. By maintaining the continuation, the control related to the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed until the continuation of the pressing is canceled or until the button operation valid period is reached in the state of the continuation of the pressing. Furthermore, after the first condition is satisfied, even if the pressing is stopped once and then the pressing is continued again, the auto repeated tapping continues until the second condition is satisfied after exceeding the predetermined pressing duration time (for example, 0.5 seconds). not judged.

In FIG. 27(c), the pressing start timing of the operation button 22 is described as "pressing the button (long pressing for a predetermined time or more)", but after this (after the first condition is satisfied), the pressing is continued and the second button is pressed. By satisfying the two conditions, after the first predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed while the button is being pressed, even though the normal continuous tap operation is not performed (instead, the button is pressed continuously). However, at a specific time interval (for example, 0.2 seconds), it is possible to generate an effect similar to that when performing a normal continuous hitting operation.

That is, when the single-shot operation of the operation button 22 is performed five times in succession in the normal repeated operation as shown in FIG. When the effects that occur in each of the single-shot operation and the fifth single-shot operation are Effect 1, Effect 2, Effect 3, Effect 4, and Effect 5 (However, effects 1 to 5 must all be different modes. In other words, either mode may be the same, for example, effects 1 and 2 may be blue effect display, effect 3 may be green effect display, effects 4 and 5 may be red effect display, etc.), FIG. In the case where the operation button 22 is pressed continuously for more than a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the automatic repeated hitting operation as shown in (c), the effect that occurs at the pressing start timing is effect 1, and the pressing continuous time is predetermined. The effect that occurs at the timing when the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is reached is effect 2, and from there, each timing (for example, the pressing duration is 0.7 seconds) at a specific time interval (for example, 0.2 seconds) , 0.9 seconds, and 1.1 seconds) are effect 3, effect 4, and effect 5, respectively.

In other words, in the case of performing the automatic continuous hitting operation, the time when the operation button 22 starts being pressed is regarded as the first single-shot operation (first continuous pressing), and the timing when the subsequent pressing duration reaches 0.5 seconds. It is regarded as the second single-shot operation (second consecutive hit), and after that, every time the button is pressed for 0.2 seconds, the 3rd, 4th, 5th, . will be regarded.

In addition, the term "automatic continuous hitting operation" can mean an operation for satisfying the above-described first condition (here, button depression continues for 0.5 seconds or longer). Furthermore, it is also possible to call it an "auto repeated hitting operation" including the fact that the button is continuously pressed even after the first condition is satisfied (the above-described second condition). Hereinafter, the term “auto repeated operation” means that the continuation of the button operation is detected after an operation that satisfies the first condition. Further, in the present embodiment, it takes 0.5 seconds to satisfy the first condition, but the time required to satisfy the first condition is not limited to this.

Here, FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are schematically shown side by side with the single-shot function and the repeated-hit function in order to exemplify the characteristic items of the automatic repeated-hit function. Further, the automatic repeated hitting function, the single-shot function, and the repeated hitting function are not limited to the ones exemplified here, and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 28(a) shows a more specific example (a specific example of auto repeated operation) of the flow of button operations and effects related to the above-described automatic repeated hitting function. In this FIG. 28(a), when the variation time of the variation pattern drawn by the main substrate 102 is several tens of seconds or more (for example, about 60 seconds), and an effect corresponding to this variation pattern is executed on the sub side. , a part of the flow of production is shown.

In the example of FIG. 28(a), as shown in the left end portion of the figure, the pattern variation is started in the effect display device 60. FIG. After that, a predetermined time (three seconds in this case) is a button operation invalid period in which the operation of the operation button 22 is invalid, that is, a period in which no button effect occurs. When 3 seconds have passed since the start of the variation and the above-described button operation invalid period has passed, the button operation valid period is reached, that is, the period during which the button effect is generated (started). Here, this button operation valid period is the auto repeated hitting valid period.

At this point, it is possible to start an effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image to perform a front button effect. In the example of FIG. A production (production before consecutive hits) is being performed. As for the effect before repeated hits, an example of the effect before repeated hits is shown in FIG. 31(a).

The effect before repeated hits is started as a front button effect accompanied by a guide display. Here, it is possible to start the display of the automatic repeated hitting valid period and the display before repeated hitting at the same timing. However, not limited to this, both start timings may be made different. If the start timings of both are different, for example, it is conceivable to start the effect before repeated hits after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 1 second after the start) from the start of the automatic repeated hits valid period.

Also, it is conceivable to start the effect before repeated hits earlier than the auto repeated hit effective period by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 to 1 second). Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 28(a), the button operation valid period and the auto repeated press valid period match, but the present invention is not limited to this. ) It is also possible to delay the start of the auto repeated hit valid period.

When the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) of the sub-main board 301 detects a button operation on the operation button 22, the duration of the button operation is measured. Then, when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds), the first condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the long press has satisfied the condition for starting the automatic continuous tapping. Continuation of the button operation (continued pressing for 0.5 seconds or more that satisfies the second condition) is regarded as a normal repeated hitting operation, and the continuous hitting effect is executed. For example, the continuation of the button operation (continuation of pressing that satisfies the second condition) after the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) is, as described above, a specific time interval (here, 0.5 seconds). 0.2 second interval), and the effect during continuous hitting is executed as if normal repeated hitting operations were performed at intervals of a specific time.

FIG. 31(b) can be exemplified as the effect during repeated hits (here, effect during repeated hits related to auto repeated hits). In FIG. 31B, a bright image 404 as an effect element is displayed around the button image 401 . A brilliance image 404 in the drawing expresses brilliance emitted from the button image 401 to the surroundings. Then, the bright image 404 is colored white or white, and the bright image 404 appears and disappears in a relatively short cycle (for example, 0.2 second interval, which is the same as the interval of auto repeated tapping). (blinking display) is repeated during the continuous hitting effect. However, the bright image 404 can also be blinked at the start of the button operation and at the timing when the duration of the button operation reaches a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds) (when the first condition described above is satisfied). can be done. In other words, the button operation (single-shot operation) is actually being performed at the start of the button operation (first button operation) until the auto repeat is started (until the auto repeat is performed at a specific interval of 0.2 seconds). , the bright image 404 is flashed, and the button is actually operated from the timing when the subsequent condition for starting the automatic continuous hitting (first condition) is satisfied (timing when the duration of the button operation reaches 0.5 seconds, which is the predetermined time). Even if the button operation (single-shot operation) is not performed, it is considered that the button operation (single-shot operation) has been performed, and after that, it will be automatically repeated at a specific interval of 0.2 seconds assumed to be done).

Note that the effect element is not limited to appearing and disappearing, and for example, blinking or the like can be performed as a part of the button image 401 as an effect element. Images other than the button image 401 and the glitter image 404 can also be used as effect elements. Here, both the button image 401 and the glitter image 404 can be collectively regarded as one button image 401 .

Such a glittering image 404 of continuous hitting effect is displayed not only in the continuous hitting effect relating to auto repeated hitting, but also when normal repeated hitting (actual repeated hitting) is performed. In other words, the displayed image can be shared between the continuous-hit effects for the automatic continuous-hit and the continuous-hit effects for the normal continuous-hit. Then, in the continuous-hit effect relating to normal continuous-hitting, the bright image 404 can be blinked at the timing in response to the button operation. In addition, the repeated hitting effect in which automatic repeated hitting is possible is the repeated hitting effect in which normal repeated hitting is possible. As a modified example, a part of the continuous-hit effect in which normal continuous-hitting is possible may be a continuous-hitting effect in which automatic continuous-hitting is impossible.

In addition, this is not the only option, and even in the production during repeated hits related to normal repeated hits, after the bright image 404 is displayed in response to the first button operation, the flashing of the bright image 404 is automatically performed at a constant cycle. It is also possible to display. Such an effect control mode can be said to be the same mode for the continuous-hit effect relating to the automatic continuous hitting and the continuous-hitting effect relating to the normal continuous hitting.
<<<Relationship between auto continuous press valid period and button continuous press valid period (if they are the same) >>>

Further, the effective period of automatic repeated hits (automatic repeated hit valid period) can be controlled as follows. For example, as shown in FIG. 28(a), it is possible to make the auto repeated-press valid period the same as the normal repeated-press valid period (here, referred to as the "button repeated-press valid period"). It is also possible to make the start timing and the end timing of the automatic continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period the same. It can be said that the valid period of button operation in such specifications is the valid period of automatic continuous presses and the valid period of repeated button presses. In other words, it is preferable to simply refer to the period during which both automatic repeated hits and normal repeated hits are possible as the "button operation effective period" It can be said that the "effective period" is a period that is both the "automatic continuous-press effective period" and the "button-continuous-press effective period"). Here, it is also possible to make the auto repeat valid period and the button repeat valid period different, and such an example (such as the example in FIG. 28(b)) will be described later.

Further, it is also possible to provide a common repeated-press valid period without distinguishing between the automatic repeated-press valid period and the button repeated-press valid period. In the example of FIG. 28(a), it can be said that the automatic repeated-press valid period and the button repeated-press valid period are provided as the common repeated-press valid period.
<<<Relationship between auto repeated hit effect (auto repeated hit effect) and normal repeated hit effect>>>

In addition, the effect during repeated hits related to auto repeated hitting can be terminated after the flashing of the bright image 404 is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). It is possible to execute (repeatedly) a plurality of times by button operation until the end of the operation valid period. Here, the effect during repeated hits related to the automatic repeated hits can be called, for example, "automatic repeated hits effect" or "automatic repeated hits effect". In the following, when explaining the effect during repeated hits related to automatic repeated hits, the term "automatic repeated effects" will be preferentially used, and when it is necessary to distinguish between them, the term "automatic repeated effects" will be used. .

Similarly, the effect during repeated hits related to normal repeated hits can also be terminated when the button is pressed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). It can be executed multiple times (repeatedly) by button operation until the end of the effective period. Here, the effect during normal repeated hits can be called, for example, "effect during normal repeated hits". In the following description, the term "normal repeated hits effect" will be used as necessary to distinguish it from "automatic repeated hits effect" (and "automatic repeated hits effect").
<<<Relationship between the valid period of auto repeated presses and the valid period of repeated button presses (in case of difference)>>>

Furthermore, regarding the relationship between the auto-continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period as described above, at least one of the start timing, the end timing, and the length of the period may be different. For example, FIG. 28(b) shows an example of a case in which the auto repeat valid period and the button repeat valid period are different. Note that the description here is based on the specific example of the automatic continuous hitting operation shown in FIG.

In the control example shown in FIG. 28(b), first, the operation of the operation button 22 is disabled for a predetermined period of time (here, 3 seconds as in the example of FIG. 28(a)) after the pattern variation is started. It's becoming After that, when the auto continuous hitting valid period starts, the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed, and the button is pressed for a time exceeding a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds related to the establishment of the first condition) (following the establishment of the first condition) is continued to be pressed for 0.5 seconds or more to satisfy the second condition), a continuous-hit effect (auto-continuous-hit effect) relating to automatic continuous hitting is executed.

At this time, the valid period of repeated button presses related to the normal repeated press operation has not yet started, as shown in the state somewhat biased to the right side in the figure. Then, after a predetermined time (two seconds in this case) after the automatic continuous-press valid period starts, the button-successive-press valid period is started. In FIG. 28(b), the start timing of the effective period of repeated button presses is indicated by a chain double-dashed line. In this way, it can be said that the control example in which the auto-continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period are different is provided with the auto-continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period as non-common continuous-press effective periods.

Also, in the example of FIG. 28B, the auto continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period end at the same timing after a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the automatic repeated-press valid period may end before (or after) the button repeated-press valid period. Further, the auto repeated hitting valid period may be started after the button repeated hitting valid period.
<<<Other relationships between the auto continuous press valid period and the button continuous press valid period>>>

Also, although illustration is omitted, for example, the auto repeat valid period and button repeat valid period may exist multiple times during one variation. In this case, one set of button operation valid periods (a combination of an auto-continuous-press valid period and a button-continuous-press valid period) related to the continuous-press operation is set, and these sets are set during one variation period with a button-operation invalid period interposed therebetween. It is conceivable to prepare three times.

In addition, during one button effect during one variation, the effect during repeated hits related to auto repeated hits (referred to as "automatic repeated hits effect" in the explanation here) and the effect during repeated hits related to normal repeated hits (normal repeated hits) Medium production) may be performed at different times so that they do not overlap more than the time axis. For example, the player first performed a normal repeated hitting operation, but changed his/her mind halfway through and switched to an automatic repeated hitting operation, or vice versa. In these cases, it is possible to continue the automatic continuous-hit effect after the normal continuous-hit effect, or conversely, to continue the normal continuous-hit effect after the automatic continuous-hit effect. . When continuing the auto repeated effect after the normal repeated effect, the number of repeated hits related to the normal repeated effect (number of single-shot operations) and the subsequent repeated hits related to the automatic repeated effect (Start pressing the button to perform the automatic repeated operation) The number of repeated hits during one button effect (during the repeated hit effect) is the sum of the first time repeated hits, the second time when the predetermined time has elapsed, and the number of times when the specified interval is the third time or later). If the normal repeated hits effect is continued later, the number of repeated hits related to the automatic repeated hits effect (the first repeated hit at the start of pressing the button for performing the automatic repeated hit operation, the second time after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the third time or later at a specific interval after that) number) and the subsequent number of repeated hits (the number of single-shot operations) relating to the normal repeated-hit effect is the number of repeated hits during one button effect (during the repeated-hit effect).

It should be noted that, as described here, the repeated hit effect accompanied by the guide display can be called, for example, "the repeated hit effect as the front button effect". However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform a back button effect (to be described later) without accompanying guide display at least before the button is operated. Such repeated hitting effect without guide display can be called, for example, "repeat effect as back button effect". This "continuous hit effect as the back button effect" will be described later.
<<Relationship between continuous tapping operation and other forms of button operation>>

2. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the repeated hitting operation (here, including both the automatic repeated hitting operation and the normal repeated hitting operation) and other forms of button operations related to the operation button 22 . For example, the button operation valid period related to the repeated press operation (here, the repeated press valid period, which is at least one of the auto repeated press valid period and the repeated button press valid period) is set to about 6 to 10 seconds. . On the other hand, the button operation valid period (single operation valid period) related to the single operation is set to about 3 seconds. That is, it is possible to set the continuous-hit operation effective period to be relatively longer than the single-shot operation effective period. Also, as described above, a plurality of button operation effective periods may be provided according to the types of button effects. For example, when comparing a single-hit operation effect and a repeated-hit operation effect, the repeated-hit operation effect has a longer button operation effective period. (If multiple types of single-shot operation effects and multiple types of continuous-hit operation effects are provided, the average value of the button operation valid period in multiple types of single-shot operation effects It is possible to configure such that the average value of the button operation valid period is relatively longer).
＜＜Combination of back button function and auto repeat function＞＞

3. Next, it is possible to consider an effect mode and a control mode in which the automatic repeated hitting function and the above-described back button function are combined. The back button effect is a effect of not performing the guide display or restricting the guide display as described above. Then, for example, it is possible to execute the back button effect while validating the auto repeated hitting function.

FIG. 29(a) schematically illustrates the relationship between the auto repeated hit function and the back button effect. Note that the description here is based on the case of the front button presentation shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 29(a), as shown in the left end of the figure, the effect display device 60 starts to change the pattern, passes through the button operation invalid period, and becomes the button operation valid period (valid period of repeated hitting operation). there is

At this time point, there is no effect accompanied by guide display such as a button image, and the effect before repeated hits is not performed. After that, when a button operation to the operation button 22 is detected, the sub-main CPU 521 (FIG. 4) determines that the condition (first condition) of the auto repeated hitting function is satisfied by long pressing for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds, etc.). As described above, by continuing the button operation after a predetermined period of time (and continuing to press the button for 0.5 seconds or more that satisfies the second condition), an auto repeated hit effect is produced during repeated hits. An auto repeated hit effect, which is a middle effect, is executed.

In addition, when a button operation for a shorter time (0.2 seconds, etc.) is detected instead of a long press, the sub-main CPU 521 sets the normal repeated press conditions (a repeated press consisting of multiple single-shot operations). A determination is made that the condition for one single operation out of the operations) is satisfied, and as the button operation is repeated, the normal continuous-hit effect, which is the normal continuous-hit effect, is performed as the continuous-hit effect. executed.

To give a specific example of the effect related to the back button effect, first, when a predetermined effect (for example, the appearance of a predetermined character) is executed, even though there is no effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, The button operation valid period is already in effect, and the operation button 22 is operated by the player. When the operation button 22 is operated by the player while a predetermined effect is being performed, a predetermined character performs a specific action (for example, running, waving, or (such as picking up a predetermined item), or display a cut-in image (cut-in display) in which a predetermined image is suddenly inserted in front of a predetermined character, etc. can be exemplified. In the present embodiment, the back button effect related to repeated hit operations will be mainly described later, but the back button effect related to single operation may be installed. In other words, the button operation valid period is valid even though there is no effect accompanying the guide display such as the button image. performs a specific action (for example, running, waving, or picking up a predetermined item), or a predetermined image is suddenly inserted in front of a predetermined character. A cut-in image (cut-in display) may be displayed (cut-in display), or a special sound may be output according to the degree of expectation of a big hit (no continuous hitting operation is required, and a single operation produces an effect). Here, depending on the behavior of a predetermined character (for example, whether it starts running or waving), depending on the mode of cut-in display (for example, whether the cut-in is blue or red), and depending on the mode of special voice ( For example, voices such as "Big hit expectation 10%!" and "Big hit expectation 90%!"), it is preferable that the big hit expectations are different. In this case, an effect (for example, a blinking display in which the above-described bright image 404 appears and disappears during SP reach) and a one-shot A production that occurs when a single operation is performed in the back button production related to the operation (for example, by performing a single operation at the timing when a predetermined character appears before the SP reach develops, the predetermined character performs a specific action as described above. , displaying a cut-in image, or outputting a special sound).

The action of the player when the operation button 22 is operated is such that although it is not known whether the effect triggered by the button operation will be executed, the player tries to operate it based on intuition. Further, among the back button effects, the effects such as restricting the above-mentioned guide display can be exemplified by the effect only by light emission of the LED. That is, for example, a guide display such as a button image is not performed, and only LED light emission (for example, light emission of a light emitting member or decoration attached to the operation button 22) is performed.

Here, it is possible to call such repeated hit effect without or with limited guide display as "repeat effect as back button effect" as described above. In addition, the control mode of the sub-main CPU 521, which combines the back button function with the automatic repeated hitting function to produce an effect, is said to have a continuous hitting effect as the back button effect and enable the execution of the automatic repeated hitting function. Is possible. Furthermore, it can be said that such a control mode is a combination of the back button function and the automatic repeated hitting function (back button and automatic repeated hitting).

Also, in the continuous hit effect as the back button effect, as described above, the effect before the button operation (or until the button operation) is the first half effect (pre-operation effect), and the button operation and after that (or after the button operation). It is possible to make the production of only) the latter half production (post-operation production). To give a more specific example, in the first half of the effect (pre-operation effect), the player performs repeated hit or auto repeat button operations in a situation where the normal reach effect is being performed after the start of the variation. Then, the production becomes the second half production (post-operation production), and develops from normal reach to SP reach. In this case, the effect during button operation constitutes part of the latter half effect in this embodiment. For example, when a pattern effect is displayed with button operation, and then develops into SP reach, the display of pattern effect, etc., which is the production during button operation, and the SP reach production that progresses after button operation Including, it is possible to make it a second half production. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to distinguish the effect during the button operation triggered by the button operation from the latter half effect by calling it, for example, "operation-time effect" or "middle stage effect".

Here, it can be said that the back button effect as described above is a relatively inconspicuous effect compared to the front button effect. For example, the back button effect can be said to be an effect that does not specifically prompt the player to perform a specific operation, unlike the button image display in the front button effect. In addition, the back button effect can be said to be the effect in which the player cannot specify which part of the effect is related to the button operation. Furthermore, a situation in which a predetermined character performs a specific action (for example, running or waving) or a situation in which a predetermined cut-in display is displayed may be referred to as a back button effect. It is possible.

Further, the above-mentioned first half effect can be called a back button effect. In this case, it is also possible to refer to the effect of a part of the first half effect (here, final stage) as the back button effect.

Furthermore, it is possible to call the aforementioned latter half effect a back button effect, and to call a partial period (for example, the beginning or the period from the beginning to the middle) of the latter half effect a back button effect. In addition, as a way of understanding in a broader sense than these ways of understanding, the first half effect and the second half effect can be collectively referred to as a series of back button effects. Also, it is possible to treat the back button effect as a negative effect, and consider the front button effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image as an active effect.

Furthermore, as the effect (effect when shifting from the first half effect to the second half effect) triggered by the button operation, for example, the display content of the effect display device 60 moves to the next situation, the inside of the center decoration 64 A movable effect member that has been hidden in the inner part appears on the front surface of the effect display device 60 to perform an action for deformation or combination, or a combination thereof. Note that, in the present embodiment, the effect that is triggered by the button operation (the effect when transitioning from the first half effect to the second half effect) constitutes part of the second half effect as described above. However, it is not limited to this, and the production that is performed with the button operation as a trigger (the production when shifting from the first half production to the second half production) is called, for example, "operation time production" or "middle stage production", and is called the second half production. A distinction is also possible.

Further, for example, when the button effect is performed in the situation of SP reach, it is possible to express that the SP reach continues (or is promoted) in the second half effect. Furthermore, even if there is a button operation (including auto repeated operation), there may be cases where the reach does not develop or the SP reach does not continue, but in such cases, it is a production that does not proceed to the second half production. can.

In addition, although the auto repeated hit effect as the back button effect is explained here, other button effects can be executed as the back button effect. For example, it is possible to execute a normal repeated hitting effect as a back button effect, or a single button effect as a back button effect.
<<Relationship between the automatic continuous hit effect as the back button effect and the subsequent effect>>

4. Subsequently, as described above, in the automatic repeated hitting function as the back button effect, depending on the mode of the effect during repeated hitting, there is a possibility that a specific effect will occur after that change (the change) and the possibility of the effect developing. It is conceivable to have different sexes. This effect during repeated hits will be mainly described here as an auto repeated effect, but since the repeated effect that allows automatic repeated hits is a repeated effect that allows normal repeated hits, it can be used not only for automatic repeated hits but also for normal repeated hits. It should be added that an effect can be generated (an effect is executed during repeated hits).

For example, a plurality of types are provided for each of the modes of continuous-hit effects by automatic continuous-hit and the subsequent effects (post-continuous-hit effects that may be performed after the continuous-hit effects end). Then, when an effect of a predetermined mode is selected from a plurality of types as an effect during repeated hits by auto repeated hits (actually, by performing repeated hits, that is, by repeating the operation, the effect is produced step by step. When the state changes), the subsequent effect (effect after repeated hit effect) is executed in accordance with the effect during repeated hits by auto repeated hits. The effect during repeated hits in such an effect can be said to be "an automatic repeated hit effect as a back button effect". It can be said that it is an auto repeated hit effect.

As a specific example, a plurality of types of moving images for effects that differ only in effect elements are provided for automatic continuous hitting effects. As the effect element, the coloring in the above-described glitter image 404 (FIG. 31(b)) can be applied, but various other elements can also be used. Then, first, the basic color of the bright image 404 is set to a light color such as white or white. It is determined that the operation has been performed at the timing of the passage of a predetermined time, and the blinking display is performed at each timing), and the bright image is displayed at a period (for example, every 0.2 seconds) determined to simulate the actual continuous hitting operation. The flashing display in which the 404 appears and disappears is repeated during the consecutive hitting effect.

Furthermore, in the automatic repeated hit effect during normal reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the brilliant image 404) can be colored in addition to white or white, such as blue or blue coloring, yellow or yellow coloring, green or green coloring. Coloring, red or reddish coloring, and even giraffe patterns may blink.

Furthermore, this effect element is configured so that the mode of presentation can be changed step by step by repeatedly hitting, that is, by repeating the operation. For example, the first to third hits are white or white, the fourth hit is blue or blue, and the fifth hit is yellow or yellow. Further, although the details will be described later, depending on the final mode (here, the type of color displayed last within the valid period of button operation), whether or not the subsequent effect (effect after continuous hit effect) is executed. are configured to have different expectations, and when the subsequent performance is performed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent performance will be performed is configured to be different.

The degree of expectation for execution of the subsequent effects increases in the order of white or white <blue or blue <yellow or yellow <green or green <red or red <giraffe pattern. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effects will be executed, if the possible subsequent effects candidates are, for example, effects A, effects B, and effects C (for example, effects A to C are Each type is a different type of SP ready-to-win production, and the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of production A < production B < production C), and the expectation that the subsequent production with a high degree of expectation for a big hit will be executed is white or white. The color is higher in the following order: system<blue or bluish<yellow or yellow<green or green<red or red<giraffe pattern. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a lottery for production each time the button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined production (for example, a production with high expectations) when winning, and to perform a lottery for promotion promotion each time the button is pressed. , it is also possible to upgrade the current mode to a mode with a higher degree of expectation when winning (for example, from blue to yellow, from green to red, etc.).

In addition, we will explain a series of productions such as normal reach to the first half of SP reach, automatic repeated hits as a back button production in the first half of SP reach, and further development from the first half of SP reach to the latter half of SP reach. do. In the automatic continuous hit production in the first half of the SP reach, the above-mentioned effect element (here, the brilliant image 404) is white or other than white, for example, blue or blue-based coloring, yellow or yellow-based coloring, green or green-based coloring, etc. Coloring, red or reddish coloring, and even giraffe patterns may blink. In addition, the automatic repeated hit effect during normal reach is the front button effect, and the automatic repeated hit effect during the first half of SP reach may be the back button effect. In that case, the automatic repeated effect during normal reach and the automatic repeated effect during the first half of SP reach. is preferably handled differently (for example, the automatic repeated hitting effect during normal reach is an effect element that occurs in the button image 401 described above, but the automatic repeated hitting effect during the first half of SP reach is an effect element that occurs with a specific character. may be). Alternatively, the auto repeated hitting effect may not be performed during the normal reach, and the automatic repeated hitting effect may be performed as the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach.

Furthermore, this effect element is configured so that the mode of presentation can be changed step by step by performing repeated hits, that is, by repeating the operation, as in the automatic repeated hitting effect during normal reach. For example, the first to third hits are white or white, the fourth hit is blue or blue, and the fifth hit is yellow or yellow. Further, although the details will be described later, depending on the final mode (here, the type of color displayed last within the valid period of button operation), whether or not the subsequent effect (effect after continuous hit effect) is executed. are configured to have different expectations, and when the subsequent performance is performed, the tendency of what kind of subsequent performance will be performed is configured to be different.

As for the degree of expectation that the subsequent effect will be executed, similar to the auto repeated effect during normal reach, white or white < blue or blue < yellow or yellow < green or green < red or red < giraffe pattern higher in order. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effects will be executed, if the possible subsequent effects candidates are, for example, effects A, effects B, and effects C (for example, effects A to C are Each is a different type of SP reach latter half production, and the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of production A < production B < production C). White < blue or blue < yellow or yellow < green or green < red or red < giraffe pattern. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a lottery for production each time the button is pressed, and to execute a predetermined production (for example, a production with high expectations) when winning, and to perform a lottery for promotion promotion each time the button is pressed. , it is also possible to upgrade the current mode to a mode with a higher degree of expectation when winning (for example, from blue to yellow, from green to red, etc.).

As described above, the effect element (bright image 404) is more likely to be displayed in red, red (red effect), or giraffe pattern (giraffe pattern effect) than in other colors. Also, it is conceivable to develop SP reach at a high rate when an auto repeated hit operation is performed. In this case, it can be said that the red effect display is a display with a higher degree of expectation than the white effect display, blue effect, or the like.

Also, when the effect element (shiny image 404) is a giraffe pattern effect, compared to the red effect, when the auto repeated hit operation is performed, the SP reach will develop at a higher rate. can be considered. In this case, it can be said that the giraffe pattern effect display is a display with a higher degree of expectation than the red effect display.

Further, when the effect display is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, red, reddish, giraffe pattern, etc.), it is possible to perform an effect such that development to SP reach is confirmed. In this case, red or red effect display, or giraffe pattern effect display, compared to other colors (such as blue, blue, yellow, yellow, green, green, etc.), reach development It becomes the effect display of the high expectation aspect which concerns.

Further, not only the degree of expectation for reach development (expected degree of reach development), but also the degree of expectation for big hits in the subsequent performance can be varied depending on the difference in the mode of the automatic repeated hitting performance. For example, when the effect display related to the auto repeated effect is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, a giraffe pattern), it is possible to perform the effect in such a manner that the ratio of close to 100% is close to 100%. In the case of the degree of expectation for a big hit, for example, it can be said that the giraffe-patterned effect display is a presentation with a higher degree of expectation than the above-described red or red-based effect display.

In addition, not only the relationship between normal reach and SP reach as described above, the relationship between the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach, but also the relationship between normal reach and the second half of SP reach, the production before reach, normal reach, and before reach It is also possible to apply the relationship between the effect display and the degree of expectation of a big hit, as described above, to the relationship between the effect of , and the effect before reach and the latter half of SP reach. .

Further, when the aforementioned effects A to C are applied to the latter half of the SP reach, they can be referred to as, for example, the latter half of the SP reach effect A, the latter half of the SP reach effect B, the latter half of the SP reach effect C, and the like. And, although the term "SP reach second half production" is also used in the explanation after this, any term "SP reach second half production" is based on the predetermined timing and production situation as the first half SP reach. It is used in the same sense in that it refers to the production of the latter part when divided into the latter half.

Also, the following can be exemplified for the relationship between the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach. For example, "SP reach first half" is SP reach for a predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively lower than "SP reach second half", and the player can win a big hit in "SP reach first half". It is a production that expects the transition to the "SP reach latter half" rather than hoping that the winning will be notified, and the "SP reach latter half" is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.) of the "SP reach first half". It is a ready-to-win effect of a long predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.), and the expectation of a big win is relatively higher than the "first half of the SP ready-to-win", and the player expects to be notified of the winning of the big win.
<<Various aspects related to back button production>>

As for the back button effects as described above, various effects and control modes can be employed in addition to the items described above. For example, as the automatic continuous hit effect, the flashing period of the bright image 404 (FIG. 31(b)) is set to a predetermined time (0.2 seconds) as described above. Unlike the automatic repeated hit effect as the front button effect, it is conceivable to set the blinking period of the bright image 404 to another predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (in this case, in the automatic repeated hit effect as the front button effect 0.2 second interval).

By doing so, it is possible to perform the automatic repeated hitting performance as the back button performance and the automatic repeated hitting performance as the above-described front button performance in different modes (perform with different repeated hitting intervals). In addition, in the case where the effect mode is differentiated between the back button effect and the front button effect in this manner, the effect mode may be differentiated by various other factors. For example, it is possible to change the shape or form of the glitter image 404, or use an effect element other than the glitter image 404 for, for example, a repeated hit effect as a back button effect. In addition, the automatic repeated hitting effect as the back button effect is a effect of blinking the bright image 404, but the automatic repeated hitting effect as the front button effect is completely different, and the meter in the meter image may be gradually increased. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the interval between automatic repeated hits is simply changed (0.5 seconds for the former and 0.2 seconds for the latter).

Furthermore, the start timing of the auto repeated hit valid period in the back button effect may be before or after the timing (execution start timing) of the first reach (here, normal reach). Also, the effective period of automatic repeated hits in the back button effect may be longer than the effective period of automatic repeated hits in the front button effect. It is a different effect, for example, the auto repeated hit effect as the front button effect is executed before the normal reach occurs). Since the automatic repeated hit effect as the back button effect is not provided or is limited to guide display, the player may not notice it, so it is desirable to make it relatively long. However, as a modification, the automatic repeated hit effect as the back button effect is relatively short in order to set the auto repeated effect period to such an extent that only the player who knows can operate it (that is, to the extent that it is difficult to accidentally operate it). It may be time.

In addition, a plurality of types of automatic repeated hitting effects (for example, automatic repeated hitting effects A and automatic repeated hitting effects B, etc.) are provided as automatic repeated hitting effects as back button effects, and the blinking cycle of the bright image 404 differs depending on the type of automatic repeated hitting effects. It is possible to adopt a mode of presentation such as As such an effect, for example, when the automatic repeated-hit effect A (first automatic repeated-hit effect) is executed, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.5 seconds, and when the automatic repeated-hit effect B (second automatic repeated-hit effect) is executed, For example, blinking the bright image 404 every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the same configuration may be applied not only to the automatic repeated hitting effect as the back button effect, but also to the automatic repeated hitting effect as the front button effect. In other words, a plurality of types of automatic repeated hitting effects (for example, automatic repeated hitting effects C and automatic repeated hitting effects D, etc.) are provided as automatic repeated hitting effects as front button effects, and the flashing cycle of the bright image 404 differs depending on the type of automatic repeated hitting effects. It is possible to adopt a mode of presentation such as As such an effect, for example, when the automatic repeated-hit effect C (third automatic repeated-hit effect) is executed, the bright image 404 is blinked every 0.5 seconds, and when the automatic repeated-hit effect D (fourth automatic repeated-hit effect) is executed, For example, blinking the bright image 404 every 0.2 seconds.

In addition, in the case where the effect mode differs depending on the type of auto repeated effect in this way, the button operation effective period of auto repeated effect A (auto repeated effect effective period) and the button operation effective period of automatic repeated effect B (automatic effect) It is possible to make the length of time different between continuous hit effective period). In addition, as an effect before the automatic continuous hitting operation is performed, for example, when a plurality of cut-in displays can be continuously performed, the number of times of cut-in display is made different between the automatic repeated hitting effect A and the automatic repeated hitting effect B. , and so on.

Furthermore, when the back button effect is executed, even if the player performs the button operation in a state (here, long press) that would be an auto repeated hit operation during the front button effect, the automatic repeated hit effect is not executed. It is also possible to By doing so, it is possible to disable the automatic continuous hitting operation during the back button presentation, and prevent the repeated hitting performance from being executed unless the player performs the normal continuous hitting operation (intermittent operation).
<<Relationship between the change notice effect, which is the previous stage effect, and the automatic continuous hit effect>>

5. Next, similarly, it is possible to consider the relationship between the possibility (percentage) that the display mode of the automatic continuous hit effect as the back button effect will be the high expectation mode and the effect performed in the stage before this automatic continuous hit effect. be. Although the specifications for the back button effect will be described below, it should be added that the same configuration can be applied to the front button effect as well.

For example, in the variation at that time (the variation), after the start of the variation, the button operation valid period related to the back button effect without performing the front button effect (situation in which the back button function is executed) Think (for the sake of illustration, the explanation is based on the situation where the front button effect is not performed and the button operation valid period is reached. It may be in a situation where the relevant button operation valid period is reached). FIG. 29(b) shows the flow of a series of effects performed by combining the forewarning effect in the variation (for example, the fluctuating forewarning effect such as a line notice suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit or a step-up notice) and the auto repeated hit effect. (Relationship between the auto repeated hitting function and the change notice effect) is schematically illustrated. Note that the description here is based on the specific example of the automatic continuous hitting operation shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 29(b), the change notice effect is executed in the change (the change) when the automatic repeated hit effect is performed. Furthermore, this variable advance notice effect is selected from a plurality of types provided. For example, a notice (speech notice) effect in which color is added to the character display is used, and the speech notice group includes white speech notice, blue speech notice, red speech notice, etc., and the step-up notice group includes white step-up notice, There are blue step-up notice, red step-up notice, etc. Select or do not select one from the line notice group, and select or not select any from the step-up notice group, and the change notice As the effect, no advance notice effect is executed, or at least either a speech advance notice or a step-up notice is executed.

Then, depending on the type of the selected variable notice effect, there is a possibility that the aspect of the effect during successive hits by automatic repeated hits after that will be a relatively high expectation aspect (effect elements are white or white, blue or blue The possibility of becoming red or red or giraffe pattern than the system) is different, and the expectations of whether or not the subsequent production (production after continuous hit production) will be executed are different, and the subsequent production is When executed, it is configured so that the tendencies of what subsequent effects are executed are different. Regarding the degree of expectation that the subsequent production will be executed, in the line notice group, the order of white line notice < blue line notice < red line notice < red line notice is higher, and in the step-up notice group, white step-up notice < blue step-up notice < It becomes higher in order of the red step-up notice. In addition, regarding the tendency of what kind of subsequent effects will be executed, if the possible subsequent effects candidates are, for example, effects A, effects B, and effects C (for example, effects A to C are Each is a different type of SP reach production, and the degree of expectation for a big hit increases in the order of production A < production B < production C). In the case of the step-up notice group, the order of white step-up notice <blue step-up notice <red step-up notice is higher. In other words, during the change, the effect executed as the change notice effect (for example, a predetermined cut-in display or a specific character It is possible to provide a correlation related to the development of the production (or the big hit) based on the base (which can be said to be a base or a base point).

In addition to the above, the color of the variation information display 198 in the variation information display section 195 (FIGS. 8(a) and (b)) is changed as the variation notice effect performed before the button operation effective period. I can give an example. In this case, before the button operation effective period, the variation information display 198 is displayed in a giraffe pattern (displayed in a high-expectation mode) rather than in a red or reddish color. ), when a repeated hitting operation (here, an automatic repeated hitting operation) is performed, the automatic repeated hitting effect in the high expectation mode is performed at a higher rate. After that, in the same manner as described above, the ratio of SP reach development (or big win) is higher when the auto repeated hitting performance becomes the performance of the high expectation mode than when it is not.

In addition, not limited to this, if the change notice effect (here, notice by coloring of the change information display 198) is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, red or red), to SP reach after auto repeated operation It is also possible to produce an effect in such a manner that the development is confirmed. In this case, compared to the case where the change notice effect is performed in other colors (for example, blue, blue, yellow, yellow, green, green, etc.), the display of the high expectation mode related to reach development will be.

Furthermore, not only the degree of expectation of reach development (expected degree of reach development), but also the degree of expectation of big hits regarding the performance after the automatic continuous hitting operation can be varied depending on the difference in the change notice performance. For example, if the change notice effect is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, a giraffe pattern), it will be a big hit at a rate close to 100%, and if it is performed with a red or red effect display, it will be at a rate of 60%. It is possible to produce an effect in such a manner that the game becomes a big hit. When the degree of expectation for a big win is set in this way, it can be said that the giraffe-patterned effect display is a presentation with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the effect display of red or the like.
<<Relationship between the look-ahead effect, which is the pre-stage effect, and the auto repeated effect>>

6. Further, in addition to the above-described various relationships between the variable advance notice effect and the subsequent auto repeated hit effect, it is possible to add a relationship with other effects. For example, it is possible to define the relationship between the pending look-ahead effect and the change (variation performed as the change) when the hold that was the target of the look-ahead is digested.

FIG. 30(a) schematically shows the flow of a series of effects (relationship between the auto-repeat function and the pre-reading notice effect) when reaching the change in which the automatic repeated hitting effect is performed after going through the pre-reading notice effect. is exemplified. Note that the description here is based on the specific example of the automatic continuous hitting operation shown in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 30( a ), the pending pre-reading notice is started at the change two times before, targeting the change (the change) in which the automatic repeated hit effect is performed. Here, the change when the hold that was the target of the prefetch becomes the target of digestion (when it becomes the change) can be referred to as a "target change" or the like.

For example, as a hold change that is a hold look-ahead effect, a blue hold change is performed, and after that, in the change (target change) when the hold changed to blue is digested, the change notice effect (here, the change information Let us consider a case where the advance notice by the coloring of the display 198 is blue, and a blue or blue-based coloring effect (here, the above-described effect display) is performed in the continuous hitting effect in the variation. As described above, blue and blue effects can be used as effects with relatively low reach development expectations and big hit expectations. Such an effect can be called a weak effect, for example. Then, regarding the effect mode in which both the pending look-ahead effect and the variable notice effect (here, the notice by coloring of the change information display 198) are blue or blue, for example, the effect from weak effect to weak effect can be called

Also, as a hold change which is a hold look-ahead effect, a hold change of blue color is performed in the same way, but in the subsequent change notice effect (here, change notice by coloring of the change information display 198), it is assumed that the change becomes red. The production of red or red color (or the production of giraffe pattern more than that) is a production with relatively high reach development expectation and big hit expectation, and such production is called a strong production. Is possible. Then, the effect mode of blue or blue in the pending look-ahead effect and red or red in the change notice effect can be called, for example, a weak effect to a strong effect.

In addition, it can be said that the effect from the weak effect to the weak effect is such that the look-ahead effect is the weak effect and the target change is also the weak effect. Further, unlike this, with regard to the effect from the weak effect to the strong effect, it can be said that the look-ahead effect is the weak effect and the target change is the strong effect. In the above-described example, a notice by coloring the change information display 198 is shown as the variable notice effect, but the change notice effect is a line notice (a weak effect corresponds to a white line notice, and a strong effect corresponds to a red line notice). Also good. In that case, the production from weak to weak production is the production that is blue in the pre-reading production and the white dialogue as the change notice production, and the production from weak to strong production is the pre-reading production. It is a production with a red line as the change notice production with blue reserved. Furthermore, unlike this, for the effect from the strong effect to the weak effect, for example, a red pending change is performed as a pending change that is a pending look-ahead effect, and then when the red pending change is digested In the variation (target variation) of (target variation), when a white line announcement is executed as the variation announcement effect, it can be said that the look-ahead effect is a strong effect and the target change is a weak effect. Also, with regard to the auto repeated hit effect, it can be said that blue and blue effects are weak effects with relatively low reach development expectations and big hit expectations, and red and red (or more giraffe patterns) production, etc.) can be said to be a strong production.

Then, in the case where the pending look-ahead effect and the automatic repeated hitting effect to be executed after that are to have a correlation related to the development of the effect (or the big hit), even if the pending look-ahead effect is a weak effect, If the change notice effect is a strong effect, it is possible to determine the selection ratio of various effects (relationship between weak, strong, and high) so that the auto repeated hit effect is likely to be in a high expectation mode.

Also, unlike this, if the pending look-ahead effect is a strong effect, even if the change notice effect is a weak effect, the selection ratio of various effects is determined so that the automatic repeated hit effect is likely to be in a high expectation mode. It is possible to keep (strong/weak/high relationship). Furthermore, if both the pending look-ahead effect and the variable advance notice effect are weak effects, it is difficult for the auto repeated hit effect to become a high expectation mode (weak/weak/high relationship), and if both are strong effects, relative It is also possible to set the auto repeated hit effect to a high expectation mode at a relatively high rate (80% or more) , and the auto repeated hit effect is more likely to be in a high expectation mode than when only one of the pending look-ahead effect and the variable advance notice effect is a strong effect). Here, the high-expectation mode effect related to the automatic repeated-hit effect can also be referred to as a strong effect related to the automatic repeated-hit effect.

In addition, although the pending prefetch effect is taken as an example of the prefetch effect here, it is possible to employ other types of prefetch effects without being limited to this. For example, the above-mentioned continuous notice (here, a genuine one) is adopted as a look-ahead effect, and the contents of the continuous notice and effect display (this effect display is an effect display displayed as a genuine continuous notice, for example, the screen It is an effect display that is displayed small in the four corners, and is different from the effect display in the continuous hitting effect). Further, the genuine continuous notice may be simply referred to as a look-ahead continuous notice, and the pseudo continuous notice may be simply referred to as a pseudo continuous notice (pseudo continuous effect, pseudo continuous effect).

Here, in the previous <<Relationship between the automatic repeated hit effect as the back button effect and the subsequent effect>>, as an example of a series of effects, it is possible to develop from the normal reach to the first half of the SP reach, and to the first half of the SP reach. There is a back button, and I explained the production that it can be further developed from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. With regard to such effects as well, it is possible to create sounds that apply the above-described “weak/weak/high” relationship. In other words, selection of various effects so that the pending look-ahead effect is a weak effect, the change notice effect before reach or normal reach is a weak effect, and the automatic repeated hit effect in the first half of the SP reach is likely to be in a high expectation mode. It is possible to set a percentage.

Subsequently, similarly, it is possible to determine the tendency of effect selection based on the look-ahead effect with respect to the relationship between the look-ahead effect, the change notice effect, and the auto repeated effect. For example, depending on the type of pending look-ahead effect, it is possible to vary the ratio of the auto repeated hit effect to the high expectation mode effect. Then, if the pending look-ahead effect is a weak effect, it is difficult for the automatic repeated hit effect in the target change to be performed in a high expectation mode (weak/low relationship), and if the pending look-ahead effect is a strong effect, the repeated hit effect in the target change. It is possible to predetermine the selection ratios of both presentations so that is likely to be performed in a high-expectation mode (relationship between strong and strong).

Furthermore, even when the look-ahead effect is used as a reference, it is possible to change the tendency of the automatic continuous hitting effect in combination with the variable advance notice effect. For example, if the pre-reading notice effect is a weak effect, even if the variable notice effect is a weak effect or a strong effect, the ratio of the auto repeated hit effect to the high expectation mode is relatively low. , it is possible to predetermine the selection ratio of various effects (relationship between weak, unquestioned, and high). In this case, it is preferable that the variation pattern in the target variation is a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern that is scheduled to develop into a specific SP ready-to-win effect (the above-described effect C) with a variation time of 30 seconds or more). is.

Also, unlike this, if the look-ahead notice effect is a strong effect, whether the variable notice effect is a weak effect or a strong effect, the ratio of the auto repeated hit effect to the high expectation mode is relatively high. It is also possible to set selection ratios of various effects so as to increase (relationship between strong, unquestioned, and high).

However, not limited to these, for example, when the look-ahead preview effect is a weak effect, the auto repeated hit effect is more likely to be a strong effect than the variable preview effect is a weak effect. It is possible to determine the selection ratio of various effects so that the proportion of the mode becomes relatively high (relationship of weak/strong advantage/relatively high).

Also, unlike this, for example, when the look-ahead notice effect is a strong effect, the auto repeated hit effect is in a high expectation mode when the change notice effect is a strong effect rather than when the change notice effect is a weak effect. It is also possible to determine the selection ratio of various effects so that the ratio of .
<<An example of an indicator effect combined with an auto repeated effect>>

7. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the auto repeated hitting function and the above-described indicator display (indicator display) function. The indicator display is the remaining time of the button operation valid period related to the operation button 22, the amount of repeated hits that is the degree of repeated hits, or the duration of long press. It is a production (indicator production) that can express the conceptual increase or decrease of the amount. In each form of use, the display mode is different, instead of giving multiple roles to the same indicator (for example, one indicator display can indicate the remaining time of the button operation valid period, Rather than showing both), it is preferable to have a dedicated indicator display for each usage. In addition, when the indicator effect is used as a continuous hit effect, it is possible to adopt various modes, such as a mode that accurately represents the number of repeated hits, and a mode in which the amount of repeated hits increases at a constant rate if repeated hits are detected. .

FIGS. 32(a) to 32(d) show an example of an indicator effect in the case of indicating the amount of continuous pressing of the operation button. In this indicator effect, the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 (combined display). Here, the effect by combining the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 in this way can be called a button effect with the indicator image 402, an indicator effect with the button image 401, or the like.

The indicator image 402 (in this case, the operation amount indicator image indicating the amount of repeated hits) is displayed within a predetermined indicator image display area, and is displayed in combination with the button image displayed in the button image display area vertically. It is The indicator image 402 is displayed in the form of a horizontally long band below the operation button image (button image) 401, and has a meter section 403 inside. At the time when the indicator image 402 starts to be displayed, the entire meter section 403 is displayed in a predetermined color (eg, black) to indicate an empty state (see FIG. 32(a)).

In the empty state shown in FIG. 32(a), a guide display such as "Hit repeatedly" is displayed, the effective period of repeated hits is started, and when the player performs repeated hits, as time elapses, the As shown in 32(d), the amount of repeated hits is displayed in a predetermined color (eg, green) as indicated by hatching. The number of repeated hits is displayed in such a manner that the tip gradually moves continuously from the left end to the right end in the drawing. Then, when the area of the repeated hitting amount display gradually increases and reaches the right end as shown in FIG. 32(d), it indicates that the repeated hitting amount has reached full.

Here, FIG. 32 exemplifies states in which the amount of consecutive hits is 20%, 50%, and 100% of the total in order of (a) to (d). It is not always necessary to display the amount of repeated hits in accordance with the change in the actual amount of repeated hits. For example, the amount of repeated hits increases at a certain high speed from the beginning to the middle of the change in the amount of repeated hits, but in the final stage, the rate of increase in the amount of repeated hits slows down and it is difficult to reach the full amount. It is also possible to perform an effect such as fueling the expectation that the will be full. In addition, if it is a hit or a high expectation fluctuation (variation such that the SP reach production C is executed), the amount of repeated hits will be full (full), but if it is lost or a low expectation fluctuation ( If the variation is such that the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed, or the variation is such that the SP ready-to-win effect A is executed), the repeated hit amount will not be full. In other words, the amount of repeated hits is the apparent amount of repeated hits, and does not increase corresponding to the actual amount of repeated hits. take.

Also, the indicators are not limited to those shown in FIGS. For example, by gradually increasing (or decreasing) the number of patterns in an animal pattern such as a giraffe pattern, a leopard pattern, and a zebra pattern, which are composed of a large number of patterns, as the amount of repeated strokes increases (or decreased), the sense of the amount of repeated strokes is played. It is conceivable to make it possible to give to people. It is also possible to use, for example, a change in the number of animal footprints as a scale display to notify the amount of repeated strokes.

Also, the above-described indicator effect is provided as part of the effect when showing the result of the winning lottery to the player. The effect for showing the result of the lottery to the player can be called, for example, "lottery result notification effect", and the indicator effect used for the lottery result notification effect It can be called "notification-related indicator effect" or the like.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, in the case of performing an effect in which the amount of indication increases as the number of repeated hits of the operation button 22 increases, the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed is detected, and the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed is increased. It is possible to increase the instruction amount according to the pace. However, it is not limited to this, and it is possible to increase the indicated amount at a predetermined pace assuming actual repeated hits while repeated hits are being detected.

Furthermore, in such a case, for example, at the end of the indicated amount increase, the speed of increase slows down and the maximum amount (full tank) is not easily reached. Is possible. Also, it is possible to perform an effect such that although the indicated amount increases, the tank does not reach full tank and the indicator effect ends.

Then, when the tank is full, it is conceivable that the degree of expectation for reach development and big win is higher than when the tank is not full. In addition, compared to the case where the indicator presentation ends with the increase amount being relatively small, when the indicator presentation ends when the tank is full or relatively full, the reach development and the big win are more expected. It is conceivable to

It is also possible to use such an indicator effect as an effect representing the amount of repeated hits related to automatic repeated hits. Here, in FIGS. 32(a) to (d), the indicator image 402 exemplifies an effect representing an increase in the instruction amount (here, time). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to perform an effect that represents an indication amount that can change, such as the remaining time.
<< Diversification of the relationship between the automatic continuous hit effect and the indicator effect related to the notification of the lottery result >>

8. Next, as for the indicator effect, it is possible to determine the relationship with the automatic repeated hitting effect other than the above. First, the button image 401 accompanied by the indicator image 402 is displayed in the repeated hitting effect (here, the effect before repeated hitting). Then, when the automatic repeated hitting operation is performed and the transition is made to the automatic repeated hitting effect, as described above, the indicated amount of the indicator increases as the elapsed time of the automatic repeated hitting effect increases. However, as described above, the indicator display that indicates the amount of repeated hits (display of the operation amount indicator) should be different from the indicator display that indicates the elapsed time (display of the remaining time indicator). ), and it is desirable to simultaneously display the indicator display indicating the amount of repeated hits and the indicator display indicating the elapsed time. In this case, it is preferable that the indicator display indicating the amount of repeated hits is displayed at a position farther from the button image than the indicator display indicating the elapsed time, and the indicator display indicating the amount of repeated hits is preferably displayed at a position farther from the button image than the indicator display indicating the elapsed time. Also, a large display area is desirable.

Furthermore, in the auto repeated effect, a plurality of types of effect display execution periods are provided. The execution period of the effect display referred to here is not the blinking cycle (length of one cycle) of the bright image 404 but the length of the period (duration) during which the bright image 404 blinks repeatedly. Then, when the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed, any length of the repeated hitting effect is selected.

Furthermore, even if the types of automatic repeated hit effects are different, it is possible to use (share) the indicator image 402 in the same (common) display mode (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time). . The "same (common) display mode" as used herein can be exemplified by those having exactly the same (identical) appearance and size, or those having the same appearance but different sizes. In this case, even if the types of automatic repeated hit effects are different, both the button image and the indicator image are the same in appearance and size, or the button image and the indicator image are the same in appearance but different in size. Become. Here, there are multiple types of automatic repeated effects, and the second automatic repeated effects (for example, during the reach in the high base state) are more important than the first automatic repeated effects (for example, the effect that occurs before the reach in the low base state). Even if the button operation effective period is longer (for example, the former is 5 seconds and the latter is 10 seconds), the same indicator image is used (also used) as described above. Therefore, the speed of increase and decrease of the indicated amount (remaining time) in the indicator image is made different. do. By doing so, it is possible to perform an indicator effect that expresses the difference in types depending on the speed of increase and decrease (change speed) of the indicated amount (remaining time). In addition, the button image 401 is designed so that it can be recognized whether the button is being pressed correctly depending on whether the repeated hitting operation (automatic repeated hitting operation or normal repeated hitting operation) is performed and when the repeated hitting operation is not performed. , it is desirable to configure the display mode to be different (for example, it is red during repeated hits and blue during non-repeat operations). Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator image that indicates the elapsed time.

Moreover, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" is not limited to exactly the same one, and can include, for example, equivalent ones. Equivalent objects include, for example, objects that are similar in appearance and objects that can be said to be similar as a whole, although they cannot be said to be exactly the same.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned "same (common) display mode" may include, for example, the button image 401 being the same but the indicator image 402 being different. Also, both the button image and the indicator image (or one of them) can be used in both the automatic repeated-hit effect and the normal repeated-hit effect. Furthermore, both the button image and the indicator image (or one of them) can be used for both the continuous hit effect and the other button effect (single-shot effect or long-press effect).

In addition to this, an indicator image 402 (this indicator image is an indicator display indicating the elapsed time) is displayed in combination with the button image 401 during the normal continuous-hit effect, but the indicator image 402 is displayed during the automatic continuous-hit effect. It is also possible to perform an effect such as not displaying. Furthermore, the indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 only during the single-shot effect (or only during the long-press effect), but it is possible to perform such effect that the indicator image 402 is not displayed during the continuous-hit effect. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator image that indicates the elapsed time.

Next, the following can be given as a more specific example of the effect related to the automatic continuous hitting effect using the indicator effect. For example, as an automatic repeated hit effect, an indicator image 402 is displayed in combination with the button image 401 as shown in FIG. 33(a). Further, when the player performs the automatic repeated hitting operation, the button image 401 performs an automatic repeated hitting effect (blinking of the bright image 404 shown in FIG. 31(b), etc.) increase. Then, when the number of times the operation button 22 is pressed reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, ten times), the display of the indicator image 402 becomes full, and both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased. Further, for example, it is also possible to erase the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 when winning the effect lottery related to the indicator display. Concretely, it is conceivable to draw a lottery to determine whether or not the tank is full each time the button is pressed, and to erase the image if the lottery is won. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display that indicates the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Here, the time at which both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are erased is not limited to when the tank is full. It is possible to set a plurality of times such as . An example of erasing the indicator image 402 and the like at a plurality of times will be described later. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display that indicates the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Further, for example, it is also possible to erase the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 when winning the effect lottery related to the indicator display. Concretely, it is conceivable to draw a lottery to determine whether or not the tank is full each time the button is pressed, and to erase the image if the lottery is won. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display that indicates the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator indicating the remaining time at the same timing.

Thereafter, although illustration is omitted, an image (lever image) that schematically represents the aforementioned lever L (FIG. 21(b)) is shown on the screen of the effect display device 60 to the player. Appears with a display prompting an operation (for example, a text display such as "pull the lever"). When the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pulls forward) on the lever L through such a lever effect, a predetermined cut-in effect is performed, and the normal reach progresses to the SP reach, or There is a continuation of SP reach (that is, development from the first half of SP reach to the latter half of SP reach).

Here, when the continuation of the SP reach as described above is performed, the production up to the lever production is called the SP reach first half production (or "SP reach front production" etc.), and the production after that is the SP reach latter half production ( Alternatively, it can be referred to as "effect after SP reach", etc.). Then, in the SP ready-to-win latter half effect, it is possible not to execute the back button effect that is related to the repeated hitting effect. Alternatively, in the first half of the SP reach effect, the back button effect as described above is adopted (the back button effect related to the repeated hit effect can be executed), that is, an effect display that can progress step by step as the repeated hit effect is displayed. It suggests the feasibility of subsequent effects (results after repeated hits effects, here SP reach latter half effects) and/or execution details when subsequent effects are executed, but in the SP reach latter half effects such repeated hits Instead of executing a back button effect that is related to the effect, a single operation effect or a continuous hit operation effect as a front button effect is performed, and the effect that occurs in the front button effect (post-operation effect in the front button effect) It may be configured so as to be able to notify a big hit or a loss. Furthermore, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for the development of reach and the degree of expectation for big hit according to the performance result of the automatic repeated hitting performance as the back button performance.

Moreover, as described above, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which both the indicator image 402 and the button image 401 are deleted. In this case, it is conceivable to change the development of the performance and the degree of expectation for the big win depending on the timing of erasure of the indicator image 402 and the like. For example, when the indicator image 402 or the like is erased, the closer the indicated amount display is to the full tank (the higher the indicated amount), the higher the expectations for development of the performance and the big win. It is possible. Note that the indicator image described here is an indicator display that indicates the amount of repeated hits. However, if the indicator indicating the remaining time is also displayed, it is desirable to erase the indicator indicating the remaining time at the same timing.
<<Relationship between auto repeated hit effect and environment setting related indicator effect>>
<<<Basic matters related to volume control and light intensity control>>>

9. Subsequently, it is also possible to determine the relationship between the auto repeated hit effect and the indicator effect provided separately from the above-described indicator effect. As described above, the indicator effect displayed along with the button effect related to the notification of the result of the lottery can be called the "lottery result notification-related indicator effect" or the like. However, for example, indicators are also displayed in environment settings such as volume control (sound volume control) and light amount control (light amount adjustment).

It can be said that the display of such an indicator is an indicator effect used for setting the environment, unlike the indicator effect related to the notification of the result of the lottery. Such an indicator effect related to the environment setting can be called, for example, an "environment setting related indicator effect".

Specifically, the environment setting-related indicator effects include a volume control indicator effect, which is an indicator effect for volume adjustment, and a light amount adjustment indicator effect, which is an indicator effect for light amount adjustment. The term "light amount adjustment" is used in the same sense as "brightness adjustment", and with respect to the explanation of the pachinko game machine 10 of the present embodiment, "light amount adjustment" can be replaced with "brightness adjustment". .

FIG. 34(a) shows an example of display during volume adjustment (volume adjustment screen display), and FIG. 34(b) shows an example of display during light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment screen display). Such displays related to environment settings can be regarded as presentations from the viewpoint of presenting them to the player. For this reason, hereinafter, the display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level will be referred to as "volume adjustment effect", and the display for adjusting the amount of light and indicating the currently set light amount level is referred to as "light amount adjustment effect". In addition, a display for adjusting the volume and indicating the currently set volume level is called a "volume adjustment display", and a display for adjusting the amount of light and indicating the currently set amount of light. The display can also be referred to as a "light intensity adjustment display".

The volume adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(a) and the light quantity adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(b) are superimposed on other effects and displayed on the effect display device 60, for example. Further, the volume control effect and the light amount control effect are basically performed during a variable waiting period in which the start of fluctuation related to the effect patterns 190a to 190c and the like, and a variable effect related to the effect patterns 190a to 190c and the like are performed. It can be displayed during change. Therefore, the volume control effect and the light amount control effect are superimposed on at least the changing effect pattern and the stopped effect pattern. In addition, it is superimposed and displayed with the above-mentioned change notice effect (speech notice, step-up notice). In such a case, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect have a higher display priority than the effect pattern and the change notice effect (displayed on the front side). However, there are exceptions among them. The effect pattern is not superimposed on the sound volume control effect or the light intensity control effect.

Here, "waiting for variation" can be said to be a state in which the special symbols and performance symbols are not varying. Furthermore, the variable standby state can also be referred to as a variable stop state (determined stop state) or a variable stop state (determined stop state). The fact that the game is not in progress can be notified by the display during the variable standby (the screen display in the state where the decorative pattern is stopped and the pending display (holding image) does not exist) or the like.

In addition, it can be said that “variable waiting” is a kind of game waiting state among gaming machine states. In addition to "waiting for a game," the game standby state includes a demo screen (customer waiting demo), an adjustment screen (environment settings are being displayed), an initialization notification, a predetermined abnormality notification, etc. can be included. Of these, during a predetermined error notification, if the error is canceled, the control state of the game machine can be restored to the normal state without turning on the power again (sometimes referred to as a "recoverable error"). possible).

It is also possible to display both the sound volume control effect and the light amount control effect during the customer waiting demo (standby demo) described above. During the customer waiting demonstration, a moving image (waiting movie) is displayed to the player to indicate that there is no change. By displaying this standby movie, it is possible to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 10 is a so-called empty table and that a game can be played. While the waiting movie is being displayed, the first decorative pattern, which will be described later, is not displayed, but the second decorative pattern, which will be described later, can be displayed. Alternatively, neither the first decorative design nor the second decorative design may be displayed. The waiting moopy during this customer waiting demonstration can be displayed in both the non-electrical support state and the electric support state, and in the electric support state, the waiting moopy and the right-handed effect can be displayed in a superimposed manner. (The right-handed effect has a higher display priority and is displayed in the front), so even during the customer waiting demonstration, the current game state can be confirmed by checking the right-handed effect. The state can be recognized without looking at the fluctuation state of the first decorative pattern (the fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-electrical support state because it is also in the time saving state during the electric power support state).

Although not shown, during the customer waiting demonstration, the image of the volume control effect and the image of the light amount control effect can be displayed side by side in a row even without the operation of the cross key 96, which will be described later. (Conversely, when the cross key 96 is operated during the fluctuation or during the fluctuation standby, the non-display image of the volume adjustment effect and the image of the light amount adjustment effect are displayed). However, even during the customer waiting demonstration, if the cross key 96 is not operated, the image of the volume control effect and the image of the light amount control effect may be configured not to be displayed. Even if the four-way controller is operated during the demo, the customer waiting demo will not be canceled (the waiting movie will remain displayed), and the volume control will be displayed in front of the waiting movie during the customer waiting demo. A production image and a light amount adjustment production image are displayed (although they are superimposed on the standby movie, the display priority is higher than the standby movie). In addition to these, it is conceivable to display a selection menu screen (not shown) in which, for example, images of effects for selecting the aforementioned automatic button operation (automatic button operation setting effects) are arranged in a horizontal row. .
<<<Example of volume control effect>>>

First, the volume control effect shown in FIG. 34(a) is performed by pressing the volume button (left direction key 96c in this case) of the cross key 96 (FIG. 20(a)) or It is displayed when the right direction key 96d) is operated. As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the volume adjustment effect, a speaker mark 406 representing a speaker and a volume level mark 407 representing a volume level are displayed (volume level mark effect is being performed). Further, below the speaker mark 406, a cross key mark 408 representing a cross key is displayed, and below the cross key mark 408, characters of "volume control" are displayed.

In the cross key mark 408, portions corresponding to the left direction key 96c (Fig. 20(a)) and the right direction key 96d (also shown in Fig. 20(a)) used to increase or decrease the volume are highlighted by a method such as inversion display. is displayed. Further, an operation button mark 409 representing an operation button is displayed below the volume level mark 407, and below the operation button mark 409 is displayed the characters "end" indicating the end of volume setting. there is

In the example of volume adjustment display in FIG. 34(a), the volume level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and among the plurality of arcs of the mark 407 representing the volume level, only the leftmost arc is colored brightly. is highlighted in . In the example of FIG. 34(a), the outline of the leftmost circular arc is drawn with a thick line to indicate that the display is reversed.

When the right direction key 96d is pressed once in this state, the sound volume level becomes level 2, the mark on the right side is also highlighted (not shown), and the number of highlighted marks becomes two. At this time, the sound output from the speaker 21 of the pachinko game machine 10 increases according to the change in volume level, and the volume increases. Further, when the right direction key 96d is pressed once, the sound volume level becomes level 3, and the number of the marks to be highlighted becomes three.

Conversely, even if the left direction key 96c is pressed once from the volume level (level 1) state shown in FIG. Further, for example, when the volume level is level 2 or higher, pressing the left direction key 96c reduces the volume level up to level 1 according to the number of times the key is pressed. Also, in this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the sound volume level is 5, and the sound volume can be adjusted in 5 steps.

Furthermore, when the volume level is 5, even if the right direction key 96d is pressed once, the volume level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the right direction key 96d is pressed once when the sound volume level is level 5, the light amount level may drop to the minimum level 1 at once.

In this embodiment, the sound volume level is always the same value (here, level 1, which is the lowest level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on. In other words, no matter what the sound volume level is before the power is turned off, when the power is turned off and then turned on, the volume level is always set to the predetermined value. The volume level (default volume level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is configured to differ according to the setting of the gaming machine back volume volume 416, as will be described later. Furthermore, if the volume level is changed, the volume adjustment is terminated, and the volume is adjusted again, the adjustment is started from the previous volume level stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or the sub-sub-board 302) at the time of termination. It is possible.

Here, the value of the volume level in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, but is always the same value such as the middle level (here, level 3) or the highest level (here, level 5). You may make it become. It is also possible to back up volume level information at the time of power failure so that when power is turned on without initialization, adjustment can be started from the backed up volume level.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume adjustment function by the left direction key 96c and the right direction key 96d is enabled while the volume control effect is being displayed. Then, when the operation for adjusting the volume is not input while the volume control effect is displayed and a predetermined time elapses, the volume control effect is erased. Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed while the volume adjustment effect is being displayed, the volume control may be terminated and the volume control effect may be erased.
<<<An example of light intensity adjustment effect>>>

Subsequently, the light intensity adjustment effect shown in FIG. 34(b) is performed during the variable standby or during variation, the light intensity button (here, the up key 96a or the down arrow) of the cross key 96 (FIG. 20(a)). It is displayed when the direction key 96b) is operated. In the light amount adjustment shown in FIG. 34(b), a light amount level mark 411 representing the light amount level is displayed (light amount level mark rendering is performed). Further, a cross key mark 412 representing a cross key is displayed below the light level mark 411 (lower left in the figure), and below the cross key mark 412 is displayed the characters "light amount adjustment". ing.

In the cross key mark 412 described above, portions corresponding to the up key 96a and the down key 96b used to increase/decrease the amount of light are highlighted by a method such as reverse display. An operation button mark 409 representing an operation button is displayed below the light amount level mark 411 (lower right in the drawing), and below the operation button mark 409 is displayed "End" signifying the end of volume setting. ” is displayed.

In the display example of the light amount adjustment in FIG. 34B, the light amount level is the minimum (MIN) level 1, and the entire light amount level mark 411 is highlighted in bright color. When the upward direction key 96a is pressed once in this state, although not shown, the light amount level becomes level 2, and the light amount level mark 411 is displayed brighter.

On the contrary, even if the downward direction key 96b is pressed once from the state of the light amount level (level 1) shown in FIG. Further, for example, when the downward direction key 96b is pressed when the light intensity level is level 2 or 3, the volume level is reduced to level 1 at maximum according to the number of times the key is pressed. In this embodiment, the maximum value (MAX) of the light quantity level is 3, and the light quantity can be adjusted in three steps. Also, in this embodiment, the light amount adjustment function using the up key 96a and the down key 96b is enabled while the light amount adjustment menu shown in FIG. 34(b) is displayed.

Furthermore, when the light amount level is 3, even if the upward direction key 96a is pressed once, the light amount level does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the upward direction key 96a is pressed once when the light amount level is 3, the light amount level may drop to the minimum level 1 at once.

In this embodiment, the light amount level is always the same value (here, level 1, which is the lowest level) in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on. That is, regardless of the light amount level before power-off, when the power is subsequently turned off and then turned on, the value is always the predetermined value. Furthermore, when the light amount level is changed after the power is turned on and the light amount adjustment is completed, and the light amount adjustment is performed again, the previous light amount stored in the RWM of the sub-main board 301 (or sub-sub-board 302) Adjustment can be started from the level. Here, the value of the light amount level in the initial stage such as when the power is turned on is not limited to the lowest level, and may be, for example, the middle level (here level 2) or the highest level (here level 3).

In this embodiment, the function of adjusting the amount of light using the upward key 96a and the downward key 96b is valid while the effect of adjusting the amount of light is being displayed. Then, when the operation for light amount adjustment is not input while the light amount adjustment effect is displayed and a predetermined time elapses, the light amount adjustment effect is erased. Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed while the light amount adjustment effect is being displayed, the light amount adjustment may be terminated and the light amount adjustment effect may be erased.
<<<Relationship between effects related to environment settings and other basic display images>>>

FIGS. 35A and 35B are schematic representations of display examples in the case where the volume control effect and the light intensity control effect are performed during the fluctuation waiting period (here, during the fluctuation confirmation stop), extracting only the essential parts. exemplified. In addition, the variable standby state shown in FIGS. 35(a) and (b) is not a specific game situation such as a variable probability or a short time (during an electric sapo state), but a normal game state, which is a game situation that should be left-handed. It is. In the drawing, stopped performance symbols 190a to 190c before the start of variation are displayed.

Further, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), a reduced effect symbol display area 361 and a pending number display area 367 are also displayed. Of these, in the reduced production design display area 361, there is a production design (mini design) that is extremely small compared to the display mode of the production designs 190a to 190c so as to ensure the visibility related to the display state of the production designs 190a to 190. is displayed.

The display of the mini-symbols is performed in accordance with the variable display or stop display of the effect symbols 190a to 190c. By displaying such mini symbols, for example, even in a situation where the performance symbols 190a to 190c become transparent and cannot be visually recognized during variation, the performance symbols 190a to 190c are in the process of being varied. It is made possible for the player to recognize that.

In addition, in the reservation number display area 367, two very small one-digit numerical values are displayed side by side so that the visibility of the reservation number display according to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be secured. In the example shown in Figure 35 (a), (b), the number on the left indicates the number of reservations related to special figure 1 (here 0 pieces), the number on the left is the number of reservations related to special figure 2 (here 0). By displaying the number of reservations in the number of reservations display area 367 in this way, for example, the first number of reservations display unit 196 and the second number of reservations display unit 197 are rendered transparent and visible during fluctuation. Even in a situation where it is gone, the player can recognize the number of reservations related to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Here, FIGS. 35 (a) and (b) are examples of variable standby, no hold has occurred, the first hold number display unit 196, and the second hold number display unit 197 Not visible. However, in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), in order to facilitate the understanding of the following explanation as much as possible, the first pending number display section 196 and the second pending number display are virtually shown by two-dot chain lines. A portion 197 is shown.

In the display examples shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and (b), the display of the production patterns 190a to 190c, the display in the first pending number display section 196 and the second pending number display section 197, and the characters omitted from the illustration Display, etc. have the function of enhancing the interest of the presentation. These displays may be made transparent or reduced in size depending on the state of presentation, so that the player may not be able to see them.

On the other hand, the display in the reduced production design display area 361 and the reservation number display area 367 is related to the display of production designs 190a to 190c, and the display of the first reservation number display unit 196 and the second reservation number display unit 197 This is intended to ensure visibility. Then, the display of the reduced effect pattern display area 361 and the display of the pending number display area 367 are the display of the effect patterns 190a to 190c, and the display of the first pending number display unit 196 and the second pending number display unit 197. are functionally different.

Based on these distinctions, the production patterns 190a to 190c can be called, for example, "first decorative patterns", and the display in the reduced production design display area 361 can be called, for example, "second decorative patterns". be. Hereinafter, the terms "first decorative design" and "second decorative design" will be used as necessary.

The above-mentioned first decorative design and second decorative design can also be explained in more detail as follows. For example, the first decorative pattern is a decorative pattern that is displayed so that the player can easily see it. By providing the first decorative pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation during the fluctuation. In addition, the result of the game can be notified by displaying the first decorative symbol in a fixed and stopped state.

Then, the first decoration pattern makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that it is in the process of changing, that it is waiting for a change, the result of the winning lottery, and the like. In addition, the first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the production during the fluctuation. Furthermore, the result of the game can be notified by displaying the first decorative symbol in a fixed and stopped state.

Subsequently, the second decorative design can always represent the display state of the first decorative design (whether it is still being variably displayed or fixed and stopped), for example. That is, it has a role of indicating whether the special symbol is fluctuating or stopped. Also, unlike this, the second decorative pattern can be displayed only when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative pattern or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative pattern. It is. By constantly displaying the second decorative symbols, the result of the game can be notified by the fixed stop display.

Further, when the first decorative pattern is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed, and when the first decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the second decorative pattern is also fixed and stopped. It is possible to

Furthermore, the second decorative pattern can also be explained as follows. For example, the area of the individual display areas of the second decorative design (reduced production design display area 361 here) is the total area of the display areas of the first decorative design (individual display areas of the production designs 190a to 190c here). is smaller than

In addition, when the SP reach or the like is being executed, the first decorative pattern is hidden or displayed superimposed on the moving image in order to show the player a moving image such as an image showing the development of the story. (moving images have higher display priority and are displayed in the front), making them invisible or difficult to see. And even in such a case, in order to indicate that the special design is changing (that the current fluctuation has not ended yet), the second decorative pattern that continues to fluctuate is placed at the corner of the display screen, etc. to be displayed. In addition, the second decorative pattern is not designed to constantly fluctuate except for the fixed stop, so that the player can recognize information such as the ready-to-win state related to which production pattern 190a to 190c. , The second decorative pattern is displayed in the corner of the display screen in a ready-to-win state (a state in which the right and left patterns of the second decorative pattern are the same pattern and only the middle pattern continues to fluctuate). may be configured as follows.

Here, the display area for displaying the first decorative pattern can be called, for example, a "main area". Also, the display area for displaying the second decorative pattern can be called, for example, a "sub-area". In the case of such a name, it is possible to describe the sub-region as, for example, that the second decorative pattern is variably displayed or statically displayed within the sub-region.

Next, the relationship between the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern and the above-described sound volume control effect and light amount control effect will be described. First, in the examples of FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the sound volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect are superimposed on the first decoration pattern and displayed. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 35(a) and (b), layers such as the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and the story image and the character image displayed behind the first decorative pattern (not shown) are displayed. is translucent, and layers for volume control effect and light amount control effect are superimposed.

Here, if there is no situation such as insufficient visibility of the volume adjustment effect or the light amount adjustment effect, the translucency of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, etc. may not be performed. In addition, since it is not desirable to reduce visibility due to translucency, if we consider feasibility, we should not make the layer translucent, even during demonstrations waiting for customers. The display priority (display priority) of the adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect is relatively high (at least, the story image and character image displayed behind the first decorative pattern or the first decorative pattern not shown) etc.) and displayed in front. Furthermore, in this case, it is conceivable to further increase the display priority of the mini symbols (second decorative symbols) so that the player can always see them.

Moreover, it is not necessary to always display only one of the volume adjustment effect and the light quantity adjustment effect on the screen, and both can be displayed at the same time. In this case, it is possible to consider the mode and arrangement of each effect so that the volume control effect and the light quantity control effect do not conflict with each other in terms of display (not to be superimposed). Specifically, for example, by operating the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d, a volume adjustment effect is displayed, and during display (for example, until a predetermined time elapses from the start of display), the up cross key 96a or the down cross key By operating a key 96b, the light quantity adjustment effect is displayed simultaneously with the sound volume control effect. Then, it is conceivable that the previously displayed volume control effect is first hidden unless the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d is operated again.

In addition, while simplifying the image of the volume control effect and the light amount control effect, it is drawn in a single color (such as a bright fluorescent color) or in less colors than the colors used in the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and various By emphasizing the contrast with the colored first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern, etc., it is also possible to ensure the ability to distinguish between the volume control effect and the light intensity control effect.

Furthermore, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect may be displayed so as not to be superimposed on a part of the images of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern. For example, it is conceivable to display the volume control effect (or the light amount control effect) in such a positional relationship that it is superimposed on the first decorative pattern but not superimposed on the second decorative pattern. By doing so, it is possible to perform display such that superimposition with other displays is permitted except for the display (here, the second decorative pattern) whose visibility is particularly desired.

Also, although illustration is omitted, for example, regardless of the difference in the situation, such as during fluctuation, waiting for fluctuation (while fluctuation is stopped), and demonstrating waiting for customers, in any situation, in the same manner (same size, color, etc.) It is possible to display a volume control effect (or a light amount control effect). Furthermore, without being limited to this, it is also possible to display the sound volume adjustment effect (or the light amount adjustment effect) during the fluctuation in a smaller size than during the fluctuation standby (while the fluctuation is stopped). Here, as a specific mode for reducing the display, for example, the entire volume control effect (or light amount control effect) is simply reduced by a predetermined magnification while maintaining the similarity relationship. can.

In the case of the volume control effect, for example, the speaker mark 406, the volume level mark 407, the cross key mark 408, and the letters "volume control" are reduced by a predetermined magnification. In addition, in the case of the light amount adjustment effect, the light amount level mark 411, the cross key mark 412, the letters "light amount adjustment", etc. are reduced by a predetermined magnification.

Further, the reduction of the display is not limited to the example described above. For example, the volume adjustment effect can be performed by displaying only the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407, or by adding only the cross key mark 408 to this. It is also possible to Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the light amount adjustment effect by displaying only the light amount level mark 411 or by adding only the cross key mark 412 to this.

Also, when reducing the display, it is necessary to make sure that each figure during fluctuation and each figure waiting for change are not similar in shape. A shape is also possible. Furthermore, it is conceivable to arrange the reduced volume control effect (or light quantity control effect) so as not to overlap the second decorative pattern even during fluctuation. Also, it is conceivable to arrange the reduced volume control effect during fluctuation so as not to be superimposed on the second decorative design but to be superimposed on the first decorative design.

In addition, it is possible to make the reduced sound volume control effect (or light amount control effect) appear on the screen when the corresponding cross key 96 is operated in a situation where it is not displayed during fluctuation.
<<<Relationship between auto repeated hit effect and effect related to environment setting>>>

Next, in the volume adjustment effect (or light quantity adjustment effect), it is conceivable not to perform the indicator effect indicating the remaining time. For example, the display of the button image 401, the normal repeated hits effect, the automatic repeated hits effect, and the like are accompanied by an indicator display for indicating the operation valid period (displayed together). For example, it is conceivable not to display an indicator indicating the remaining time. In this case, indicator images (reference numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34A and 34B) indicating the volume level and the light intensity level are displayed, while the remaining time (adjustable time) related to the volume adjustment effect and the light intensity adjustment effect is displayed. is not displayed.

It is also conceivable not to display the indicator images (reference numerals 407 and 411 in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b)) indicating the volume level and the light amount level in the volume control effect (or the light amount control effect). That is, the display of the sound volume level mark 407 for the sound volume adjustment effect and the display of the light quantity level mark 411 for the light quantity adjustment effect, which have been described so far, have a function of indicating an increase or decrease in amount. Therefore, the display of the volume level mark 407 and the display of the light amount level mark 411 are a kind of indicator effects (environment setting related indicator effects), like the aforementioned lottery result notification related indicator effects. It is also possible to determine the relationship between such an environment setting-related indicator effect and the auto repeated hit effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 33(a), the button image 401 and the indicator image 402 are displayed in combination in the automatic repeated hit effect. It is conceivable to display images excluding the image corresponding to the indicator image of the continuous hit effect. In the volume control effect, a volume level mark image, which is the image of the volume level mark 407, can be exemplified as a display corresponding to the indicator image of the automatic repeated hitting effect.

FIG. 33(b) shows an example of a volume adjustment effect in which such a volume level mark image is omitted. In the example of FIG. 33(b), the volume adjustment effect is performed during fluctuation. Although the cross key mark 408, the speaker mark 406, and the characters "volume control" are displayed, the image of the volume level mark 407 shown in FIG. 34(a) is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the display area that is hidden by the volume control effect, and improve the visibility of the display other than the volume control effect. In addition, in the example of FIG. 33(a), the display of the operation button mark 409 and the like that were in FIG. 34(a) is also omitted. This makes it possible to further improve the visibility of displays other than the volume adjustment effect.

Further, for example, when the volume adjustment effect is displayed during a change in which the automatic continuous hit effect can be performed (during the change of the first decorative pattern, etc.), the volume level mark image (the volume level mark 407 image), etc., while the volume adjustment effect including the volume level mark image (the image of the volume level mark 407) etc. is displayed while the effect is stopped (during the fixed stop). It is also possible to think of a production mode such as

It can be said that the light amount level mark 411 in the above-described light amount adjustment effect (FIG. 34(b)) is also an indicator that indicates the light amount level by brightness. As for the light amount adjustment effect (FIG. 34(b)), it is possible to determine the relationship with the indicator effect, similarly to the sound volume control effect.

Also, it is conceivable to display only other images (such as the operation button mark 409) without displaying the light amount level mark 411. FIG. In this case, for example, normally, an image similar to the indicator image 402 (FIGS. 32B to 32D) of the button effect is displayed as a level meter display related to light amount adjustment. , it is conceivable that a light quantity level mark 411 as shown in FIG. 34(b) is displayed.
<<<Display priority related to effects related to environmental settings and other basic display images>>>

In addition, it is possible to determine the display priority (display priority) for the volume control effect, each display in the above-mentioned first decorative pattern (displays of the above-mentioned first decorative patterns), and the above-mentioned second decorative pattern. is. For example, from the highest display priority, second decorative pattern> volume control effect (and light amount control effect)> first decorative pattern> display of the first pending number display unit 196 (and display of the second pending number display unit 197 and display of the variation information display unit 195). Regarding the pending number display area 367 described above, it is possible to set the display priority to be the same as that of the second decorative design, or to be next to the second decorative design. In addition, the second decorative pattern, the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect), and the pending number display area 367 are not displayed in a superimposed manner, so they may have the same display priority (in that case, these display priorities may be , may be the highest display priority).

Here, the display priority indicates the superimposition priority (order of display from the front side of the screen) for each layer for displaying images and moving images displayed on the effect display device 60 . Determining such display priorities facilitates a configuration in which, when a plurality of images or moving images are superimposed and displayed, the player can easily selectively view the images or moving images. Here, the magnitude relationship of the display priorities is indicated by an inequality sign and an equal sign.

In addition, the above-mentioned display priority is replaced so that the display of the first decoration pattern <the display of the first reservation number display unit 196 (and the display of the second reservation number display unit 197 and the display of the variation information display unit 195) Is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as the volume adjustment effect.

So far, the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect in the normal game state have been explained. However, it is possible to perform volume adjustment effects and light intensity adjustment effects even in specific game situations such as during time saving (during electric sapo state) (similar to normal game state, it is possible to Even during the customer waiting demonstration, it is possible to perform volume control effects and light intensity control effects.) For example, in the case of time saving (during the electric sapo state), as described above, a right-handed production that encourages hitting to the right is performed. Along with the display of the number display unit 196, the display of the second pending number display unit 197, the display of the variation information display unit 195, the pending number display area 367, etc., it is possible to perform volume adjustment effect (or light amount adjustment effect) . In addition, in the normal game state, the display of the first reserved number display unit 196 (reserved display related to the first special symbol) is performed, while the display of the second reserved number display unit 197 (reserved display related to the second special symbol) Without performing, in the specific game state, the display of the second reserved number display unit 197 (holding display related to the second special symbol) is performed while the display of the first reserved number display unit 196 (holding display related to the first special symbol) may be configured not to perform When configured in such a manner, in both the normal game state and the specific game state, the reservation number display area 367 (display area for displaying the number of reservations related to the first special symbol and the number of reservations related to the second special symbol) may be configured to always be displayed.

The above-described right-handed effect can also be referred to as "right-handed instruction display" or "right-handed warning display". Furthermore, unlike this right-handed performance, it is possible to perform a performance that encourages the player to hit left-handed. Such an effect that encourages hitting to the left can be displayed in a situation where the player should switch from hitting to the left to hitting to the left, such as when the time is shortened (at the end of the non-electric support state). Such an effect that encourages a left-handed player can be called a "left-handed player's presentation," a "left-handed instruction display," or a "left-handed warning display."

The right hitting effect (right hitting warning display) and the left hitting effect (left hitting warning display) can be collectively called, for example, "hitting effect" or "hitting direction warning display". By performing such playing style effects (playing style warning display), it is possible to prompt the player to execute the recommended playing style in the game state at that time.

Then, the display priority when the volume adjustment effect is performed during time saving (non-electric support state) etc. is indicated by right-handed instruction display> second decorative pattern> volume control effect (and light amount adjustment effect)> first decorative pattern> second It is possible to display the 1 pending number display section 196 (and display the second pending number display section 197 and the display of the change information display section 195). In addition, since the second decorative pattern, the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect), and the pending number display area 367 are not displayed in a superimposed manner, the same display priority may be set (in that case, the highest display priority can also be used).

In addition, the above-mentioned display priority is replaced so that the display of the first decoration pattern <the display of the first reservation number display unit 196 (and the display of the second reservation number display unit 197 and the display of the variation information display unit 195) Is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to determine the display priority for the light amount adjustment effect as well as the volume adjustment effect.
<<Hide volume button image>>

10. Next, regarding the relationship between the button effect and the volume control effect, it is possible to change the relationship of the appearance timing of the effect. For example, except for a specific button effect such as a back button effect, the button operation (operation of the operation button 22) is performed after the button image 401 or the like appears, and depending on the effect pattern determined at that time, , Execution of production (change of production) triggered by button operation.

In contrast to such a button effect, in the volume control effect, the volume control effect is displayed only when an operation button that functions as a volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d is operated). is set to start. To put this another way, in the button effect, except for the case of the back button effect, the button operation is performed in the state where the button image 401 is displayed. The relationship between the button effect and the volume control effect is determined so that the button operation is performed when the mark 408) is not displayed.

Furthermore, in other words, in the button effect, the button image 401 is already displayed at the timing of the start of button operation, except for the case of the back button effect, but in the volume control effect, the button image 401 is already displayed at the timing of the button operation start (immediately before). ), the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) has not yet been displayed. To put it another way, the relationship between the button effect and the volume control effect is that the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is displayed at the same timing as the button image 401 in the button effect. It can be said that it is executed in a presentation mode that is relatively slow compared to the

By doing so, for example, display of a menu screen for enabling selection of volume adjustment from among a plurality of environment setting items, display indicating that the volume adjustment is valid (valid period display), etc. It is possible to immediately display the volume control effect without performing the preceding effect of volume control (previous effect of volume control) such as . In addition, it is possible to improve the speed of the operation for adjusting the volume.

Also, in determining the relationship as explained here, it is possible to employ different presentation modes during fluctuation and during fluctuation stop. For example, for the volume control effect during fluctuation, as described above, the display timing of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is relatively delayed compared to the display of the button image 401 in the button effect. However, as for the volume adjustment effect during fluctuation stop, the display of the button image (here, the cross key mark 408) is displayed before the button operation (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d). It is also possible to employ the effect mode to be started.

Up to this point, the environmental settings have been explained mainly for the volume adjustment effect, but this is for the following reasons. That is, in the pachinko game machine 10 of this embodiment, the left direction key 96c and the right direction key 96d among the cross keys 96 are provided exclusively for volume control. On the other hand, the upward direction key 96a and the downward direction key 96b may be used to select the stage of production (also called "production stage" or "production mode") in addition to the light amount adjustment described above. It has become.

Specifically, although illustration is omitted, when the up key 96a or the down key 96b is pressed in a predetermined situation related to the variable effect, a plurality of icon images (for example, 4 , etc.) are displayed. Then, each time the upward key 96a or the downward key 96b is pressed, the icon images are highlighted in sequence by a technique such as inversion display.

When, for example, the operation button 22 is pressed while the player's favorite icon is highlighted, the performance stage is determined, and the performance determined for the determined performance stage is developed during the game. . Such a change in production stage is sometimes called a "stage change" or a "step change". In addition, it is possible to change the production stage both during the fluctuation and during the stop of the fluctuation, or only one of them (for example, only during the stop of the fluctuation).

The production stage as described above can be a production mode indicated by a background image. For example, it has a background image A corresponding to the production stage A and a background image B corresponding to the production stage B, etc., the background image corresponding to the selected production stage is displayed, and the first display corresponding to the selected production stage is displayed. Decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern that combines character A and numbers for production stage A, and a decorative pattern that combines character B and numbers for production stage B) and the type of notice (for example, production stage In the case of stage A, a line advance notice can be generated but a step-up advance notice cannot be generated, and in the production stage B, a step-up advance notice can be generated but a line advance notice cannot be generated). Various productions can be performed.

In other words, among environmental setting items such as volume control and light intensity control, volume control is not affected by other selectable items (selectable items), and has a high degree of freedom regarding usage conditions. there is The environment setting items with such a high degree of freedom are determined as those with high speed of operation for adjustment, and before the operation of the assigned cross key 96 (here, the left direction key 96c and the right direction key 96d) , the volume control effect is not displayed.

On the other hand, regarding the light amount adjustment, the cross key 96 is also used for other selectable items (in this case, the production stage). . Here, it is also possible to distinguish by terms such as "first environment setting item" and "second environment setting item" based on the difference in degree of freedom of the environment setting items. For example, the volume adjustment with a high degree of freedom can be referred to as a first environment setting item, and the light intensity adjustment with a relatively low degree of freedom can be referred to as a second environment setting item. Here, the case of selecting the production stage with the up key 96a and the down key 96b has been shown, but in addition to this, the up key 96a and the down key 96b can be used to set custom production (for example, You may set whether to use the look-ahead effect or not, set the appearance rate of the line notice to be high, low, or intermediate between them), and the up key 96a and the down key 96a. BGM may be selected at 96b.

In addition, in the processing (power-off processing) when the power-off occurs when the degree of freedom of volume control is higher than that of light intensity adjustment in this way, the information related to the volume setting at that time (volume level before power-off) is stored. It is possible to configure such that the information is temporarily stored, but the information related to the setting of the light amount (the light amount level before the power is turned off) is not temporarily stored. Moreover, it is also possible to temporarily store any information without being limited to this.

In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in adjusting the amount of light rather than adjusting the volume, rather than increasing the degree of freedom in adjusting the volume. For example, the cross key 96 (here, the up key 96a and the down key 96b) is dedicated to light intensity adjustment, and the other cross keys 96 (here, the left key 96c and the right key 96d) are used for volume control. function (here, a stage change function for production) may also be used. In this way, there is no time limit for adjusting the amount of light, and the amount of light can be adjusted at all times, so that the light stimulus can be optimized at all times. And it becomes possible to further improve the epilepsy prevention effect.

In addition, in the processing (power-off processing) when the power failure occurs when the flexibility of the light intensity adjustment is increased more than the volume adjustment, information related to the setting of the light intensity at that time (the light intensity level before the power failure) is stored. It is possible to temporarily store the information, but not temporarily store the information related to the volume setting (the volume level before power-off). Moreover, it is also possible to temporarily store any information without being limited to this.

Furthermore, here, as a selectable item (selectable item) in which the cross key is also used for light amount adjustment (or volume adjustment), the production stage is exemplified, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set it as a possible item.
<< Diversification of the relationship between the auto continuous hit function and the single-shot function >>

11. Next, it is possible to consider diversification of the relationship between the auto-repeating function and the single-shot function. For example, as to the automatic continuous-hit valid period during which the automatic continuous-hit operation can be accepted, the period in the final stage is considered as shown in FIG. 36(a). A reference timing T1 (final timing) is defined as N seconds before the end of the automatic repeated hitting effective period. 0.5 seconds + continuation of pressing according to the second condition) is started, it is conceivable that it is not determined that the automatic continuous hitting operation has been performed. More specifically, when an operation that satisfies the time condition of the auto repeated hitting operation (for example, continued pressing for more than 0.5 seconds) is started after the reference timing T1 when N=0.45 (see FIG. 36). Even if the continuous pressing starts from the timing indicated by the arrow of "button pressing (more than 0.5 seconds)" in (a)), at the start of the operation, the subsequent production (for example, , the above-described effect display, etc.) are performed, but there is no automatic continuous hitting related to the continuation of the pressing thereafter. Note that this can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the period during which the front button effect is being performed In block), a button image is displayed to prompt the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated but also during and after the button is operated.

However, even after the above reference timing T1, as shown in FIG. If it is detected that the button is pressed continuously to the extent that it cannot be regarded as an intentional long press by the player, i.e., an operation of pressing and immediately releasing the button, the control processing of the CPU 521 performs a single operation. A determination is made that the More specifically, when a single operation is performed after the reference timing T1 when N=0.45, for example, when the single operation is performed at an interval of 0.2 seconds, the single operation can be performed three times. (Because it is possible three times, 0.45 seconds before, 0.25 seconds before, and 0.05 seconds before), the subsequent production according to the three single-shot operations (for example, the above-mentioned effect display three times, etc.) is done. This can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the period during which the front button effect is being performed In block), a button image is displayed to prompt the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated but also during and after the button is operated.

Also, it is possible to consider a case where the pressing operation of the operation button 22 is detected before the reference timing T1. As shown in FIG. 36(c), for example, for a button operation started before the reference timing T1, the period from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the end of the automatic continuous hit effective period During N + M seconds (M = the time from the button operation timing started before the reference timing T1 to the reference timing T1), the time condition of the auto repeated operation (for example, pressing for more than 0.5 seconds 36(a) and 36(b) (N=0.45 in this case as well). For this reason, with the button operation start timing as a reference, the timing at which the button operation continues for 0.5 seconds after that, and the timing at which the button operation continues for 0.2 seconds after that point are each treated as a single operation. Repeated hits are made (here, in FIG. 36(c), 0.5 seconds after the start of the time block of "press button (more than 0.5 seconds after T)", that is, 0.5 seconds after the start of continued pressing The figure shows that the time block of the "auto repeated hit effect" is started later). More specifically, for example, if the button operation start timing is 1.0 seconds before the end of the auto repeat effective period, the button operation start timing corresponds to the first single-shot operation (actual single-shot operation) (at this time point). 1.0 seconds until the auto repeated effective period ends), and the timing when the continuous pressing reaches 0.5 seconds is the second single-shot operation (not actually performing a single-shot operation, but it is a single-shot operation. (At this point, it is 0.5 seconds until the auto continuous hit valid period ends), and the timing after another 0.2 seconds of continued pressing is the third single-shot operation (actually single-shot (At this point, it is 0.3 seconds until the auto repeat valid period expires), and the continuation of pressing is further 0.2 from there. The timing after the elapse of seconds corresponds to the fourth single-shot operation (although the single-shot operation is not actually performed, it is regarded as a single-shot operation). 3 seconds), and after that, there is only 0.1 seconds until the auto repeat effective period ends, so even if the continuous pressing continues for another 0.2 seconds after that, it is outside the auto repeat valid period, so the auto repeat does not occur. (not considered to be single-shot operated). Note that this can be applied to both the front button effect and the back button effect, but in the front button effect, the period during which the front button effect is being performed In block), a button image is displayed to prompt the player to repeatedly press the button not only before the button is operated but also during and after the button is operated.

Furthermore, it is assumed that, during the final period of the automatic continuous hitting operation, the button has been pressed once, and then the button is pressed again (here, referred to as "subsequent button pressing"). If this subsequent button press is started during the final period, which is the remaining period of the auto repeat operation, it is determined that the subsequent button press is a single operation, and as described above, Subsequent production is performed according to the single-shot operation.

Here, with regard to the relationship between such an auto-repeat function and a single-shot function, for example, a long press of the operation button 22 is started within a predetermined period (here, a period of N seconds before) before the end of the auto-repeat valid period. However, it can be said that it is not detected as an auto repeated hit (at the start of the button operation, it is a single operation, but continuing to press it after that is not regarded as a repeated hit, that is, It is not regarded as a single-shot operation cumulatively with the lapse of continuous pressing time). On the other hand, if two single-presses are performed within a predetermined period (in this case, the period of N seconds before) before the end of the auto continuous-press effective period, it may be detected as an actual continuous-press. It can be said that there is

In other words, if two single-presses are performed within a predetermined period (in this case, the period N seconds before) before the end of the automatic continuous-press valid period, it may be detected as an actual continuous-press. However, it can be said that when the operation button 22 is pressed for a long time, it is not detected as a repeated hit.
<<Relationship between the auto continuous hit function and errors>>

12. Next, we can consider the relationship between the auto roll function and errors. For example, when a predetermined type of error (first error) occurs during the automatic continuous-hit effect, the automatic continuous-hit effect is not interrupted. However, when another predetermined type of error (second error) occurs, the automatic continuous hit effect is interrupted.

More specifically, the game machine frame 11 (for example, the front frame 13) is opened during the operation of the pachinko game machine 10 and the above-mentioned open signal is detected "door open error" or lower ball Regarding the tray 19, the "full tank detection error" detected based on the signal of the above-mentioned saucer full switch is regarded as the first error, and when these first errors occur, the automatic continuous hitting effect is continued. do. Here, the first error may be, for example, an error (recoverable error) that returns to a state in which the game can be played without turning off the power if the cause of the error is removed.

On the other hand, the "magnetic detection error", which is an error when the above-mentioned magnetic detection signal is detected by a magnetic sensor or the like, is regarded as a second error. It is assumed that the entire screen of the effect display device 60 is used to notify that an error has occurred (full-screen error notification).

Here, as the second error, a "radio wave detection error" is an error when the above-mentioned radio wave detection signal is detected by the radio wave sensor, and an error is " It is also possible to include in the second error such as "winning opening disconnection/short-circuit error" and "excess payout detection error" which is an error when detecting an abnormality in the number of entering balls. Furthermore, the second error may be, for example, an error (unrecoverable error) in which the game cannot be restored unless the power is turned off and then turned on again.

In this way, by interrupting the automatic continuous hit effect when the second error occurs, it is possible to make the most of the screen of the effect display device 60 and perform a large-scale error notification. As a large-scale error notification at this time, it is conceivable to display a black background on the entire screen and display only characters or graphics to notify that an error has occurred. The classification of errors is not limited to those described above. For example, a predetermined error such as a door opening error may be included in the second error, and when it occurs, the automatic continuous hit effect may be interrupted and the error may be notified. .

In addition, it is not limited to completely interrupting the automatic continuous hitting effect, but while continuing the automatic repeated hitting effect (without interrupting), superimposing the error notification image on the production image, or performing the automatic repeated hitting effect It is also possible to increase the transparency of the image to make it translucent and display an error notification image. In addition, by using a screen different from the screen of the display (display device) where the automatic continuous hit effect is being performed, error notification can be performed while continuing the automatic continuous hitting effect, or by voice while continuing the automatic repeated hitting effect. It is also possible to perform error notification. In particular, regardless of whether the error is the first or the second error, an error notification (output of an error sound and/or display of an error screen) is performed so as not to hinder the effect being executed. It is possible to continue to display the button image in the production (automatic continuous hitting production) (if an error sound is output depending on the error state (or error type) as an error notification, the error sound will be output. If the button image is displayed inside and the error screen is displayed as an error notification, the error screen and the button image are displayed at the same time). , the button image is displayed and the button operation is valid (the automatic repeated hit function is activated by long pressing) (the subsequent effect is executed by the repeated press operation), and if the second error is , the button image is displayed while the button operation is disabled (the automatic repeated hitting function by long pressing does not operate) (no subsequent effects are executed even if the repeated hitting operation is performed).
<< Parallel handling of the auto repeated tapping function and the environment setting function >>

13. Next, it is conceivable to have a parallel relationship between auto repeated hitting and environment setting. For example, if there is a button operation (here, the operation of the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d) relating to the volume control effect during the auto repeated effect, the volume control effect is started. In this case, it is conceivable to superimpose the volume adjustment effect on the image of the automatic repeated hitting effect (such as a button image or an effect display which is an effect executed after the repeated hitting operation). Furthermore, it is conceivable to increase the transparency (translucent) of the image of the auto repeated hit effect and highlight the volume control effect. Regardless of which configuration is adopted, the display priority of the sound volume adjustment effect is configured to be higher than the display priority of the image of the automatic repeated hitting effect.

Then, in this situation, if an operation of a button related to the volume control effect (here, an operation of the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d) is detected, the display mode of the volume level mark 407 according to the operation content is detected. or change the volume level. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect display that respects both the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect. Furthermore, it is possible to give priority to the volume control while respecting both the auto repeated hitting effect and the volume control effect.

In the auto repeated hitting effect, the same effect as if the repeated hitting operation was performed is executed without actually performing the repeated hitting operation. For this reason, it is considered that at least the player's left hand, which is the hand not operating the shooting handle 20 (handle operation), is free during the automatic repeated-hit effect, unlike during the normal repeated-hit effect. Then, it is possible to operate the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d using a free finger, and in preparation for such a situation, the volume adjustment effect is immediately displayed in parallel during the auto repeat effect. make it possible. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the control related to the auto repeated hit effect and the volume control effect. Note that the light amount adjustment effect may also have the same configuration as the volume adjustment effect, that is, the relationships and configurations as described above may be applied to the light amount adjustment effect.

14. Subsequently, in the situation where the volume adjustment effect (and/or the light amount adjustment effect) is executed in parallel with the automatic repeated effect as described above, the progress of the moving image related to the automatic repeated effect continues (is not interrupted or , is not interrupted). In other words, even if the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is displayed, it does not affect the progress of the auto repeated effect, and while emphasizing the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), the auto repeated effect is displayed. It is possible to perform a performance display that takes advantage of this.

Here, during the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect), it is possible to increase the transparency of the auto repeated effect as described above, but such a change in the automatic repeated effect does not affect the appearance. However, it can be said that it does not affect the progress of the production.

15. Subsequently, in the situation in which the automatic repeated hit effect and the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect) are progressed in parallel as described above, even if a further button operation (here, the operation of the operation button 22) is detected, It is conceivable that the display of the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is continued as it is and the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is not deleted. By doing so, the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect) can be prevented from being erased by the operation of repeatedly hitting the operation button 22 . Also, even if an operation for repeatedly pressing the operation button 22 is performed while the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is being displayed, the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) cannot be performed. ), it is erased (not displayed) after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of display.

Furthermore, if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation in this state, the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start of display (non display). Also, even if there is a volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation after the volume adjustment effect (and light amount adjustment effect) is displayed, if there is no volume adjustment (and light amount adjustment) operation after that, the volume is adjusted last. (and light intensity adjustment) may be erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds).

In order to make the automatic continuous hit effect and the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) progress in parallel, for example, the operation button 22 and the operation of the cross key 96 may be performed. More specifically, the processing related to the operation of the operation button 22 is performed in the aforementioned push button monitoring control processing (S266), and the processing related to the operation of the cross key 96 is performed in the device control data output processing (S263). can be considered.

The sub-main timer interrupt processing is repeated at predetermined intervals (here, 1 ms), unless interrupt prohibition processing is performed in the preceding stage. For this reason, by arranging a module for processing related to the operation of the operation button 22 and a module for processing related to the operation of the cross key 96 in series within the sub-main timer interrupt processing, the processing related to the automatic repeated hit effect can be achieved. , both of the processing relating to the volume adjustment effect (and the light quantity adjustment effect) can be reliably executed independently.

16. Next, it is possible to consider a situation in which the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect) is displayed first, and then the auto repeated hit effect is performed. In such a situation, the display of the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) continues, and even if the automatic repeated hit operation is performed and the automatic repeated hit effect is executed, the display of the volume control effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) is erased. It is possible to continue further without Also in this case, if there is no volume control (and light amount adjustment) operation, the volume control effect (and light amount control effect) will be displayed after the start of display, or after the last volume control operation. It can be cleared after a period of time (eg 3 seconds).

17. Next, it is conceivable that the volume adjustment effect (and the light amount adjustment effect) should have a higher display priority than the button image 401 and the auto repeated hit effect (subsequent effect that occurs when the button is pressed). That is, the effect display is performed by superimposing the layer related to the display of the volume adjustment effect above the layer related to the button image 401 and the layer related to the display of the automatic repeated hitting effect.

Here, some examples of the volume control effect, each display in the above-described first decorative pattern (displays of the above-described first decorative patterns (displays of the display patterns 190a to 190c), and the display priority between the above-described second decorative patterns have been described. When considering the continuous hit effect, for example, second decorative pattern > volume control effect (and light amount adjustment effect)> auto repeated hit effect> first decorative pattern> display of the first pending number display section 196 (and the second pending number display section 197 and the display of the variation information display section 195).

By doing so, even when the auto repeated hit effect and the volume control effect (and the light amount control effect) compete with each other, the volume control effect can be displayed without impairing the visibility.

In addition, when there are a plurality of layers constituting the display of the volume adjustment effect, it is conceivable to set the display priority of all the layers related to the display of the volume control effect higher than the layer related to the automatic repeated hitting effect. Further, not limited to this, the display priority of only some of the layers related to the display of the volume adjustment effect (for example, only the layer related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407) can be set to the layer related to the auto repeated hit effect. It is conceivable to make it higher than

Furthermore, in this case, it is conceivable to display only some of the layers related to the display of the volume adjustment effect (for example, only the layers related to the speaker mark 406 and the volume level mark 407).

Here, the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting effect and the volume control effect has been explained as a parallel treatment of the automatic repeated hitting function and the environment setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting effect and the light amount adjustment effect similar to the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting effect and the volume control effect.
<<Specific aspects of the transition between the auto repeated hit effect and the volume effect>>

18. Next, it is possible to consider a specific aspect related to the variation straddling between the auto repeated hit effect and the volume control effect. For example, it is conceivable that the auto repeated hit effect does not straddle the fluctuation. More specifically, in the front button effect, when the button image 401 during the auto repeated effect is displayed, this button image 401 disappears during the change at that time (until the next change starts at the latest). be done. In addition, even in the case of the back button effect, it is not configured to enable repeated hitting operations (regular repeated hits or auto repeated hits) across fluctuations, and effect display as the back button effect as described above. does not run across variations.

On the other hand, regarding the volume control effect, if the volume control effect is displayed during fluctuation, even if the change at that time is fixed and stopped and the next change starts, the display of the volume control effect continues. If it is within the time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will remain on the screen without being erased. In other words, even when the fluctuation is stopped (including during the above-described pattern fixing time and fluctuation standby), the volume adjustment effect is displayed so that the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by making it possible for the volume control effect to span fluctuations, it is possible to adjust the volume in a wider variety of situations.

Regarding the volume control effect, even if it is within a predetermined time during which the display of the volume control effect continues (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), during the design fixed time and (or "or") fluctuation It is also possible to make it so that it is temporarily erased when it is on standby (that is, it is temporarily hidden when the design is fixed or in variable standby within 3 seconds from the start of display), and then the display is resumed. . In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation) during which the display of the volume control effect continues. Alternatively, it is conceivable to set the display continuation time after the restart to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues). In addition, regarding the volume control effect, even if it is within a predetermined time during which the display of the volume control effect continues (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), during the design fixed time and (or "or") fluctuation It is erased when it is on standby (that is, it is forcibly hidden if the pattern is fixed or in variable standby within 3 seconds from the start of display), and it is configured so that it will not be displayed until the button is pressed again. good too.

In addition, although the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the light quantity adjusting effect can be the same as the relationship described here. is also possible.
<<19. Concrete aspects of the jackpot straddling of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect>>

Next, it is possible to consider a specific aspect relating to the jackpot crossing of the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect. For example, when an automatic repeated hit effect is performed in the variation that becomes a big hit (jackpot change), it is conceivable that the automatic repeated hit effect does not straddle the big win change and the big win game. More specifically, in the front button effect, when the button image 401 is displayed at the time of the auto repeated effect, even if the change at that time is a big hit change, this button image 401 is in the process of changing (at the latest, it will be in the big win game). (until such start demo is started). Also, even in the case of the back button effect, it is not configured to enable repeated hitting operations (normal repeated hits or automatic repeated hits) across the big win variation and the big win game, and the back button effect as described above is not configured. Effect display and the like are not executed across the big hit variation and the big hit game.

On the other hand, regarding the volume control effect, if the volume control effect is displayed during the big hit fluctuation, even if the change at that time is fixed and stopped and the big win game is started, the display of the volume control effect continues. If it is within the time (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), it will remain on the screen without being erased. In other words, even when the variation relating to the big win variation is stopped (including during the pattern fixing time and during the waiting of the big win game), the volume control effect is displayed and the volume can be adjusted. In this way, by making it possible for the volume control effect to straddle between the big win variation and the big win game, the volume can be adjusted in more diverse situations.

Regarding the volume control effect, even if it is within a predetermined time during which the display of the volume control effect continues (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), during the pattern fixed time and (or "or") the big hit When the game is on standby, it is temporarily erased (that is, when the pattern is fixed or the jackpot game is on standby in less than 3 seconds from the start of display, it is temporarily hidden), and then the display is resumed. is also possible. In this case, it is conceivable to restart the display only for the remaining time (remaining time) of the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation) during which the display of the volume control effect continues. Alternatively, it is conceivable to set the display continuation time after the restart to a time longer than the remaining time (for example, 3 seconds as the predetermined time during which the display of the volume adjustment effect continues). In addition, regarding the volume control effect, even if it is within a predetermined time during which the display of the volume control effect continues (for example, within 3 seconds from the start of display or the last button operation), during the pattern fixed time and (or "or") the jackpot When the game is waiting, it is erased (that is, if the pattern is fixed or the jackpot game is waiting for less than 3 seconds from the start of display, it is forcibly hidden), and it is not displayed until the button is operated again. may be configured as follows.

In addition, although the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the volume control effect has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the light quantity adjusting effect can be the same as the relationship described here. is also possible.
<<Relationship between automatic continuous hitting effect and power interruption at the time of jackpot winning>>

20. Next, it is possible to think about the relationship between the automatic continuous hitting effect and the power interruption at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, during the variation that becomes a big hit (jackpot variation), a power failure occurs in a situation where the remaining time of the variation is, for example, about 10 seconds, and then the power is turned on within 10 seconds to recover from the power failure. Consider such a case. In this case, even if the effect related to the variation of the big hit at that time is such that the auto repeated hit effect can be executed if there is no power interruption (if it is normal), the remaining fluctuation after the power failure is restored is the auto repeated hit. It is conceivable that the performance should not be executed.

In order to do this, for example, when it is determined by the state of the flag that power failure recovery from power failure during fluctuation is performed, even if there is an auto repeated hit operation, the automatic repeated hit effect is performed. It is conceivable to prevent In addition, in terms of control in the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub board 302, the automatic repeated hit effect is selected and the process for the automatic repeated hit effect is performed. It is also conceivable that the display of the auto repeated hit effect is not performed.

By not displaying the automatic repeated hit effect as described above, the display at the time of power failure recovery can be simplified. Further, the display can be differentiated from that in the case where there is no power failure, and the player can perceive that the power failure is being restored. Further, when a screen dedicated to power failure recovery is displayed during recovery from power failure, the visibility of the dedicated screen display is not hindered by the auto repeated hit effect. Here, as a screen display dedicated to power failure recovery, a black background is displayed on the entire screen, and only characters or graphics for notifying that power failure recovery is in progress can be exemplified.

In addition, the processing at the time of power failure recovery is the period of the jackpot game that shifts after the fluctuation after power failure recovery (here, the fluctuation of the remaining 10 seconds described above) ends (for example, from the start of the jackpot start demonstration to the end of the jackpot end demonstration) It is also conceivable that it may extend within Then, when the performance of promotion to probability variation (probability variation promotion), the performance of determining the number of rounds, etc. are performed during the period of the jackpot game, it is also possible to execute the repeated hitting performance as the button performance. .

In such a case, even if an automatic repeated hitting operation is performed, it is possible to prevent the automatic repeated hitting effect from being displayed (the automatic repeated hitting effect is not performed). In other words, if there is no power interruption during the jackpot fluctuation, in the jackpot game after the jackpot fluctuation that resumes after the power is turned off, it is possible to execute the continuous hit production as the button production, but if there is a power interruption during the jackpot fluctuation. In the big win game after the big win variation restarted after the power is turned off, it is possible not to execute the continuous hitting performance as the button performance. In this way, when the power is restored due to the fluctuation of the big hit, the automatic continuous hitting effect is not displayed during the big win game (the automatic repeated hitting effect is not performed), so that the It is possible to simplify the display and to differentiate the display from that in the case where there is no power failure. In addition, a screen display dedicated to recovery from power failure (even if the power is cut off during the variation of the jackpot rather than during the jackpot game, the screen display of the jackpot game dedicated to recovery from power failure is displayed during the jackpot game). In this case, the visibility of the dedicated screen display is not hindered by the auto repeated hit effect.

Note that the fluctuation at the time of the power interruption is the fluctuation before the fluctuation (target fluctuation) that was the target of the prefetch, and the fluctuation before that is the fluctuation that recovers from the power interruption and is the target of the prefetch. When the variation that has become is a big hit variation as described above, it is possible to generate an automatic continuous hitting effect with the variation that has been the target of the foreseeing that has been reached after the power failure is restored, and furthermore, the subsequent big hit. It is also possible to make it possible to generate an automatic repeated hit effect even in a game. Also, the information related to the number of pending power failures is determined as power failure recovery, and if the number of pending power failures is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, 1 or more), an automatic repeated hit effect is performed in the same manner as when there was no power failure. It is also possible to display

21. Next, it is possible to think about the relationship between the automatic continuous hit effect and the power interruption during the big win (here, during the big win game). In addition, the description of the same items as in the case of the power supply recovery from the power interruption during the big hit variation will be omitted as appropriate.

For example, after the start of the jackpot game is announced and the start demonstration of the jackpot game is started (including during the round of the jackpot), the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on and the power is cut off. When the return is performed, even if the continuous hitting effect performed during the jackpot game can be executed (normally) if there is no power interruption, the automatic continuous hitting effect is not executed. do.

By doing so, it is possible to simplify the display at the time of power failure recovery and to differentiate the display from the case where there is no power failure, as in the case of power restoration from the power failure during the fluctuation of the big hit described above. be able to. Furthermore, when the screen display dedicated to recovery from power failure is performed, the visibility of the dedicated screen display is not hindered by the auto repeated hit effect.

Note that the fluctuation at the time of the power interruption is the fluctuation before the fluctuation that was the target of the prefetch (target fluctuation), and the fluctuation before that is the fluctuation that recovers from the power interruption and is the target of the prefetch. In the case that the fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation as described above, it is also possible to generate an automatic continuous hitting effect even in the big hit game after the fluctuation that has been the target of the prefetch that has arrived after the power failure is restored. It is possible. In addition, among the multiple types of pre-reading notice effects, only when the pre-reading notice effect in a predetermined mode (giraffe pattern, rainbow color, etc.) is performed, it is also possible to generate an automatic repeated hit effect after the power is restored. It is possible.
<<Relationship between power-on and volume control>>

22. Next, with respect to power-on, we can also consider the relationship with volume control. For example, as described above, the sound volume level can always be the same value (eg, level 1, level 3, or level 5) in the initial stage such as when power is turned on. In addition to this, even if the power is turned on while the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d of the cross key 96) is pressed, the initial volume level is maintained and the volume It is conceivable to prevent the increase or decrease of

That is, for example, if the volume level is set to level 3 at the initial stage and the volume level is always set to level 3 when the power is normally turned on, the power can be turned on while pressing the right direction key 96d. Even if it is done, the display of the volume control effect to be changed from level 3 to level 4 is not performed, but the display of the volume control effect of level 3 is performed, or the volume control effect is not displayed in the first place. do. Also, unlike this, when the volume level at the initial stage is set to level 5, even if the power is turned on while the left direction key 96c is being pressed, the volume adjustment effect of changing from level 5 to level 4 will be performed. Instead of being displayed, a level 5 volume control effect is displayed, or the volume control screen is not displayed in the first place. By doing so, it is possible to limit the degree of freedom regarding the volume level when the power is turned on, and stabilize the volume level when the power is turned on.

In order to do this, for example, as shown in FIG. 20(b1), when the power is turned on, the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d of the cross key 96) is pressed. think of. In FIG. 20(b1), the pressing of the volume button continues before the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, a signal pulse P (rectangular wave) is generated as shown in FIG. 20(b2). It is possible to detect the operation of the volume button as valid at the generation timing T3 of the edge (here, the falling edge) E2 that occurs later, instead of T2, and change the volume level based on the detection result. .

If the stability of the volume level is not prioritized, it is recommended that the operation of the volume button is enabled at the timing when the rising edge that occurs earlier is detected, and the volume level is changed from the beginning. can be Also, although the relationship between power-on and volume control has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between power-on and light intensity control can be the same as the relationship described here. .
<<Relationship between pressing and holding the volume button and the auto roll function>>

23. Next, we can consider the relationship between the long press of the volume button and the auto roll function. For example, in a situation where the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d of the cross key 96) is long pressed, unlike the case of the operation button 22, it is considered that the volume button has been operated multiple times. It is conceivable to prevent such control from being performed.

That is, even if the left direction key 96c (or the right direction key 96d), which is a volume button, is pressed for a long time, control is not performed such that the volume level decreases (or increases) in multiple stages while the key is pressed for a long time. Such control treats a long press of the volume button as one operation. It can be said that such control does not enable the auto repeated tapping function even if the button is pressed for a long time with respect to the environment setting.

Note that if such a control that treats a long press of the volume button as one operation is not employed, the long press of the volume button may increase or decrease the volume level in multiple steps. Moreover, the relationship as described here can be applied not only to volume control but also to light amount control.

24. Continuing, with respect to the case of a long press on the volume button as described above, we can consider the situation where the volume button operation is compounded. For example, assume that while the volume button (here, the left direction key 96c) is being pressed for a long time to lower the volume level, the other volume button (here, the right direction key 96d) is operated for some reason. .

The sound volume level is lowered by one step due to the previously performed operation of long-pressing the left direction key 96c. In this situation, when the right key 96d, which is the other volume button, is pressed once (single press or long press), the volume level increases by one step, and the volume level increases by one step. The value before the long press of 96c is restored. In other words, it is conceivable that a plurality of volume buttons for increasing/decreasing the volume level function independently. By doing so, it is possible to perform volume control with good response to button operations.
<<Relationship between the button operation valid period of the auto repeated effect and the display time of the volume control effect>>

25. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the button operation effective period of the automatic continuous hit effect and the display time of the volume control effect. For example, the volume control effect is displayed during fluctuation, and after the last operation effect related to volume control is displayed, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed without a new volume control operation as described above, and the volume Consider the case where the adjustment effect is deleted. Alternatively, consider a case where a volume adjustment effect is displayed during fluctuation, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without volume adjustment operation, and the volume control effect disappears.

As described above, the button operation of the automatic continuous hit effect is valid for the period (here, 3 seconds) from the end of the volume button operation (or without operation) until the volume control effect is erased. For example, the period of time is set to about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. The period during which the button operation for the automatic continuous hit effect is valid corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous hit operation effective period (the period during which at least one of the automatic continuous hit effective period and the button repeated effective period is valid). be.

By doing so, the button operation effective period of the auto repeated hit effect (here, about 6 to 10 seconds) becomes longer than the display time of the fluctuating volume control effect (here, 3 seconds). Also, even if the volume control effect can be displayed superimposed on the auto repeat effect, the volume control effect will disappear during the button operation valid period, and it is possible to ensure the visibility of the auto repeat effect. becomes.
<<Relationship between the design fixed time and the display time of the volume control effect>>

26. In addition, the relationship between the above-described display time (here, 3 seconds) of the volume adjustment effect and the above-described symbol fixation time can be considered. For example, the symbol fixed time is the time during which the variable effect is fixed and stopped, and the time is, for example, about 0.3 to 0.5 seconds. For this reason, the display time of the volume adjustment effect is longer than the pattern fixed time.
<<Relationship between Volume Customizing Means and Game Machine Back Volume Control Means>>

27. Next, the relationship between the volume customizing means and the management volume control means can be considered. First, as described above, the volume customization means here uses an operation input means such as a volume button (here, the left direction key 96c or the right direction key 96d of the cross key 96). , means configured by each device that realizes a function that allows the player to set the environment related to the sound volume.

On the other hand, the game machine back volume control means realizes the function that the game parlor clerk can set the basic volume by using the game machine back volume volume 416 arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 10 (see FIG. 2). It is a means composed of each device. Further, the gaming machine back volume control means can shift the volume adjusted by the above-described volume customization means to increase or decrease the volume.

To give a more specific example, there is a correlation between the game machine back volume control means and the above-described volume customization means, and the actual volume (absolute volume) of volume levels 1 to 5 by the volume customization means is , changes according to the adjustment value of the gaming machine back volume control means. For example, it is assumed that the gaming machine back volume volume 416 of the gaming machine back volume control means can be set in three stages of "high", "middle" and "low". In this case, the volume (composite volume) due to the interaction between the game machine back volume control means and the volume customization means has five levels of volume when the volume customization means is "high" and five levels when it is "medium". The volume can be classified into 5 stages of volume in the case of "low" and "small".

Furthermore, when the synthesized sound volume is evenly divided between the minimum level and the maximum level and distinguished by numerical values of 1 to 95, synthesis at sound volume levels 1 to 5 when the game machine back volume control means is "high" Assume that the volume is represented by values of "85", "89", "92", "95", and "95" (unit is decibel). Further, the default volume level (volume level at power-on) in the volume customizing means in this case is assumed to be "5".

On the other hand, when the game machine back volume control means is set to "middle", the synthesized volume at volume levels 1 to 5 are respectively "85", "89", "92", "95" and "95". do. Further, the default sound volume level in the sound volume customizing means in this case is set to "1". In addition, when the game machine back volume control means is set to "low", the synthesized volume at volume levels 1 to 5 are respectively "1", "1", "78", "82" and "95". Furthermore, the default volume level in the volume customizing means in this case is assumed to be "4".

Furthermore, only when the back side volume control means of the game machine is set to "high", regardless of the currently set volume level, when the game standby continues for a predetermined time or longer (for example, when a customer waiting demonstration is in progress) , it is conceivable to forcibly change the volume level to "5", which is the default volume level (the volume level at power-on) in the volume customizing means.
<<Relationship between long press from before the continuous hit operation valid period and auto continuous hit function>>

28. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the long press from before the valid period of the repeated operation and the auto repeated operation function. For example, the button operation valid period (the above-described repeated press operation valid period) related to the repeated hitting operation is set to about 6 seconds to 10 seconds. As described above, the continuous-press operation effective period can be at least one of the auto-continuous-press effective period and the button-continuous-press effective period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(b), the operation button 22 is pressed at a timing before the start of the continuous-hit operation valid period, and this pressing operation starts the continuous-hit operation valid period and continues the continuous-hit operation valid period. Even in such a situation, it is assumed that the button is continued in the form of long pressing. In such a situation, the valid period of automatic repeated hits (the above-mentioned automatic repeated hit valid period) starts after the start of the repeated hit operation valid period.

Then, after the automatic repeated hitting effective period is reached, when a long press for a time longer than the condition for automatic repeated hitting is detected, the automatic repeated hitting operation becomes effective, and for example, an automatic repeated hitting effect is started. Here, FIG. 30(b) is based on the specific example of the automatic repeated hitting operation shown in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 30(b), the button continuous-press effective period starts earlier than the auto-continuous-press effective period, and FIG. It's becoming In such a case, if the button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (here, 0.5 seconds as described above), the automatic repeated hit determination becomes effective. If so, after the automatic repeated hitting effective period is reached, automatic repeated hitting is performed at a specific interval (here, 0.2 second interval as described above). If continuous pressing is started within the valid period of automatic continuous tapping, automatic continuous tapping will be performed at a specific interval after a predetermined time has elapsed, but unlike this, smooth and uniform (0.2 second intervals) automatic continuous tapping is possible. can be done.

By doing so, the automatic continuous hitting function can be optimized. In addition, for example, even if the player assumes the back button function and starts long-pressing in a situation where there is no front button effect, and then the front button effect related to repeated hits is started during the long press, auto repeated hits are performed. The production can be started at an appropriate timing, and can be smoothly connected to the automatic continuous hitting production. Alternatively, the automatic continuous-hit effective period may be started simultaneously with the continuous-hit operation effective period.

29. Further, as described above, when a long press is started before the start of the continuous-hit operation effective period, it is possible to set the auto-continuous-hit effective period so that the automatic continuous-hit function cannot be activated. Furthermore, in this case, the normal repeated hitting operation is valid, and the normal repeated hitting effect can be performed, but the automatic repeated hitting valid period does not come and it is possible to prevent the automatic repeated hitting effect from being performed.
<<Relationship between SP Reach and back button function (mode in which continuous hit effect is not executed)>>

30. Next, we can consider the relationship between SP reach and back button functions. For example, during the SP reach, there is a case where a continuous hit effect is performed as a back button effect. Furthermore, in the back button presentation, the automatic repeated hitting function is not applied (does not operate). As a result, the normal repeated hitting function may be exhibited during the SP reach, but the automatic repeated hitting function is not exhibited.

Furthermore, the timing of performing the back button effect (timing when the back button function is exhibited) is the first half of the SP reach (the beginning and middle of the effect performed in the state of the SP reach). Also, in the first half of the SP reach, the guide display such as the button image does not appear (the back button presentation is performed without the front button presentation). During the back button effect, while the player is performing the normal continuous tapping operation, the guide display does not appear, but the continuous tapping effect (such as the above-mentioned effect display) is performed, but if the automatic continuous pressing operation is performed, the guide display will not appear. There is no intermediate performance.

Also, the performance pattern that develops from the first half to the latter half of the SP reach has a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the performance that does not develop. Furthermore, depending on the difference in the aspect (color) related to the result of the back button effect (the effect that appears triggered by the operation of the operation button 22, the effect display described above), the degree of expectation related to the development of the effect and the case where the effect develops (whether or not it develops into a high-expectation performance like the above-mentioned performance C) is made different. Also, in the second half of the SP reach, the continuous hitting effect as the back button effect is not performed even if the player operates it regardless of whether it is related to normal continuous hitting or automatic continuous hitting. (That is, in the second half of the SP reach, the back button effect as the repeated hit effect is not performed, but the repeated hit effect and the single operation effect as the front button effect can be executed).

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, and improve the taste of the pachinko game machine 10 . As a modified example, the back button in the first half of the SP reach may also be able to execute automatic repeated hits.
<<Relationship between SP Reach and back button function (Mode for executing continuous hit effect)>>

31. Regarding the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, the auto repeated hit effect may be executed instead of not executing the automatic repeated hit effect as described above. For example, as in the case described above, during the SP reach, there is a case where the continuous hit effect is performed as the back button effect. Furthermore, unlike the case described above, the automatic repeated hitting function is applied (operated) even in the back button effect. As a result, both the normal repeated hitting function and the automatic repeated hitting function can be exhibited during the SP reach.

In addition, during repeated hitting effects as back button effects, guide display (front button effects) relating to other types of button effects (single press, long press, etc.) may be performed. In addition, when the operation button 22 is long-pressed in a situation where a repeated hit effect is being performed as a back button effect, other types of button effects (single press, long press, etc.) may Let control take place. Here, as described above, the automatic button operation is designed so that the player can set in advance so that the same effect as if the player had operated the operation button 22 would proceed even if the player did not operate the operation button 22. function.

Also, the back button effect may progress in a predetermined stage. In that case, it is assumed that the back button effect progresses in three stages of A, B, and C (A being the first stage). Among the stages A to C, when it is determined that there is a predetermined number of button operations (for example, multiple times) or more and repeated hits (here, both normal repeated hits and auto repeated hits), the degree of expectation for a big hit is the highest. The high level should be the A level. In other words, when the stage is not raised from the stage A at all even though the predetermined number of consecutive hitting operations are performed, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to the highest.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the SP reach and the back button function, and to improve the interest in the pachinko game machine 10 .
<<Relationship between auto continuous hitting function and electric support function>>

32. Next, we can think about the relationship between the auto roll function and the electric support function. For example, in any of the game states of non-electric support state, electric support state, and jackpot state (during jackpot), the auto repeated hitting function is exhibited. Then, when the automatic repeated hitting operation is performed, the automatic repeated hitting effect is performed.

For example, a plurality of types of repeated hit effects with different modes are provided as an effect (repeat effect) when requesting a repeated hit operation by displaying characters such as "Keep hitting". Furthermore, as the automatic repeated hitting effects, a plurality of types of automatic repeated hitting effects having different display modes and different effective periods of repeated hitting operation are provided. In addition, in the non-electrical support state, there are relatively more types of repeated hits that can be selected (hereinafter referred to as "continuous hits possible effects") than in the electric support state. The selection ratio of continuous hit possible effects in the case of non-electric support state is determined so that the ratio of long effects with auto continuous hit effective period (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively small.

In the electric sapo state, there are relatively few types of effects that can be repeated, and among them, the proportion of long effects that are valid for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively low. , to determine the selection ratio. Furthermore, in the jackpot state (during the jackpot), there are relatively few types of effects that can be repeated, and among them, the proportion of effects that are valid for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds or more) is relatively low. Determine the selection ratio so that there are many.

Furthermore, as the continuous hit effect, the effect of succeeding (or failing) a predetermined mission or winning (or losing) a battle can be performed. Then, it is possible to make the degree of expectation of a big hit higher in the electric sapo state than in the non-electric sapo state, when the mission is successful or the battle is won in the continuous hitting possible effect.

By doing so, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the automatic repeated hitting function and the electric support function, and to improve the interest in the pachinko game machine 10 .
<<Relationship between touch detection and production>>

33. Next, it is possible to consider the relationship between the touch detection to the firing handle 20 and the effect. For example, in a non-game state in which a game is not played, when the player touches the shooting handle 20 and detects a touch, a predetermined effect can be executed. Various effects can be adopted as the predetermined effect. For example, some can be displayed as images, and some can be output as audio.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of predetermined effects, and the predetermined effects can be executed in the non-electrical support state, but it is possible to prevent the predetermined effects from being executed in the electric support state. This predetermined effect is not executed at the same time as the normal repeated hitting effect and the automatic repeated hitting effect, but it can be executed in parallel with the volume control effect and the light amount adjustment effect is executable). Furthermore, a specific effect, which is a different type of effect from the predetermined effect, can be executed, and the specific effect is not executed in the non-electrical support state, but is executable in the electric support state. It is possible to set it as guidance production (right hitting production). Furthermore, the specific effect can be executed in parallel with the normal repeated hitting effect and the automatic repeated hitting effect (can be executed during fluctuation), or can be executed in parallel with the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect ( It can be executed in parallel during variable waiting or customer waiting demo). As described above, the right-handed effect as the specific effect is also displayed during the customer waiting demonstration (during the waiting movie) in the electric sapo state.

34. Next, as the relationship between touch detection and presentation, the relationship between touch detection and a standby movie (standby demonstration presentation), which is the presentation of the standby demonstration, can be considered. For example, it is possible to display a standby demonstration effect when the period in which the fluctuation stop (determined stop) state and the touch non-detection state of the firing handle 20 reaches a predetermined period. It should be noted that the standby demonstration effect here is the aforementioned standby movie.

Also, the sound volume during the standby demonstration effect is silent or lower (smaller) than the sound volume until then (before the start of the standby demonstration effect such as during pattern variation). Furthermore, the period of the standby demonstration effect (display period) is longer than the above-mentioned predetermined period before the display of the standby demonstration effect (time until the standby demonstration effect is started in the touch non-detection state). In addition, during the display period of the standby demonstration effect (during the display period of the standby demonstration effect), there is no ball entering any of the starting openings (here, the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63). In both cases, if there is a touch detection on the firing handle 20, the display shifts from the standby demonstration effect to the display during fluctuation stop.

The standby demonstration effect is displayed both in the non-electrical support state and the electric support state, but as a modification, in the electric support state, the sound output is only performed at a low (small) volume, and the standby demonstration display is not performed. It may be configured to prevent Also, in the case of a specific game state (here, a game state in which a player should hit to the right), under a predetermined situation (here, when the standby demonstration effect is displayed), and when there is a touch detection on the firing handle 20, a plurality of Among the types of right-handed guidance effects, a specific right-handed guidance guidance display or a specific voice output may be performed.

Furthermore, during the standby demonstration effect, if the operation button 22 or the cross key 96 is operated, the screen shifts to the above-described menu screen for setting the environment. On the other hand, if a touch to the firing handle 20 is detected during the standby demonstration effect, the change stop screen is displayed. By operating the cross key 96 (in response to the player's operation), it is possible to adjust the volume and display the volume adjustment effect, and similarly, it is possible to adjust the light amount and display the light amount adjustment effect.
<<Relationship between environment setting function and error volume>>

35. Next, we can consider the relationship between the configuration function and the error volume. For example, as explained above, it is possible to adjust the sound volume related to the effect in the environmental settings, but the error sound volume cannot be set by the player (must be done by the game machine back volume control means). setting is impossible). The error sound volume can be set at the factory shipment stage of the pachinko game machine 10, but is prevented from being changed by the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the sound volume is set too low when an abnormality occurs and the player or the game parlor clerk cannot perceive the abnormality. However, for the above-mentioned second error, the volume cannot be adjusted according to the volume level that can be set by the player. It may be configured to allow
<<Relationship between environmental settings and variable display>>

36. Subsequently, variations on the relationship between configuration and variable display can be considered. For example, when a change is started during adjustment of the volume or light intensity, the volume selected at the time when the change is started even if the operation for determining the volume or light intensity (here, pressing the operation button 22) is not performed. Or reflect the setting of the amount of light. By doing so, it is possible to quickly draw the player's attention to the variable effect.
<<Relationship between environment settings and production mode change>>

37. Next, we can consider the relationship between environmental settings and presentation mode changes. For example, the volume buttons (here, left direction key 96c and right direction key 96d) can be used only for volume adjustment, and the light intensity buttons (here, up direction key 96a and down direction key 96b) can be used to adjust light intensity, It shall also be used for switching the production mode. As for the light amount button, different functions are provided depending on whether the light amount is fluctuating or when the fluctuation is stopped.

Furthermore, regarding the switching of the performance mode, it is possible to switch the performance mode by operating the light amount button both during the fluctuation and during the stop of the fluctuation. During the change, it is possible to adjust the sound volume and switch the production mode, but it is not possible to adjust the light amount. However, while the fluctuation is stopped (including during the standby demonstration), it is possible to adjust the volume, adjust the amount of light, and switch the performance mode.

In addition, in order to enable both the light amount adjustment and the switching of the presentation mode while the variation is stopped, it is conceivable that the cross key 96 alone does not have enough selection functions. For this reason, it is conceivable to use other buttons together, or to use a button device capable of selecting more directions in place of the cross key 96, which has four directions of up, down, left, and right.
<<Regarding the timer value that is the condition for transitioning to the standby demo effect>>

38. Next, regarding the standby demonstration effect described above, the timer value that is the condition for transition to the standby demonstration effect can be considered. For example, the period (predetermined timer value) from the fluctuation stop in the situation where there is no hold to the transition to the standby demo effect is changed from the above-mentioned menu screen for setting the environment to the display during fluctuation stop (normal screen). Starting from the timing, it is possible to make the period (predetermined timer value) until transition to the standby demonstration effect mutually the same.

Furthermore, it is possible to clear the timer value if a specific condition is satisfied while the timer value is being incremented (or decremented). As specific conditions in this case, for example, starting winning a prize (normal drawing winning) according to the normal design can be exemplified. Further, when the timer value is cleared, no change occurs on the performance display screen triggered by the timer clear.

In addition, the increment (or decrement) of the timer value relating to the period from the fluctuation stop in the state where there is no hold to the transition to the standby demonstration effect reaches a predetermined value, the transition to the standby demonstration effect is performed, and the above-mentioned during the execution of the standby demo effect Even if the specific condition of (1) is satisfied, the standby demonstration effect may not be interrupted.

Further, when a predetermined condition different from the specific condition described above is satisfied, the timer value can be cleared, and a change can occur on the effect display screen triggered by this timer clear. As a predetermined condition in this case, for example, starting winning a prize (special drawing winning) according to special drawing 1 or special drawing 2 can be exemplified. Furthermore, the change on the screen can be exemplified by the start of a variable effect.

In addition, after the timer value has passed, after transitioning to the standby demo effect, if the above-mentioned predetermined conditions are satisfied during the standby demo effect, the demo movie can be interrupted during the standby demo effect. is.
<Summary of Examples>

Various aspects of the effects in the pachinko gaming machine 10 have been illustrated above, and these can be summarized as follows.
<Summary 1>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
Equipped with operation means (such as operation buttons) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the operation means as a trigger,
As types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation and a repeated operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations.
It is possible to display promotion effects (display of button images, etc.) to encourage player operation,
When the player's operation is performed multiple times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (normal repeated hit effect, etc.) corresponding to the player's operation performed multiple times can be displayed,
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, if the player operation is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed multiple times. It is possible to display an effect (such as an auto repeated hit effect) corresponding to a single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the player operation has been performed,
The continuous-hit operation effective period during which the player's operation can be accepted in the repeated-hit operation presentation is relatively longer than the single-hit operation effective period (button repeated-hit valid period, etc.) in which the player's operation can be accepted in the single-shot operation presentation. long,
A first effect pattern (front button effect, etc.) that displays the promotion effect when executing the repeated hitting operation effect, and a second effect pattern (back button effect, etc.) that does not display the promotion effect when executing the repeated hitting operation effect. and
A repeated hit operation effective period during which a player operation can be accepted in the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is a repeated hit operation valid period during which a player operation can be accepted in the repeated hit operation effect in the first effect pattern. relatively longer than
Having a plurality of types of effects displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the repeated hitting operation effect in the second effect pattern,
A predetermined effect (such as a display of a bright image associated with the repeated hit effect) displayed in parallel when the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed, and a display after the predetermined effect is displayed. It has a certain production (such as the production in the second half of the SP reach),
Types (color differences, etc.) of effects (effect elements, etc.) that are displayed when the player's operation is performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. ), the possibility that the specific effect will be displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed differs,
Within one symbol change, the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and a preliminary effect (such as the change notice effect) that can be displayed before the predetermined effect can be displayed,
Having a plurality of types of aspects of the pre-production,
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the preliminary effect is displayed within one pattern change, the above-mentioned Tendency of which kind of aspect of the effect to be displayed when the player's operation is performed a plurality of times in the repeated hitting operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. are different.
<Summary 2>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
Equipped with operation means (such as operation buttons) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the operation means as a trigger,
As types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation and a repeated operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations.
It is possible to display promotion effects (display of button images, etc.) to encourage player operation,
When the player's operation is performed multiple times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (normal repeated hit effect, etc.) corresponding to the player's operation performed multiple times can be displayed,
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, if the player operation is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed multiple times. It is possible to display an effect (such as an auto repeated hit effect) corresponding to a single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the player operation has been performed,
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state includes at least a first error state (recoverable error state, etc.) and a second error state (unrecoverable error state, etc.). ,
When a first error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more in the repeated hit operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the first error state. If the operation continues for more than 0.5 seconds (such as for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation being performed for a predetermined time or longer.
When a second error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more in the repeated hit operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the second error state. A game characterized by not displaying an effect corresponding to the single player operation being performed continuously for a predetermined time or more even if the operation is performed continuously (for example, for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds). machine.
<Summary 3>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. It is a game machine characterized by being.
<Summary 4>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
While the promotion effect displayed in a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
The game machine is characterized in that the sound volume display displayed with a certain symbol variation can be continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation.
<Summary 5>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. and
When a power failure occurs and the power is recovered thereafter, the player's operation of the second operating means is started during the power failure and the player's operation is continued even after the power failure is recovered. However, the gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level is not adjusted with the player's operation after the power is restored.
<Summary 6>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. and
Even if the player's operation of the second operation means is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer, it is not considered that the player's operation of the second operation means is performed a plurality of times. It is a game machine.
<Summary 7>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
Equipped with operation means (such as operation buttons) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the operation means as a trigger,
As types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation and a repeated operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations.
It is possible to display promotion effects (display of button images, etc.) to encourage player operation,
When the player's operation is performed multiple times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (normal repeated hit effect, etc.) corresponding to the player's operation performed multiple times can be displayed,
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, if the player operation is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed multiple times. It is possible to display an effect (such as an auto repeated hit effect) corresponding to a single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the player operation has been performed,
The continuous-hit operation effective period during which the player's operation can be accepted in the repeated-hit operation presentation is relatively longer than the single-hit operation effective period (button repeated-hit valid period, etc.) in which the player's operation can be accepted in the single-shot operation presentation. long,
A first effect pattern (front button effect, etc.) that displays the promotion effect when executing the repeated hitting operation effect, and a second effect pattern (back button effect, etc.) that does not display the promotion effect when executing the repeated hitting operation effect. and
A repeated hit operation effective period during which a player operation can be accepted in the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is a repeated hit operation valid period during which a player operation can be accepted in the repeated hit operation effect in the first effect pattern. relatively longer than
Having a plurality of types of effects displayed by performing a plurality of player operations in the repeated hitting operation effect in the second effect pattern,
A predetermined effect (such as a display of a bright image associated with the repeated hit effect) displayed in parallel when the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern is executed, and a display after the predetermined effect is displayed. It has a certain production (such as the production in the second half of the SP reach),
Types (color differences, etc.) of effects (effect elements, etc.) that are displayed when the player's operation is performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. ), the possibility that the specific effect will be displayed after the predetermined effect is displayed differs,
Within one symbol change, the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and a preliminary effect (such as the change notice effect) that can be displayed before the predetermined effect can be displayed,
Having a plurality of types of aspects of the pre-production,
When the predetermined effect is displayed after the preliminary effect is displayed within one pattern change, the above-mentioned Tendency of which kind of aspect of the effect to be displayed when the player's operation is performed a plurality of times in the repeated hitting operation effect in the second effect pattern when the predetermined effect is displayed. is different,
A single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds) within the repeated hitting operation valid period in which the player operation can be accepted in the repeated hitting operation effect in the first effect pattern. Even if the player's operation is performed a plurality of times, if the player's operation of the first operation means has been performed a single time before the start of the continuous hit operation valid period. It is a game machine characterized by not being regarded as an object.
<Summary 8>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
Equipped with operation means (such as operation buttons) that can be operated by the player,
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the operation means as a trigger,
As types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect that can accept a single player operation and a repeated operation effect that can accept a plurality of player operations.
It is possible to display promotion effects (display of button images, etc.) to encourage player operation,
When the player's operation is performed multiple times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (normal repeated hit effect, etc.) corresponding to the player's operation performed multiple times can be displayed,
Even if the player operation is not performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, if the player operation is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), the game is performed multiple times. It is possible to display an effect (such as an auto repeated hit effect) corresponding to a single player operation being continuously performed for a predetermined time or longer, assuming that the player operation has been performed,
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, and the error state includes at least a first error state (recoverable error state, etc.) and a second error state (unrecoverable error state, etc.). ,
When a first error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more in the repeated hit operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the first error state. If the operation continues for more than 0.5 seconds (such as for a time exceeding 0.5 seconds), it is possible to display an effect corresponding to the player operation being performed for a predetermined time or longer.
When a second error state occurs while a single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more in the repeated hit operation effect, the single player operation is performed for a predetermined time in the second error state. Even if the operation continues for more than 0.5 seconds or more, the effect corresponding to the single player operation continuing for a predetermined time or longer is not displayed.
Having a plurality of modes of the continuous hitting operation effect,
The first game state (non-electric support state, electric support state, jackpot state (during jackpot), etc.) and the second game state (non-electric support state, electric support state) with different ease of transition to special games , a jackpot state (during jackpot) that is different from the first game state, etc.)
The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of types of repeated hit operation effects differs between the first game state and the second game state.
<Summary 9>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation effect for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. and
A single player operation is continuously performed for a predetermined time or more (such as a time exceeding 0.5 seconds) within the repeated hit operation valid period during which the player operation can be accepted in the repeated hit operation effect in the first effect pattern. Even if the player's operation is performed a plurality of times, if the player's operation of the first operation means has been performed a single time before the start of the continuous hit operation valid period. not regarded as a thing,
An error state occurs when an abnormality occurs in a game machine, and the error state has multiple types of error states (first error state, second error state, etc.),
capable of outputting a specific error notification sound for notifying that the specific error state is in at least a specific error state among a plurality of types of error states;
The specific error notification sound is output at a predetermined volume (such as the volume adjusted by the game machine back volume control means) regardless of the current adjustment of the volume level of the effect sound. It is a game machine.
<Summary 10>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (normal repeated hit effect, etc.) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the repeated hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is continuously performed, it is assumed that the player's operation of the first operation means is performed a plurality of times, and the player's operation of the first operation means is continued for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (such as a volume level mark) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect.
While the promotion effect displayed in a certain symbol variation is not continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
The volume display displayed in a certain symbol variation can be continuously displayed over the next variation of the certain symbol variation,
A third operation means (game machine back volume control means, etc.) that is an operation means different from the first operation means and the second operation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted not only by the second operation means but also by the third operation means.
<Summary 11>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. and
When a power cutoff occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the player's operation of the second operation means is started during the power cutoff and the player's operation is continued even after the power is restored from the power cutoff. However, the volume level is not adjusted with the player's operation after the power is restored,
A third operation means (game machine back volume control means, etc.) that is an operation means different from the first operation means and the second operation means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted not only by the second operating means but also by the third operating means.
<Summary 12>

In the invention according to the present embodiment, a game using a game medium (such as a game ball) is performed, and as an effect related to the game, symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can give a profit to a player when the display mode is
main control means (main board, etc.) for controlling the progress of the game;
a sub-control means (such as a sub-main board) that is communicably connected to the main control means and performs control processing according to transmission information (such as a main command) transmitted from the main control means;
A production output means (such as a production display device) that outputs a production under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means (speaker, etc.) for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
A first operation means (such as an operation button) that can be operated by a player;
a second operation means (such as a cross key) that is operable by the player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can be displayed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to display a promotion effect (display of a button image, etc.) for prompting the player to operate the first operation means,
When the player operates the first operation means a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation effect, an effect (such as a normal repeated hit effect) corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times can be displayed. ,
Even if the player does not operate the first operating means a plurality of times in the continuous hitting operation effect, the player operates the first operating means a single time for a predetermined time or more (time exceeding 0.5 seconds, etc.). If it is performed continuously, it is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times, and the player has operated the first operating means a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. It is possible to display the effect (such as auto repeated hit effect) according to what is done,
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the sound effect, it is possible to display a volume level display (volume level mark, etc.) that allows the player to grasp the current sound volume level of the sound effect,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. , an effect triggered by the player's operation of the second operating means under a situation in which an effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operating means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is displayed. It is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound, and it is possible to display the effect corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means continuously for a predetermined time or longer and the volume level display in parallel. and
Even if the player's operation of the second operating means is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more, it is not regarded as the player's operation of the second operating means being performed a plurality of times,
When a specific time elapses without a new pattern change after the pattern is stopped, a predetermined standby demonstration effect can be displayed,
During the display of the predetermined standby demonstration effect, the volume of the effect sound is reduced compared to when the pattern is changing, or the effect sound is muted (silent, etc.),
The predetermined standby demonstration effect is displayed even when the predetermined standby demonstration effect is being displayed and the volume of the effect sound is reduced or the effect sound is muted compared to when the pattern is changing. The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted in response to the player's operation of the second operating means while maintaining the above, and the volume level display is displayed in parallel while maintaining the display of the predetermined standby demonstration effect. The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible.
<Other embodiments>

The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, and various modifications are possible. For example, in the explanation so far, we have avoided supplementing the explanation one by one so as not to make it redundant, but as long as there is no problem with the application, the matter related to the volume control effect can be applied to the light amount adjustment effect, or the auto repeated hit effect can be applied. It is possible to apply the item to the effect during normal repeated hits. Also, as long as there is no particular problem, it is possible to combine various effects such as volume control effect, light amount control effect, right-hand hitting effect, standby demo effect, etc., centering on auto repeated hitting effect. Also, as long as there is no particular problem, it is possible to apply each item to various embodiments relating to the front button effect and the back button effect.

Furthermore, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, a relatively large display body (here, referred to as a "first effect display device") is placed on standby. While the demonstration effect is being displayed, the display related to the environment setting (setting volume control effect, light intensity control effect, etc.) is displayed on the other small display body (here, referred to as a "second effect display device"). , is also possible. In this case, since the standby demonstration effect is displayed, it is possible not to perform the pending display.

Furthermore, the display related to the environment setting may be always displayed on the second effect display device. Further, it is possible to perform a pending display together with a display related to the environment setting on the second effect display device during the pattern variation. It is also possible to always display both the volume control effect and the light amount control effect on the second effect display device.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a plurality of second effect display devices and display the sound volume adjustment effect and the light quantity adjustment effect related to the environment setting on separate second effect display devices. Also, it is possible to perform the volume adjustment effect and the light amount adjustment effect on one second effect display device, and perform other displays (notice effect, etc.) on the other second effect display devices.

Furthermore, during fluctuation, the first effect display device can display the effect pattern (decorative pattern) 190, and the second effect display device can display the environment setting. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the display having a high degree of importance for the progress of the game.

In addition, it is possible to adopt the display of the number of game balls as an item that can be changed by the player's own operation. For example, in the pachinko game machine 10 that displays the number of game balls acquired by the player on the effect display device 60 during the special game, the meaning indicated by the number of game balls displayed can be selected. When the player operates the cross key 96 or the operation button 22, the displayed number of game balls is the number (total number) of game balls paid out due to the winning in the big winning opening. It is possible to change whether the number of game balls (subtraction number) increased during the special game, which is obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired by the player during the special game, from the number of game balls paid out by winning the prize to the mouth. do.

The time when such selectable items can be determined includes the time when the environment can be set, the start of the big win, during the big win, during a specific pattern change (for example, during a change in the pattern in the time-reduced game state), while the change is stopped, and so on. can be mentioned at various times. Also, the person who can decide on the selectable items is not limited to the player, but may be a manager of the game hall (game hall clerk, etc.). Alternatively, both the player and the manager may be allowed to decide.

Furthermore, the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as described above. For example, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine that directly pays out game balls as game media acquired by the player to the player so that the player can touch prize balls as described above. For example, the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed circulation type pachinko game machine (management game machine) that circulates and uses game balls inside the game machine. Further, as a pachinko game machine of enclosed circulation type, a machine capable of electromagnetically recording the entering and exiting of game media can be exemplified.

In addition, the present invention comprises a plurality of reels on which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the start and stop of rotation of the reels based on the player's operation, and provides a game medal or the like according to the winning combination won. It can also be applied to a slot machine (rotational game machine) that pays out media (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of detecting the handle operation, it is possible to detect the operation of a bet button operated by the player when setting the bet, or the operation of the bet button operated by the player when setting the bet. Based on the detection of the insertion of game medals, it is possible to apply an effect output according to the state of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to, for example, casino machines installed in casino facilities.
<Other additional considerations>

Furthermore, the inventors considered other matters (additional considerations) regarding various button effects as described above. These additional considerations are discussed in turn below. In addition, unless there is a particular problem, each additional consideration item described here can be used in an appropriate form between the embodiments and modifications described so far, between each additional consideration item, between each additional consideration item, and between the technical matters within each additional consideration item. It is possible to combine with Also, in the following description, regarding the probability of execution and display of effects, the ratio, the frequency (ease of execution), etc., a relatively high value is 100%, and a low value is 0%. It is possible to consider including This point also applies to the probability of execution and display of various effects, the ratio, the frequency (easiness of execution), etc. described before.
<<Additional study item 1 (Expansion of diversity of effects associated with the type of auto repeated hit effect 1)>>

First, with regard to the automatic repeated hitting function, which is an automatic repeated hitting function, it is considered to provide a plurality of types of automatic repeated hitting effects, and to expand the variety of effects by associating with the types of automatic repeated hitting effects.

Regarding the provision of multiple types of auto repeated effects, in the previous section <<Various aspects related to back button effects>> (paragraphs 0520 to 0525 of this specification), auto repeated effects A and automatic repeated effects as back button effects An example has been described in which the effect B is provided and the blinking cycles in the effect are different from each other (paragraph 0523 of this specification, etc.). Further, with respect to the automatic repeated hitting effect C and the automatic repeated hitting effect D as front button effects, similarly, an example in which the flashing periods in the effect are different from each other has been described (paragraph 0523 of this specification, etc.).

In addition, in the section <<relationship between the automatic continuous hit effect as the back button effect and the subsequent effect>> (paragraphs 0505 to 0519 of the specification), the series of reach effects are described from the normal reach to the first half of the SP reach. , and in the first half of this SP reach, the "auto repeated hit effect as a back button effect" is executed, and furthermore, it is possible to develop from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. paragraph 0511, etc.).

In addition, when a plurality of types of automatic repeated effects are provided, it has been explained that the degree of expectation for a big hit for the subsequent effects is changed according to the difference in the mode of the automatic repeated effects (paragraph 0517 of this specification, etc.). Furthermore, the term "SP reach second half production" refers to the production of the latter part when SP reach is divided into the first half and the second half based on the predetermined timing and production situation. (paragraph 0519 of this specification, etc.).

Here, the effect control is performed in which the expectation of a big hit is related to the automatic repeated hitting effect as the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach, the automatic repeated hitting effect as the front button effect in the latter half of the SP reach, and the effect after the automatic repeated hitting effect. will be explained. In the following, in order to distinguish from the automatic repeated hits A to D described above, the automatic repeated hits as the back button effects will be referred to as "automatic repeated effects A1" and "5th automatic repeated effects", etc., and the auto repeated effects as the front button effects. The continuous hit effect will be referred to as "automatic repeated hit effect C1", "sixth automatic repeated hit effect", or the like. In addition, as described in paragraphs 0481 and 0482 above, these repeated hit effects (automatic repeat effects) are effects that allow not only automatic repeated hits but also normal repeated hits. A performance occurs. The effect during repeated hits is an effect that can be generated by auto repeated hits or normal repeated hits (effect when repeated hits are performed), and it is common during repeated hits whether it is an automatic repeated hits effect or a normal repeated hits effect. It should be supplemented that effects can be executed (in other words, whether it is automatic repeated hits or normal repeated hits, the contents of effects generated by repeated hits and the candidates for effects are common). Note that the ``effect during repeated hits'' is an effect based on repeated hits, so it may also be referred to as ``effect triggered by repeated hits'' or ``effect based on repeated hits''.

First, the variation effect related to one variation is divided into an auto repeated hit effect A1 as the "back button effect" in the "first half of the SP reach" and an automatic repeated hit effect C1 as the "front button effect" in the "second half of the SP reach". Either one or both of them may be performed.

The aforementioned "first half of SP reach" and "second half of SP reach" express SP reach by dividing it into the first half and the latter half based on predetermined timing and production conditions, as in the previous description. As for the "first half of SP reach" and "second half of SP reach", for example, the progress of the production shifts (branchs) to one of the multiple types of production that may appear at that point ( It is also possible to call the period before the branch point as "SP reach first half" and the period after it as "SP reach latter half". Further, regarding the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach, for example, the "first half of the SP reach" is the SP reach for a predetermined time (about 30 seconds or the like), and the expectation of a big hit is relatively lower than the "last half of the SP reach". In the ``first half of the SP reach'', the player expects the shift to the ``second half of the SP reach'' rather than hoping to be notified of the winning related to the big win. is a ready-to-win production for a predetermined time (about 60 seconds, etc.) longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time (about 30 seconds, etc.). It can be a production that expects the notification of.

Further, the “first half of SP reach” and the “second half of SP reach” can also be expressed as transitioning (or transitioning) from “first half of SP reach” to “second half of SP reach” via a branch point.

Moreover, it is also possible to think that the branch point is included in either the "first half of SP reach" or the "last half of SP reach". Furthermore, it is possible to call it "effect branching" etc. to transfer to one of the effects at a branch point. Then, the branch point in the case where the transition to either of the relatively advantageous performance and the relatively disadvantageous performance for the player is defined as the "win-lose branch" related to winning (big hit) or losing (loss). etc. is also possible. In addition, as a jackpot pattern when it develops into SP reach, (1) A pattern in which winning is announced in "SP reach first half" without shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half", (2) " A pattern in which the winning is announced in the "second half of SP reach" after shifting from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach", (3) "first half of SP reach" does not occur and suddenly develops into "late part of SP reach" There is a pattern in which winning is announced in the "second half of SP reach", and (1) is a rare production pattern with a lower probability of being selected than (2) and (3). In addition, as a jackpot pattern when it develops into SP reach, (4) a pattern in which the loss is notified in "first half of SP reach" without shifting from "first half of SP reach" to "second half of SP reach", (5) " Pattern of shifting from "SP reach first half" to "SP reach second half" and then notifying the rejection in "SP reach second half", (6) "SP reach first half" did not occur and suddenly developed to "SP reach second half" (5) and (6) are production patterns with a relatively low probability of being selected compared to (4).

Also, the effect of the "first half of the SP reach" and the effect of the "second half of the SP reach" do not necessarily have to be included in one variation (during one variation effect). At least one of the "first half of the SP reach" and the "second half of the SP reach" effect may be executed over a plurality of fluctuations. In such a case, at least in the "first half of SP reach" effect, it is conceivable to use a loss variation in which the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss.

Furthermore, even when multiple fluctuations are used for the production of the "SP reach first half" and the production of the "SP reach second half", the above-mentioned branch point (the execution point of the production branch) is the production of the "SP reach first half", and , "Last half of SP reach".

It is also conceivable to use one variation (or multiple variations) for the effect representing the effect branch. In this case, at least one variation is used for the "first half of the SP reach" effect, the effect representing the branch of the effect, and the "second half of the SP reach" effect. Then, from the production of "SP reach first half" to the production of "SP reach second half", at least three fluctuations are used, including the fluctuation times (variation times for production branch) in which the production representing the production branch is performed. It will be done.

On the premise of the above, in one embodiment of this additional study item 1, each of the above-mentioned automatic repeated hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and automatic repeated hit effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) With regard to the operation effective period (automatic repeated hitting effective period), the relationship between each operation effective period is determined so that the operation effective period (automatic repeated hitting effective period) is longer in the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 than in the automatic repeated hitting effect C1. . As a specific example, for example, the operation effective period (automatic continuous hit effective period) in the auto repeated hit effect A1 is a period that starts 1 second after the first half of the SP reach starts and ends 9 seconds before the end of the first half of the SP reach. is 20 seconds, and the operation effective period (automatic repeated hit effective period) in the automatic repeated hit effect C1 is a period that starts 30 seconds after the second half of the SP reach starts and ends 10 seconds before the end of the second half of the SP reach. 5 seconds, and so on. By doing so, it is possible to effectively utilize the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach. As a modification, in the latter half of the SP reach, a single-shot operation effect may be performed instead of the auto repeated hit effect, and in the latter half of the SP reach, the button effect may not be provided.

Here, the auto repeated hit effective period is basically determined to coincide with the button operation effective period (paragraph 0470 of this specification, Fig. 28(a), Fig. 29(a), (b), FIG. 30(a), etc.). However, depending on the situation, the auto repeated hit valid period may be shorter than the button operation valid period (FIG. 28(b), FIG. 30(b), etc.).

Furthermore, in this additional consideration item 1, in any of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1), a continuous hitting effect in which random numbers are assigned so that a jackpot is achieved at a rate close to 100% (here, for convenience, "jackpot confirmation mode However, it may be referred to as a continuous hit production that is the ``display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit'', or since the display mode does not change any more, the ``final display mode'' as described later. It is conceivable that it includes a production during repeated hits. In other words, in any of the automatic repeated hits (A1, C1), the random number arrangement (number) is determined so that the expectation of a big hit is almost 100%. is a ``repeated hit production in the mode of confirming a big hit'', but it may be called a repeated hit production that is ``the display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit'', and since the display mode does not change any more, It is conceivable to have a "final display mode", which may be referred to as an effect during successive hits. In addition, as a modification, any of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1) may include a continuous hitting effect in which a random number value is assigned so that a 100% chance of a big win is included.

Further, for example, in the auto repeated hit effect A1 (first half of SP reach, back button effect), as the effect during repeated hits of the jackpot confirmation mode, a predetermined image object in the effect image emits light in rainbow colors (rainbow light emission). executed. More specifically, with respect to the automatic repeated hitting effect A1, as the automatic repeated hitting progresses in a state where no button image is displayed (as the effect representing one press is repeated), the continuous hitting effect related to the automatic repeated hitting effect is displayed. The color of the effect display is white (first stage effect display) → blue (second stage effect display, 1% expected to hit) → yellow (5% expected to hit) → green (15% expected to hit). → Red (35% expected to hit the jackpot) → Rainbow color (100% expected to hit the jackpot) This is a production that has the possibility of changing (so-called rise), and in the variable display that becomes a big hit, it emits light in rainbow colors (rainbow light emission) Examples include those that are configured so that they may be used. On the other hand, in the auto repeated hit production C1 (second half of the SP reach, front button production), a production in which a predetermined character fights a large number of enemies and defeats all For example, performing a production of annihilation).

In addition, in this additional study item 1, the relationship between the execution ratio of the effect during repeated hits of the jackpot determination mode in both auto repeated effects (A1, C1) is determined as follows. For example, in the variation display for a big hit, the execution ratio of the continuous hitting effect in the automatic hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is the same as the big hit effect in the auto repeated hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect). It is made relatively low (small, small) compared to the execution ratio of the effect during successive hits in the fixed mode. Conversely, the execution ratio of the effect during repeated hits in the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 (second half of the SP reach, front button effect) is the effect of the confirmed jackpot effect in the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 (first half of the SP reach, back button effect). It is relatively high (large, many) compared to the execution ratio of As a specific example, in the variable display that becomes a big hit, the execution ratio of the production during repeated hits of the big hit confirmation mode in the auto repeated hit production A1 (SP reach first half, back button production) is 20% (the remaining 80% is the big hit confirmation mode ), the execution ratio of the continuous hitting production of the big hit confirmation mode in the auto repeated hitting production C1 (second half of SP reach, front button production) is 90% (the remaining 10% is during the continuous hitting of the big hit confirmation mode does not act as a performance). It should be noted that, in the variation display that becomes a big hit, if the continuous hit production of the big hit confirmation mode in the auto repeated production C1 (SP reach latter half, front button production) is not executed, 3% of the remaining 10% will be in the SP reach latter half. Winning is notified by (that is, even though the effect during repeated hits in the jackpot confirmation mode is not executed, it becomes an unexpected effect that the winning is notified), and 2% of the remaining 10% are SP In the second half of the reach, after the second half of the SP reach is completed, the winning is notified by displaying the characters "Actually... a big hit!" is not executed, and even though winning was not reported in the second half of the SP reach, winning is reported after that, resulting in a more unexpected performance). Here, the execution ratio of the automatic continuous hit production A1 (SP reach first half, back button production) in the variable display that becomes a big hit, and the execution ratio of the big hit confirmation mode continuous hit production C1 (SP reach second half, front button production) big hit The execution ratio of the effect during repeated hits in the fixed mode is the ratio when at least a predetermined number of repeated hits are performed during each operation valid period (automatic repeated hits valid period) (for example, 50 times in the case of automatic repeated hit effect A1 , in the case of the auto repeated effect C1, it is the ratio when 10 times are performed).

In any of the automatic repeated hit effects (A1, C1), when the jackpot is confirmed, an unexpected effect such as the display of the characters "Actually... a big hit!" (which may also be referred to as "sexual presentation", "special presentation", etc.) is configured not to occur. Therefore, when the big win is confirmed in the automatic continuous hitting production (A1, C1), the unexpectedness production is produced rather than the big winning confirmed condition in the automatic repeated hitting production (A1, C1). is not executed, the big hit is (straightforward) in a short time (in other words, the fluctuation time is shortened). In addition to the display of the words "Actually... a big hit!" However, it may also be performed in such a manner that the player regains his ambition. In addition, depending on the type of SP reach (either of SP reach second half production A to C), the production mode of SP reach (characters and stories) is different, and the production when notifying winning and notifying loss Although different, the unpredictability effect is a common effect regardless of the type of SP reach (one of the SP reach latter half effects A to C) in which the false defeat was reported. As a modified example, it is possible to consider a production mode in which the player always wins the battle after the unexpected performance, or a production mode in which the battle is finally defeated after the unexpected performance. In addition, the case where the winning is notified via the surprise effect is more convenient for the player than the winning is notified without going through the surprise effect (the winning is notified in the second half of the SP reach). It is configured to increase the number of advantageous jackpots (potentially variable jackpots, jackpots with a large number of rounds).

According to the embodiment of the invention related to the additional consideration item 1 as described above, it is possible to vary the tendency of the effect during successive hits (effect change tendency) according to the type of automatic repeated hit effect. Then, after forming a special condition such as the type of automatic continuous hit effect, it is possible to create a difference in the effect tendency by associating various game elements such as the operation effective period and the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode. .

As a result, it is possible to diversify the development of subsequent effects with respect to a plurality of types of automatic continuous hitting effects, and to make effective use of button functions. Further, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game properties can be created.

For this reason, it is possible to make a variety of production changes instead of a uniform production change, and the final production content (such as a big hit production and a By leading (transitioning) to the production of losing, etc.), basically it is a production that does not feel uncomfortable, but in some rare situations (situation where the production of the jackpot confirmation mode is executed), there is unexpectedness. It is possible to lead (transition) to production (production of enemy annihilation). Then, while diversifying the button effects themselves, it is possible to provide a certain degree of appropriate diversity without complicating the flow of the accompanying effects more than necessary.

In the above-described example, the effect (for example, rainbow light emission) of the big hit determination mode related to the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 has been described. However, the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 is a effect that can be executed in a stage prior to the automatic repeated hitting effect C1, and theoretically, the execution ratio of the effect of the big hit confirmation mode related to the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 is the big win confirmation related to the automatic repeated hitting effect C1. It is determined by the product of the execution ratio of the presentation of the mode.

Then, since the execution ratio of the performance of the big hit confirmation mode of the automatic repeated hitting performance A1 is affected by the execution ratio of the performance of the big win confirmation mode related to the automatic repeated hitting performance C1, the degree of expectation of the big win is set to be almost 100%. It can also be difficult to design. Therefore, the invention is not stipulated by comparison of the jackpot determination modes of both automatic repeated hits (A1, C1), but rather, for example, by comparing the final display mode of automatic repeated hits A1 and the jackpot confirmed mode of automatic repeated hits C1. , may define the invention.

For example, the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) is unlikely to be the effect of the final display mode, but the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) is likely to be the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode. It is possible to determine the relationship between the execution ratio of the high expectation level (the degree at which the player can expect a favorable game state) in both automatic continuous hit effects (A1, C1). . Further, the effect of the final display mode related to the automatic continuous hitting effect A1 cannot be said to be a big win confirmation mode, but it can be said that it is a effect that can be expected to develop after that.

To give a more specific example, for example, with regard to the automatic repeated hit effect A1, the back button effect in the first half of the SP reach is a effect that suggests the degree of expectation for development in the latter half of the SP reach, and the auto repeated effect is performed in a situation where no button image is displayed. As it progresses (as the effect representing one press is repeated), the color of the effect display, which is the effect during repeated hits related to the auto repeated effect, changes from white (first effect display) to blue (next effect Display) → yellow (low expectations for development in the latter half of SP reach) → green (medium expectations for development in the latter half of SP reach) → red (definite development in the latter half of SP reach) Let it be. However, it is preferable that in the automatic continuous hitting effect A1, there should be no change to effect display such as rainbow light emission, predetermined patterns, etc., which may be recognized by many players as the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode. . It should be noted that the fact that the degree of expectation for development in the second half of the SP reach is high means that there is a high possibility that the production with a high degree of expectation will be executed compared to the first half of the SP reach. It should be added that the coloring of the effect display, which is the effect during repeated hitting, suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. In addition, as a modification of the continuous hitting production in the automatic continuous hitting production A1 in the case of such a configuration, a change to an effect display such as a rainbow light emission or a predetermined pattern may be matched. Good (may play the role of notifying the winning).

On the other hand, with respect to the auto repeated hit effect C1, for example, as the front button effect in the second half of the SP reach, a button image (for example, FIG. 401) and the characters "Continuous hits!" are displayed, and from there, the characters "1000 people" are initially displayed. It can be exemplified that when the number is subtracted and reaches "0", the jackpot is determined. In addition, the meter display is started with an empty (or full) state, and as the automatic continuous tapping progresses, the amount indicated on the meter display increases (or decreases), and the meter display becomes full (or empty). It can also be exemplified that the big hit is confirmed by becoming.

In addition to this, as the automatic continuous hitting effect, the following can be exemplified to show a change in effect leading to the final display mode which cannot be said to be the effect of finalizing the big hit. For example, as a notice effect that occurs at the timing before developing into SP reach, "Hit repeatedly to open the shutter and get 'NEXT'! ” is displayed. Then, as the automatic repeated hits progress, the door provided as a movable production member gradually opens, and the door opens fully, and the player acquires the "NEXT" logo (logotype) that can be seen beyond the door. If the effect is performed, the execution of the so-called pseudo-continuation is confirmed. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the front button effect (for example, auto repeated hit effect A1) is used instead of the back button effect.

On the other hand, as an automatic repeated hit effect, for example, a character display such as "Destroy as many panels as possible by repeatedly hitting!" If it reaches the second panel), the full-rotation reach (full-rotation effect), which is a production of the jackpot confirmation mode, will be executed (the first sheet will always be destroyed, and when the second sheet is reached, the SP reach latter half production A will be performed. For example, when the third sheet is reached, the SP ready-to-win latter half effect B is executed, and when the fourth sheet is reached, the SP ready-to-win latter half effect C is executed. Incidentally, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the front button effect (for example, auto repeated hit effect A1) is used instead of the back button effect. Further, it is also possible to refer to the final display mode of the automatic repeated-hit effect as the jackpot confirmation mode in the continuous-hit effect of each automatic repeated-hit effect described above. As for the final display mode, it can be explained that it is the display mode (rendering mode) with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit in each of the automatic continuous hitting effects. As a matter of course, if there is no display mode in which the jackpot is not confirmed (a display mode in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high but the jackpot is not confirmed even if the jackpot expectation is relatively high) in the continuous hit production of the automatic repeated hits production, the display with the highest jackpot expectation. It is preferable to refer to the mode (rendering mode) as the final display mode. In other words, regardless of whether or not there is an effect during successive hits in the display mode of finalizing the big win, the display mode (effect mode) with the highest degree of expectation for the big win is called the final display mode.

Note that the automatic repeated hit effect A1 includes, for example, effects that are relatively inconspicuous, such as the above-described white or blue effect display (the same applies to automatic repeated hit effects other than the effect display). Therefore, as the automatic repeated hitting effect A1, it is possible to adopt various effects that are generally less noticeable than the automatic repeated hitting effect C1. Various automatic repeated-hit effects described above can be employed for the automatic repeated-hit effect A1 as long as there is no particular problem in relation to the automatic repeated-hit effect C1.

Also, in the invention of this additional study item 1, it is possible to perform automatic continuous hit determination in the same manner as described above. Then, for example, in the case of performing control in the same manner as shown in FIG. 27(c), the duration of depression of the operation button 22 reaches a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first time associated with the auto repeat operation is reached. Even after the condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform control related to the automatic continuous hitting operation by maintaining the pressing continuation that is the second condition.

Furthermore, with respect to the auto repeated hit determination, as described in paragraph 0454, when the long press operation (continued press down) is started (long press operation start timing), one single operation is actually performed. . This situation is the first single-shot operation and the first repeated-hit operation, but the automatic repeated-hit situation has not yet occurred. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the long-pressing operation, it is assumed that the second single-shot operation has been performed, that is, the timing is assumed that the second continuous-hitting operation has been performed. Control is performed such that the pressing operation at this time is an automatic repeated hitting operation (first automatic repeated hitting). A long-pressing operation exceeding 0.5 seconds is regarded as a single operation performed once every 0.2 seconds (although no actual single operation is performed, 0.5 seconds have elapsed). After that, it is assumed that a single operation has been performed every 0.2 seconds. corresponds to what is being done.

In addition, the time required until the effect related to the automatic repeated hit operation as described above is performed (here, the time exceeding 0.5 seconds required to satisfy the second condition) is referred to as "auto repeated hit determination time". However, the relationship between this "automatic continuous hit determination time" and the above-mentioned single-shot button effect (also called "single-shot operation effect", "single-shot push effect", or "single-shot effect") It is also possible to set For example, in the single-shot button effect, the time until the effect triggered by the button operation by the player is executed (started) is, for example, 0.1 to 0.5 seconds, and the above-mentioned auto repeated hit determination time (the second condition is time of more than 0.5 seconds).

Here, the time until the effect triggered by the button operation by the player is executed can be expressed as the time until the effect changes due to the button operation, or the time until the effect is switched. These times can be called, for example, "effect switching time".

Further, in the one-shot button effect, after the effect is switched, it is conceivable to make the time during which the effect after the change continues (effect display duration) longer than the auto repeat determination time.

Furthermore, various examples of displaying a button image (for example, the one indicated by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31(a)) as button effects have been described above. It is conceivable to determine the relationship between the previous time) and the auto repeat determination time. Then, the time before the appearance of the button image can be made longer than the auto repeat determination time. Here, the "pre-appearance time" of the button image can be defined as follows.

For example, the "pre-appearance time" of the button image is a so-called effect set presentation (a presentation in which a plurality of semi-transparent button images 401a are assembled from all four directions, up, down, left, and right to finally form one non-transparent button image). ) can be the time required for As for the "set of effects" related to this button image, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown virtually by the two-dot chain line arrow, they are aggregated and overlapped in one place, and changed into one button image (one non-transparent button image formation) can be exemplified. Note that the pre-appearance time here is set to 2 seconds. Alternatively, although not shown, images of parts (parts) associated with the button image may be displayed on the screen and then aggregated and united to form one button image (for example, "PUSH"). Parts image of the pressed part written as , parts image of the decoration body around it, and parts images imitating the screws, springs, operation button motors, etc. incorporated inside the operation button are assembled from the top, bottom, left and right, and finally one button image is formed).

Also, when effect set related to such a button image is performed, the start timing of the effect set is the start timing of the "pre-appearance time", and the end timing of the effect set is the end timing of the "pre-appearance time". is possible. Furthermore, it is possible to set the completion timing of the button image to the end timing of the effect set.

Also, the relationship between the set of effects and the effective period of the button operation can be determined so that the effect set is produced until the effective period of the button operation described above is started, and the effective period of the button operation is started when the button image is completed. It is possible. In other words, since the button operation valid period is not valid during the effect set, even if the button operation (single-shot operation, normal repeated hits, auto repeated hits, etc.) is performed, no effect is generated due to the button operation. In addition, the button image appears without a set of effects in the continuous-hit operation presentation, but in the single-hit operation presentation, the button image may appear with the set of effects. The presentation is configured so that the button image appears more often with the effect set. In addition, when the button image appears with the effect set, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the button image appears without the effect set. As a modified example, in addition to the effect set in which the semi-transparent button images are gathered from all sides, an effect set in which the semi-transparent button images are gathered from all sides is provided. The effect group in which semi-transparent button images are gathered from all directions takes a longer time (for example, 2 seconds longer than 4 seconds), and may also be configured to increase the expectation of a big hit. In addition, in the embodiment of the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, the operation effective period in the continuous operation effect varies depending on the type of effect (for example, 5 seconds or 20 seconds), but in the single operation effect The effective period of operation is uniformly set to 3 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of types of operation valid periods may be provided in the single-shot operation presentation, it is preferable that the number of types of operation valid periods is smaller than that in the repeated-hit operation presentation.
<<Additional study item 2 (Expansion of diversity of effects associated with the type of auto repeated hit effect 2)>>

Next, consider other measures for expanding the variety of effects in association with the types of automatic repeated hit effects. It should be noted that items similar to the above-described additional consideration items can be applied, but descriptions of similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the embodiment according to the invention of this additional study item 2, as in the additional study item 1 described above, the automatic repeated hit effect A1 (SP reach first half, back button effect) and the automatic repeated hit effect C1 (SP reach second half, front button effect) production) can be used. Furthermore, similar to the additional study item 1, the relationship between each operation effective period is determined so that the operation effective period (automatic repeated hitting effective period) is longer in the automatic repeated hitting effect A1 than in the automatic repeated hitting effect C1. .

In addition, both of the automatic continuous hitting effects (A1, C1) include the effect of the big win determination mode (or the final display mode, which is the display mode with the highest expectation for the big win), as in the additional study item 1. Then, in the automatic continuous hitting effect A1, as the effect of the jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode, which is the display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a big win), for example, a mode in which a predetermined image object in the effect image emits rainbow light is provided. Executed, in the auto repeated hitting performance C1, the performance of annihilating the enemy is performed as the performance of the big win determination mode (or the final display mode which is the display mode with the highest degree of expectation for the big win). This jackpot confirmation mode (or the final display mode, which is the display mode with the highest degree of expectation for a big win) (especially for the auto repeated hits effect A1) can be considered as the final display mode described above, similar to the additional study item 1. It is possible.

Each of the above matters is the same as the invention according to the additional consideration item 1, but as a characteristic matter of the additional consideration item 2, the remaining time of the auto continuous hit effective period is the above-mentioned auto repeated hit determination time (here, 0.5 seconds Consider a case where a long-pressing operation is started in a situation where the time is less than 0.55 to 0.6 seconds. In this case, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), the auto repeated hit effect can be executed. Further, the auto repeated hitting effect A1 does not (or is unlikely to be) the big win confirmation mode (or the final display mode), but the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 is (or is likely to be) the big win determination mode (or the final display mode). ), the relationship between the preceding effect (single-shot operation effect) and the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 or the big hit confirmation mode (or the final display mode) is determined.

For example, if a long press is started at a timing such as less than 0.5 seconds remaining in the operation valid period, the time of the start of the long press becomes a single-shot operation (a single-shot operation that is treated as the first successive press if there is a continuous press from now on). Therefore, the effect is generated by this single operation, and the generated effect tends to be the final display mode (in other words, the final display mode from the beginning) is the auto repeated hitting effect C1. . As another aspect, (1) when the same effect as the effect during repeated hits is automatically generated once at the end of the effective period of operation, the automatic repeated effect C1 is the final display effect at the end of the effective period of operation. (2) Only for the automatic continuous hit effect C1, the final display effect may be forcibly generated at the end of the valid operation period. does not occur), etc.

By doing so, even in a situation where an auto repeated hit operation (long press) that does not meet the conditions for automatic repeated hit determination is performed, according to the type of automatic repeated hit production, the state of the big hit confirmation mode (or the final display mode) is entered. It is possible to perform an effect in such a manner that the rate of change (execution rate) is different. Then, even if the button operation is not in time for the automatic repeated hits, it is possible to reliably cause a change (movement) in the presentation. Furthermore, on the other hand, the effect is finally performed in a manner different from the automatic continuous hitting effect, and as a result, the player can be shown the difference in the effect with respect to the difference in button operation, and the player can press the button. It is possible to raise awareness of

In addition, it is possible to add a condition of the type of automatic repeated hit effect to the special condition of a situation in which an automatic repeated hit operation (long press) that does not meet the conditions for automatic repeated hit judgment is performed, thereby creating a difference in the direction of the effect. . As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

It should be noted that, regarding the automatic repeated hit effect (here, A1, C1), it is less than the time when the button operation is detected (for example, the automatic repeated hit determination time (0.5 seconds here, about 0.55 to 0.6 seconds)). During the period of time, for example, the effect display representing the button operation is performed only once, and it is conceivable that the presentation is performed by a single operation as described above. Then, it is conceivable to prevent the production by this single operation (in this case, the first effect display) from being performed in a high-expectation mode (rainbow, predetermined pattern, etc.). Further, as described above, the effect by the single-shot operation at this time is likely to be the final display mode (in other words, from the beginning to the final display mode) in the auto repeated hitting effect C1. Alternatively, it is conceivable to use other aspects (1) and (2) described above.
<<Additional Consideration 3 (Expansion of Diversity in Button Vibe Production)>>

Next, the diversification of the vibration effect (button vibration effect) of the operation button 22 described above will be examined. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In the additional study item 3, for example, it is assumed that there are at least an effect pattern A and an effect pattern B as effects related to the button vibe effect. Of these, the effect pattern A is a button vibration effect whose execution is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player. In other words, production pattern A is a production in which the operation button 22 vibrates in a situation where the player does not operate the operation button 22 (that is, the operation button 22 automatically vibrates even if the player does not operate the operation button 22). It is a production to do).

As the effect pattern A, the above-mentioned look-ahead effect (forecast effect related to the special symbol) is executed (a look-ahead button vibe effect suggesting that the target fluctuation is highly expected), and the appearance of the button image 401. Those that are executed when the button is pressed (button vibes when a button image appears that suggests that there is a high possibility that a highly anticipated production will occur by pressing the button), and those that are executed almost simultaneously with the start of the variable display (the Button vibration effect at the start of fluctuation that suggests high expectations), and the one that is executed in a situation where the above-mentioned "Actually ... big hit!" Vibration production), etc. can be exemplified.

On the other hand, the effect pattern B is a button vibration effect triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player. In other words, it is assumed that the effect pattern B is an effect in which the operation button 22 vibrates when the player operates the operation button 22 . It can be said that the effect pattern B has a higher level of involvement (degree of involvement) of the player in the button vibe effect than the effect pattern A.

As the effect pattern B, in the situation of the above-mentioned win-lose branch, the button image is displayed together with the characters "Decide!" If it is a variable display, it is an effect of notifying the winning (for example, displaying the characters “Victory!”) and vibrating the operation button 22 . Note that the text "Decide!" is a promotion effect that indirectly prompts the player to operate the operation button 22, but it is displayed in the normal button image (the button image that appears in the situation before the win-lose branch). (In a normal button image, the promotion effect is only the button image in the first place, or characters such as "Press!" only accompanied by a display). In addition, if the current variation display is not a big hit variation display (if it is a losing variation display), an effect is executed (for example, the characters "defeat!" are displayed), but the operation button is used at that time. 22 does not vibrate. It is possible to exemplify an effect of vibrating the operation button 22 (win-lose branch button vibration effect) or the like. For example, the hit-lose branching effect is also a hit-lose branching button vibration effect, where the above-mentioned lever L is projected (FIGS. 21(b) and (c)), the operation button 22 is raised, and the operation button 22 is vibrated. can be included. In addition to the win-lose branch button vibe effect, it is not executed when the button image 401 appears before developing into the SP reach, but is executed when the button image 401 is erased when the button is pressed. (For example, the button image 401 appears after the reach is established, the button image 401 is erased by pressing the button, and the button vibration effect is generated. "Next notice (notice production that notifies the type of SP reach production)", which is a notice production with high expectations, rainbow-colored line notice that is a confirmed jackpot, and a predetermined line that is not confirmed to be a big hit, but has a high degree of expectation for a big hit. warning, etc.). Further, the button effect in the effect pattern B is preferably a single operation effect that is a front button effect, but in addition to the effect pattern B as a single operation effect that is a front button effect, repeated hits that are a front button effect are also possible. An effect pattern B may be provided as an operation effect. In such a configuration, the effect pattern B as a one-shot operation effect includes, for example, the win-lose branch button vibration effect of the SP reach-leach latter half effect A, the win-lose branch button vibration effect of the SP reach-lose latter half effect C, and the two types of button images described above. It is a button vibration effect when a notice occurs after erasing (next notice and line notice), and the effect pattern B as a continuous hit operation effect is, for example, only a win-lose branch button vibration effect in the second half of the SP reach effect B. As a one-shot operation effect. It is desirable to configure so that the number of types of the production pattern B of is relatively large.

Furthermore, as a more specific example of the combination of the effect patterns A and B, for example, the effect pattern A is a look-ahead button vibe effect, and the occurrence of the effect causes the hold that was the target of the look-ahead to be digested. Assume that the variation (target variation) has a jackpot expectation of 50%. On the other hand, the effect pattern B can be exemplified by a win-lose branch button vibration effect, in which the occurrence of the effect indicates a jackpot determination mode.

3-1. Embodiment 1 Concerning Additional Study Item 3 (Relationship between Execution Ratios of Effect Patterns A and B)
The above-mentioned effect pattern A (button vibration effect not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) and effect pattern B (button vibration effect triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) ), the relationship between them is such that the execution ratio differs in a predetermined game situation.

For example, with the target variation to be read ahead as a reference, in the variation before the target variation (pre-target variation), the ratio of execution of production pattern A is the ratio of execution of production pattern B (0% (including

Also, as another aspect, in a situation where a look-ahead effect related to certain reserved memory information is executed, the fluctuation is before the fluctuation display (variation display of target fluctuation, etc.) corresponding to the certain reserved memory information. In addition, in the variable display in which the look-ahead effect is performed (such as the variable display of the pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect is performed), the ratio of executing the effect pattern A is higher than the effect pattern B, in other words, the effect pattern A It is possible to set random numbers so that the ratio of execution of effect pattern B is lower (including 0%) than effect pattern B.

Furthermore, in the variable display (variable display of target variation, etc.) in the case where the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information is started after the prefetch effect related to the certain suspended storage information is executed, the prefetch effect is executed. The number of random numbers is determined so that the ratio of execution of the effect pattern B is higher than the variable display when the variable display starts without execution of the variable display (the variable display starts without executing the look-ahead effect) It is possible to determine the number of random numbers so that the effect pattern B is not executed in the variable display in the case of

Moreover, both of the production patterns A and B can be executed at respective predetermined timings within the variable display, but the production pattern A was not executed at the above-mentioned prescribed timing in a certain variable display. However, the set number of the random number is determined so that the effect pattern B may be executed at a timing (here, referred to as "specific timing") after the above-mentioned predetermined timing in the certain variable display. is possible.

Here, among the pre-target fluctuations, the pre-target fluctuation in which the look-ahead effect is executed can be referred to as "pre-forecast target fluctuation" or the like.

By doing one of these or combining them appropriately, it is possible to associate the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe effect with the target variation. Then, it is possible to bring out the difference in subsequent tendencies of the effect due to the difference in the player's degree of participation in the button vibe effect. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-2. Second Embodiment Related to Additional Study Item 3 (Relationship Between Execution Ratio of Effect Pattern A and Prefetching Effect)
In addition, regarding production pattern A (button vibe production that is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player), the execution ratio of production pattern A is set to the pre-reading production other than production pattern B (here, It is conceivable that it is determined in relation to the presence/absence of execution of the look-ahead effect D). The reason why the code for the look-ahead effect described here is "D" is that the code "A" to "C" is used for the look-ahead effect described in other additional considerations (additional considerations 6 and later) described later. Because.

In addition, when the aforementioned effect pattern A (the button vibe effect whose execution is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) is also executed as a look-ahead effect, similar to the look-ahead effects A to C described later. , It is a kind of look-ahead production. In that case, the aforementioned effect pattern A can be called, for example, "prefetching effect α" to distinguish it from the prefetching effects A to C. Note that production pattern A and prefetch production A to D are names for distinguishing each production so as not to complicate the explanation, and production pattern A (the operation of the operation button 22 by the player is the trigger for execution). In the case where the effect pattern A is executed as a look-ahead effect, and the look-ahead effects A to D, as long as there is no particular problem, the specific contents of each effect will overlap each other. may contain things. In other words, it is possible to perform effect pattern A (button vibe effect that is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) as a pre-read effect, and in the pre-read effects A to D, the operation button 22 by the player can be performed. It is also possible to perform a button vibration effect that is not triggered by the operation of .

As an example of the relationship between effect pattern A and look-ahead effect D, for example, look-ahead effect D is executed in a variation before target variation corresponding to certain reserved storage information (pre-target variation), and after that, target The number of random numbers is determined so that the performance pattern B may or may not be executed in the variation. In addition, when the above-mentioned look-ahead performance D is executed in the pre-target variation, the random number values are set so that the performance pattern A may or may not be executed in the subsequent target variation. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned look-ahead effect D is executed in the pre-target variation, both the effect patterns A and B are executed in the subsequent target variation, one of them is executed, and neither of them is executed. It is conceivable that

Further, for example, in the pre-target variation, if the pre-reading effect D is executed, the effect pattern A is executed more than the effect pattern B in the target change to be pre-read, compared to the case where the pre-reading effect D is not executed. It is also conceivable to make it easier (including not executing effect pattern B).

In addition, the pre-reading effect D is not limited to the button vibe effect, and various pre-reading effects (including those using movable effect members) such as the various pending pre-reading notices described above and various pre-reading continuous notices can be adopted. is.

By doing so, it is possible to give, by the look-ahead effect, an indication regarding the effect pattern A in which the degree of involvement of the player in the button vibe effect is relatively low. Even if the player's degree of participation in the button vibe effect is relatively low, it can be used more effectively in combination with the look-ahead effect. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-3. Third Embodiment Related to Additional Study Item 3 (Percentage of Execution of Effect Pattern B Based on Whether Effect Pattern A is Executed)
In addition, production pattern A (button vibration production that is not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) and production pattern B (button vibration production that is triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) Effect), depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed, the execution ratio of the effect pattern B in subsequent fluctuations is made different. For example, in a situation (executed situation) in which the production pattern A is executed with the fluctuation before the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation), the production with the fluctuation before the fluctuation at that time (the fluctuation) Compared to the situation where pattern A is not executed (non-execution situation), production pattern B is more likely to be executed with the change (production pattern A is executed with the change before the change at that time (the change) In the situation where it is not executed (situation of non-execution), the effect pattern B is not executed in the variation).

Here, as a situation in which the production pattern A has been executed in the fluctuation before the fluctuation, for example, the production pattern A is at least within three consecutive fluctuations before the fluctuation without including the fluctuation. A situation in which it is executed once can be exemplified. It should be noted that it is desirable that within three consecutive fluctuations before the relevant fluctuation be the pre-reading target pre-target fluctuation during execution of the pre-reading effect with the relevant fluctuation as the target.

Furthermore, as a control mode for facilitating the execution of effect pattern B in such a situation, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 sets a flag when effect pattern A is executed, and stores information to that effect. to Then, the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether or not the flag indicating that the effect pattern A has been executed is set in subsequent number fluctuations (for example, each of the four fluctuations) including the fluctuation at that time (the relevant fluctuation). judgment is made. Then, when it is determined that the flag is set, a table determined so that the proportion of the production pattern B is relatively larger than that of other productions is selected, and a lottery for the production is performed using the table. I do.

By doing so, it is possible to use the button vibe effect more effectively depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed and the combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B in chronological order. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

3-4. Embodiment 4 Related to Additional Study Item 3 (Percentage of Execution of Effect of Combination of Effect Patterns A and B Relating to Whether Effect Pattern A is Executed)
Similarly, production pattern A (button vibration production not triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) and production pattern B (button vibration production triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) With regard to the interrelationship of the vibration performance), the execution ratio of the performance of the combination of the performance pattern A and the performance pattern B during the subsequent variation is made different depending on whether or not the performance pattern A is executed before the change. It is also possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment (3-3. Embodiment 3 according to additional study item 3), the "execution ratio of effect pattern B" with respect to effect pattern A before the change is defined. In the form, the ratio of execution of "effect of combination of effect pattern A and effect pattern B" to effect pattern A before the change is defined. In other words, it defines the relation of the execution ratio between the effect pattern A before the change and "the effect of the combination of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B".

For example, it is assumed that both effect pattern A and effect pattern B can be executed in the variation. In that case, the execution timing of production pattern B is set after the execution timing of production pattern A (for example, the timing is 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, and the production pattern A is executed, and after that, the effect pattern B is executed at the win-lose branch timing in the second half of the SP reach after the reach is established). Then, in the variation, even if the effect pattern A is not executed, the effect pattern B may be executed after that. The execution expectation degree related to the effect pattern (expectation degree that the effect pattern is executed) is the change before the change It is desirable to be variable). In other words, if the effect pattern A is in a state of being executed in the change before the change, the effect pattern A is not in the state of being executed in the change before the change. To facilitate the execution of a time-series performance pattern of performance pattern A non-execution→performance pattern B execution. In addition, when the effect pattern A has been executed in the change before the change, the effect pattern A is not executed in the change before the change. A time-series production pattern of production pattern A execution→production pattern B execution may be easily executed by variation.

More specifically, for example, the effect pattern A is assumed to be executed when the button image 401 described above appears (vibration effect at button image appearance). This button image appearance vibration effect will be described in more detail. In the button image appearance vibration effect, the operation button 22 vibrates at the time the button image appears, which is the timing before the button operation by the player. is.

As an example of the button image appearance vibration effect, for example, a notice effect related to some (arbitrary) game state (for example, the above-mentioned next notice, a rainbow color or a predetermined pattern of dialogue notice, etc., or other notices) A button image that triggers the start of the production (rainbow color or step-up notice with a predetermined pattern may be used) appears. At this time, a button vibration effect is rarely performed at a predetermined rate even before the player operates the operation button 22 . Then, when the button image appearance vibe effect is performed, the expected degree of big hit related to the variation (and the effect in the variation) is about 33% due to the occurrence of the effect.

On the other hand, the production pattern B (the button vibration production triggered by the operation of the operation button 22 by the player) is a win-lose branch button vibration production, and the occurrence of the production is a jackpot confirmation mode. and

When the effect patterns A and B in the variation are such a combination, it can be said that the above-mentioned "effect pattern A non-execution" is the effect mode of "no button vibration effect when the button image appears" in the variation. . Furthermore, in the case of "non-execution of production pattern A", the preceding stage production related to production pattern A (here, button image display) is performed, but production pattern A (here, button vibration production when a button image appears) is not carried out. or a situation in which the button image is not displayed at the timing when the button image related to effect pattern A can be displayed (for example, the timing after 3 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the timing before the ready-to-win state is established). can be said to exist.

In addition, since the effect pattern B is a win-lose branch button vibration effect, it is performed relatively at the end (final stage) of the variation, and the effect pattern A is executed (or the effect pattern A is executed). It will be executed later than the period that did not exist.

As for the relationship between production pattern A and production pattern B, the following types (1) to (3) can be considered as time-series production patterns. Here, in both the production pattern A and the production pattern B, the time series of "production pattern A non-execution → production pattern B non-execution" is omitted.
Type (1) Execution of effect pattern A → Execution of effect pattern B Specific example: 3 seconds after the start of variable display, execution of button vibration effect when button image appears → Establishment of reach → Execution of button vibration effect for branching in the second half of SP reach Type (2) Effect Pattern A non-execution → Effect pattern B execution Specific example: A button image appears 3 seconds after the start of the variable display, but at that time, no button vibration effect is executed when the button image appears → Reach is established → In the second half of the SP reach, the win-lose branch button vibration Effect execution type (3) Only effect pattern B is executed Specific example: No button image appears 3 seconds after the start of the variable display (no button vibration effect is executed when the button image appears at the same timing) → Established reach → In the latter half of SP reach Execution of winning/falling branch button vibration effect

Furthermore, in this "3-4. Embodiment 4 according to Additional Consideration 3", depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed before the change, the type (1) or type (2) Execution expectation degrees related to time-series production patterns are different. That is, the direction in which production pattern A is executed before the change is more time-series of type (1) or type (2) than in the case where production pattern A is not executed before the change. It is configured so that the degree of expectation of execution related to the production pattern is high. When the performance pattern A is executed before the change, more time-series performance patterns can be executed than when the performance pattern A is not executed. In addition, not limited to this, when the production pattern A is executed before the change, it is possible to execute less time-series production patterns than when it is not executed. is. It should be noted that the direction in which the production pattern A is executed before the change is more time-series of the type (1) or the type (2) than the case where the production pattern A is not executed before the change. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for execution of the effect pattern is low.

Here, the "execution expectation level" can be expressed as the expectation level of execution of the effect pattern or the probability of execution of the effect pattern. In addition, it is not limited to determining the degree of execution expectation for each of the above types (1) and (2), and the total execution degree of expectation for the above types (1) and (2) is determined prior to the change. It may be determined differently depending on whether or not the effect pattern A is executed at the beginning.

Furthermore, in order to effectively perform production by the execution of production pattern A in the fluctuation before the fluctuation and the time-series production pattern in the fluctuation, the fluctuation display before the fluctuation (the fluctuation is targeted It is desirable that the pre-reading effect is executed before the pre-reading target), and the effect by the time-series effect pattern (that is, the effect pattern A is executed → the effect pattern B is executed, the effect pattern A is not executed → the effect pattern B is executed, effect Execution of only pattern B) is not performed. However, in the variable display before the change, it is a problem that an effect pattern in which the effect pattern B is not executed (that is, the effect pattern A is executed → the effect pattern B is not executed, or only the effect pattern A is executed) is performed. do not have.

In order to do so, for example, the sub-main CPU 521 sets a flag when the effect pattern B is executed, and determines the state of the flag for each change. Furthermore, referring to this flag, within 3 consecutive fluctuations before the fluctuation, without including the fluctuation, if it is determined in the fluctuation that the effect pattern B was executed, in the fluctuation , to prevent execution of time-series production patterns.

In addition, in order not to perform the time-series production pattern, it is possible to draw a lottery for the production without using a table containing the numerical values corresponding to the time-series production pattern. Even if it is, it is possible to cancel it and change another production.

By doing so, the series of connections between the effect pattern A and the effect of the combination of the effect patterns A and B makes it possible to use the button vibe effect more effectively. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

In addition, the relationship between the button vibration effect (production pattern A) that does not involve player operation and the button vibration effect that involves player operation (production pattern B) should be defined for multiple variations (this variation and previous variations). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand at what timing the button vibration effect is generated and whether or not the player's own button operation is required. Then, it is possible to make the generation of the button vibe effect even more unpredictable (or difficult to predict).

It should be noted that when the production pattern A is executed before such a change, compared to the case where it is not executed, the time-series production pattern is performed at a different rate. It is also possible to define the relationship of "effect pattern A non-execution → effect pattern B non-execution" in the pattern.

Such an effect pattern of "effect pattern A non-execution→effect pattern B non-execution" can be considered as one type of time-series effect pattern (for example, type (4)). Specifically, in the variation, neither the effect pattern A nor the effect pattern B is executed, and other effects are executed.

Here, in the production pattern of "production pattern A non-execution → production pattern B non-execution", a button image initially appears as in the specific example of (2) above. It is possible to include an effect pattern in which no button vibe effect is executed and then no win-lose branch button vibrator effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to include an effect pattern in which none of the appearance of the button image, the button vibration effect when the button image appears, and the win-lose branch button vibration effect are executed in this type (4).

In addition, the effect pattern A (the button vibe effect that is not triggered by the player's operation of the operation button 22) that can be executed in the change before the change is not limited to the example shown here, and various effect (read-ahead effect) can be applied. Also, as the time-series production pattern, it is possible to apply a combination of various production patterns. Furthermore, the appearance of button images and various button vibration effects described here may all be executed as back button effects.

In addition, regarding the various embodiments 1 to 4 related to this additional study item 3, the vibration in the button vibration effect is not limited to a relatively short period such as several times or more per second, for example less than once per second It may be a relatively long cycle such as In addition, the motion is not limited to a motion that repeats at a constant cycle, and may be a motion that varies in cycle.

Furthermore, unlike the operation buttons 22, the movable production members that make up the gimmick for production are arranged within the game area so that the player cannot touch them. In the case of motion), it is conceivable to make the cycle of the vibration motion of the operation button 22 shorter (smaller) than the motion cycle of the movable effect member. Also, it is conceivable to reduce the amplitude of the vibration operation of the operation button 22 that the player can touch with respect to the amplitude of the movable effect member.
<<Additional Consideration 4 (Expansion of Diversity 1 of Auto Repeated Effect C1)>>

Next, consider the diversification of the aforementioned auto repeated hit effect C1 (second half of SP reach, front button effect). As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 4, for example, in a situation where the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is being executed, a button image as described above (for example, the one indicated by reference numeral 401 in FIG. 31(a)) appears. Then, the production and effect corresponding to the continuous hitting operation are executed. In other words, when the condition for auto repeated hits (here, a long press for more than 0.5 seconds) is established, and the player's hand continues to press for a long time (or is released from the operation button), as described above, Such as automatic repeated hit production, effect display related to automatic repeated hit production, etc. are performed.

Here, as for the effect display, in addition to the image presentation performed on the screen, light emitting members (such as LEDs) mounted on the game machine frame 11 (including the operation buttons 22) and the game board 50 (especially the game area 52) The "effect display" also includes the production by the operation mode of the light emitter). The presentation by the operation mode by these light emitting members can be called "effect" by the light emitting member, "illumination effect", or the like.

In addition, as an effect display (illumination effect) by the light-emitting member, for example, during automatic continuous hitting, the light-emitting body changes to white, red, etc. at a specific interval (here, the above-described 0.2 second interval). Flashing in a specific color (not only one color but also two colors may flash), and the effect display that started in white changes to red, which suggests high reliability was blinking in white at 0.2 second intervals, blinking in blue at 0.2 second intervals, blinking in yellow at 0.2 second intervals, blinking in green at 0.2 second intervals, gradual changes such as blinking in red at intervals of 0.2 seconds) (so-called upstart) can be exemplified. In the case of normal repeated hitting instead of automatic repeated hitting, effect display (light emitting body flashes in a specific color) is displayed at the timing when the player actually presses the operation button 22 .

Further, while the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is being executed, light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) among the above-described environment settings can be performed in parallel. At this time, the image of the light amount adjustment effect shown in FIG. image 401). When the image of the light quantity adjustment effect is superimposed on the image of the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 in this way, various displays such as those described in the above section <<Parallel handling of the automatic repeated hitting function and the environment setting function>> can be performed. Aspects and control aspects can be employed.

Here, it is possible to set the display priority of the light amount adjustment image higher (the layer is in the foreground) than the auto repeated hit effect C1 image (which can include both the button image and the effect image based on the operation). Furthermore, it is also possible to determine the positional relationship between both images so that at least part of the image of the light amount adjustment effect is superimposed on at least part of the image of the auto repeated hitting effect C1.

Further, the light amount of the operation button light emitter (not shown) provided for the operation button 22 of the game machine frame 11 is changed by adjusting the light amount. The operation button light emitter emits white light during the effective operation period of the face button presentation to inform the player that the operation is valid, but the operation is not valid. does not emit light or emits blue light to notify the player that the valid operation period is not over. Then, the button image (for example, the button image of reference numeral 401) relating to the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is displayed, the operation button light emitter emits white light, and the light amount is adjusted as described above while the button image is being displayed. Then, the light amount (brightness) of the operation button light emitter (LED, not shown) is changed, but the light amount (brightness) of the button image is not changed (not changed).

In order to prevent the light amount (brightness) of the button image from being changed, for example, it is conceivable to prevent the light amount (brightness) of a backlight (not shown) built into the effect display device 60 from being changed. . As the backlight (not shown) of the effect display device 60, the same one that is normally provided in a liquid crystal display device or the like is applied.

In this case, for example, if the sub-main CPU 521 is executing at least the automatic repeated hit effect C1, the function of adjusting the light amount related to the operation button light emitter (not shown) and the function of adjusting the light amount related to the above-described backlight are displayed. It is conceivable to perform control that separates the Then, when the player performs an operation to adjust the light amount, the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether or not the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 is being executed. It is possible to change the amount of light (brightness) associated with the operation button light emitter (not shown) without changing (brightness).

If the sub-main CPU 521 is executing at least the auto repeated effect C1, it changes the amount of light (brightness) associated with the operation button light emitter (not shown), and the CPU 531 of the sub-sub board 302 changes the It is also possible to employ a control mode in which the amount of light (brightness) associated with the backlight is changed based on the command (sub-main command) of .

Further, as another method for preventing the light amount (brightness) of the button image from being changed, the following method is also conceivable. For example, when the player adjusts the amount of light, the amount of light (brightness) on the screen of the effect display device 60 other than the button image changes. Selectively control the layers of an image. More specifically, the CPU 531 of the sub-sub-board 302 performs image processing so that the brightness of the button image layer looks the same as before the light amount adjustment.

Further, when the operation button 22 is pressed in a situation in which the light amount is being adjusted (a situation in which the image of the light amount adjustment effect is displayed and the light amount can be adjusted) during the execution of the automatic repeated hit effect C1, Accordingly, it is conceivable to change the lighting mode of the operation button light emitter (not shown) (the effect of the operation button light emitter (not shown)). For example, in a normal repeated hit, the light emission mode is configured to change from white to red (changes to red only for 0.1 second and then returns to white) in response to one press, and during the auto repeated hit effect. If there is, it will change from white to red at intervals of 0.2 seconds. repeat during the performance).

Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is pressed, it is conceivable to change the display mode of the button image (effect display of the button image, etc.) are excluded here). For example, if the button image is an image imitating a white button, the button image is configured to flash or tremble in response to one press of the normal repeated presses. During the production, blinking of the button image or generation of an effect such as shaking is repeated at intervals of 0.2 seconds during the automatic continuous hitting production.

In another aspect, the display of a button image related to the automatic continuous hitting effect is started (button image generation), and almost simultaneously with the timing of this button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits light in white (white issuance). done. Subsequently, in the auto repeated hit effect executed by pressing and holding the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members are changed at intervals of 0.2 seconds as described above. The mode changes to a repeating mode (a mode in which a blinking or trembling effect is generated in the case of a button image, and a mode in which a blinking or color-changing effect is generated in the case of the operation button 22 or other light-emitting member). Furthermore, while the auto repeated operation is being performed (continued long pressing), the cross key 96 can be operated to adjust the amount of light in parallel. In addition, by executing the automatic continuous pressing and the light amount adjustment in parallel, the light emission mode of the operation button 22 and the light emission mode of the light emitting member are changed at intervals of 0.2 seconds, and the brightness changes. (For example, the brightness changes during white flashing, and the brightness changes during red flashing). is controlled so as not to change.

By using these various presentation modes, it is possible to show the player that the light amount is being adjusted by changing the light amount (brightness) of the operation button 22 itself, and at the same time, the button image on the screen can be displayed. can be such that the amount of light (brightness) does not change. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the amount of light is actually being changed without making the image on the screen look strange.

Furthermore, in a situation where the player is adjusting the amount of light by operating the cross key 96 or the like, the effect related to the automatic repeated hitting effect C1 and the player's operation can proceed smoothly. Then, the player can quickly operate the cross key 96 or the operation button 22 (eg, operate the cross key 96, the operation button 22, the cross key 96 in this order) with one hand (for example, the left hand).

In addition, in the continuous hit operation effect, the effect is performed in response to the player's operation a plurality of times or a single time, so it is conceivable that the player may feel that the screen and the light decoration are too bright. In such a case, the player's tastes and preferences cannot be immediately reflected if the volume level cannot be adjusted until the player is actually performing the operation or after the continuous hit operation effect is completed. . However, by adopting this additional consideration item 4, since the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 and the light level display are displayed in parallel, it is possible to adjust the light amount in the situation where the player is actually performing the operation. As a result, it is possible to immediately reflect the tastes and preferences of the player.

Although the automatic repeated-hit effect C1 has been described here as an example, it is not limited to the automatic repeated-hit effect, and can be applied to other button effects. It is also possible to consider the relationship between the force required to press the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 . For example, the pressing force required to detect the ON state of the operating button 22 and the pressing force required to detect the ON state of the cross key 96 require a large force to cause the former operating button 22 to detect the ON state. It is conceivable to design the mutual spring forces and other mechanical configurations so that By doing so, the device (here, the operation button 22) that is relatively frequently used during the production is operated with a stronger force than the device (here, the cross key 96) that is operated for setting the environment. can be made to require
<<Additional Consideration 5 (Expansion of Diversity 2 of Auto Repeated Effect C1)>>

Subsequently, other measures for diversifying the above-described auto repeated hit effect C1 (second half of SP reach, front button effect) are considered. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional consideration item 5, similarly to the above-described additional consideration item 4, for example, in a situation where the automatic continuous hit effect C1 is being executed, the button image as described above (for example, in FIG. 31(a) 401) appears, and the production and effect corresponding to the continuous hitting operation are executed.

Further, while the automatic continuous hitting effect C1 is being executed, light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) among the above-described environment settings can be performed in parallel. At this time, similarly to the above-described additional consideration item 4, the image of the light amount adjustment effect as illustrated in FIG. is done.

In addition, in this additional consideration item 5, unlike the above-mentioned additional consideration item 4, depending on the light amount adjustment in this case, the light amount of the operation button light emitter (not shown) also changes the light amount (brightness) of the button image (entire screen). ) are not changed. However, when the operation button 22 is pressed, the lighting mode of the operation button light emitter (not shown) (effect of the operation button light emitter (not shown)) is changed according to the depression.

Furthermore, when the operation button 22 is pressed, it is conceivable to change the display mode of the button image (effect display of the button image, etc.) according to the pressing.

In another aspect, the display of a button image related to the automatic continuous hitting effect is started (button image generation), and almost simultaneously with the timing of this button image generation, the operation button 22 also emits light in white (white issuance). done. Subsequently, in the auto repeated hit effect executed by pressing and holding the operation button 22, the display mode of the button image, the light emission mode of the operation button 22, and the light emission mode of various light emitting members are changed at intervals of 0.2 seconds as described above. The mode changes to a repeating mode (a mode in which a blinking or trembling effect is generated in the case of a button image, and a mode in which a blinking or color-changing effect is generated in the case of the operation button 22 or other light-emitting member). Furthermore, while the auto repeated operation is being performed (continued long pressing), the cross key 96 can be operated to adjust the amount of light in parallel. In addition, by executing the automatic repeated pressing and the light amount adjustment in parallel, the button image and the light emission mode of various light emitting members other than the light emitting member of the operation button 22 are displayed at intervals of 0.2 seconds as described above. While the mode changes, the brightness changes (for example, the brightness changes during white flashing, and the brightness changes during red flashing), but the button image and the light emission mode of the operation button 22 (the button image and , changes in the form of the light emitting member of the operation button 22 at intervals of 0.2 seconds) are controlled so that the brightness does not change.

By doing so, the operation buttons 22 and the button images, which are hidden by the player's fingers and become difficult to see, do not change during the performance even if the light amount is adjusted. As a result, the state of the operation button 22 during button presentation is not changed. In particular, in the operation button 22, for example, when the operation button light emitter (not shown) is driven in a specific manner during the promotion effect, etc., the amount of light does not change the notification mode to the effect that the promotion effect is being performed. (brightness) can be maintained. Then, it is possible to inform the player that the button effect is being performed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Although the automatic repeated-hit effect C1 has been described here as an example, it is not limited to the automatic repeated-hit effect, and can be applied to other button effects.
<<Additional Consideration 6 (Relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 1 (button effect after recovery from power failure))>

Next, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the button effect after power failure recovery will be examined. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 6, for example, at least two types of look-ahead effects B and look-ahead effects C are included in the look-ahead effects. Among these, the look-ahead effect B is a type of look-ahead effect, and for example, a special background image (for example, "Chance! ” and “Super heat!” Background image) is displayed, suggesting that the target change is hidden and that the target change is highly expected. It is assumed that it is “directing”.

This background look-ahead effect is a look-ahead notice in which the background changes when a hold related to the target change occurs (during the change in which the hold has occurred), or at the start of the next change after the change in which the hold related to the target change has occurred. . The background look-ahead effect is an effect of suggesting or notifying a subsequent game state based on the difference in the background mode in the image displayed on the effect display device 60 .

A look-ahead effect B, which is a type of background look-ahead effect, is assumed to have a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 80% or more). Such a look-ahead effect B can be called, for example, a "hot background look-ahead effect". . In addition, the look-ahead effect B may be, for example, a holding display in the shape of a rainbow-colored star with a 100% jackpot expectation, which will be described later.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect C is a kind of "display mode including a predetermined character image" related to the above-described pending look-ahead effect, and as shown in FIG. ) 421 (hereinafter referred to as “button hold effect”). In addition, the hold display where the hold look-ahead effect is not performed (the hold does not change) is the basic display mode, and the display mode is in the shape of a white star. In order to show the existence of the display, it is in the shape of a black star for convenience), and the pending display that is undergoing pending look-ahead (holding change) is a display mode different from the basic mode. The display mode is in order of expectation: blue star shape (big hit expectation 5%), green star shape (big hit expectation 15%), red star shape (big hit expectation 30%), star with a predetermined pattern (50% expected to hit the jackpot) and a rainbow-colored star (100% expected to hit the jackpot). In addition, it has a "button pending effect" that is a pending display effect that is changing pending, for example, by changing to a pending display imitating the button pending display 421 suggests a change to the retained representation of the shape of the star. When the operation button 22 is operated in the state where the button pending display is displayed, the displayed button pending display becomes a blue star with a relatively low expectation for a favorable situation for the player. and a red star-shaped pending display, which means a relatively high degree of expectation. Although the degree of expectation differs depending on which type of pending display the button pending display changes to, on average, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the button pending display is displayed is 40%.

Note that this look-ahead effect C is not limited to the one based on the button pending display 421. For example, if it is a hold look-ahead effect with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big hit than the above-mentioned "hot background look-ahead effect", various things can be applied. Then, as the look-ahead effect C, a background look-ahead effect positioned with lower expectations than the "hot background look-ahead effect" can be applied. As such a background look-ahead effect, a "chance background look-ahead effect", which is a background image in which the characters "Chance!"

In addition to this, as the look-ahead effect C, it is also possible to apply a look-ahead effect by a stop combination of the effect patterns 190 (190a to 190c). As such a look-ahead effect, for example, a so-called “chance look-ahead effect” can be exemplified. And, as this "chance ahead reading effect", for example, the same pattern is used for the combination of the effect patterns (left and middle effect patterns 190a, 190b) and the middle and right effect patterns (190b, 190c) that do not result in reach. Things that stop (may include temporary stop) (for example, "223", "455", etc.), and combinations of production patterns where all the production patterns are the same color (for example, even-numbered production patterns are blue and odd-numbered When the production pattern is red, "246", "351", etc.), and combinations of regular and reverse production patterns (eg, "123", "654", etc.) can be exemplified.

In this additional study item 6, consider the case where such look-ahead effect B or look-ahead effect C is performed in a certain target pre-variation. Since the pre-target variation in this case is the pre-target variation in which the look-ahead effect is performed, it can be referred to as the "fore-read pre-target variation" as described above. In addition, in this additional study item 6, the rate at which the button effect (here, it means the overall effect related to the operation button 22) is performed in the subsequent corresponding change (target change) is considered.

In addition, in this additional study item 6, on the other hand, as shown in FIG. A combination of cases in which a power outage occurs during the period during which the target variation (the variation) is performed (until it starts) and the power is restored (also called "power recovery") think.

Then, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target fluctuation A is the pre-target fluctuation that is two fluctuations before the target fluctuation, the power interruption occurred in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect B was executed, and the power was restored. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A in the case, is the ratio of the pre-target variation A in which the power failure does not occur in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is performed. In order to increase the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation, and in the pre-target variation A in which the pre-reading effect C is being performed, the power failure occurs and the power is restored. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, is the next variation of the pre-target variation A without power interruption in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is performed. The setting number related to the lottery for the button effect is determined so that it is lower than the rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of (The power cutoff does not occur in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the target pre-variation A, and the power failure in the target pre-target variation A in which the pre-target effect C is performed and the power failure is restored. Including that the ratio of executing the button effect in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, is 0%). Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target fluctuation A is the pre-target fluctuation that is two fluctuations before the target fluctuation, the power interruption occurred in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect B was executed, and the power was restored. The rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A in the case of the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is performed When the button effect in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, is executed without power interruption, the ratio of button images appearing with the set of effects is higher than the pre-reading effect. When a power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which C is executed and the power is restored, when the button presentation is performed in the pre-target variation B which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, an effect set is accompanied. The rate at which the button image appears is the same as when the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, without power interruption in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is being performed. It is lower than the rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects (the power failure does not occur in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed, and in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of the pre-target variation A The rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the button presentation is executed, and the before-target fluctuation when the power failure occurs and the power is restored in the before-target fluctuation A when the look-ahead presentation C is executed. 0% of the button image appears with the set of effects when the button presentation in the pre-target variation B of the next variation of A is executed.

Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target fluctuation A is the pre-target fluctuation that is two fluctuations before the target fluctuation, the power interruption occurred in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect B was executed, and the power was restored. In this case, the pre-target variation A in which the button effect is executed is higher in the target variation than the pre-target variation B in the next variation of the pre-target variation A, and the pre-reading effect C is executed. The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power failure occurs and the power is restored is the target It is also possible to determine the input number related to the lottery for the button effect so that the rate of execution of the button effect is lower in the target change than in the pre-target change B (pre-target change in which the look-ahead effect B is executed) The rate at which the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B when the power failure occurs in A and the power is restored, and the power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect C is performed (Including that the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the return is interrupted is 0%). In other words, in the change display (here, the change display of the pre-target change) before the change display (here, the change display of the target change) corresponding to the certain hold storage information, the 1 If the power is turned off in a situation where the look-ahead effect (here, the look-ahead effect B) is being executed and then the power is restored, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to certain pending storage information (pre-target variation) While the execution ratio of the operation effect (button effect) is relatively higher in the variable display (variable display of the target variation) corresponding to the certain reserved memory information than in the variable display), the certain reserved memory information A second look-ahead effect (here, a look-ahead effect C) relating to the certain reserved storage information is executed in the variation display (variation display of pre-target variation) before the variation display (variation display of target variation) corresponding to In the situation where the power supply is interrupted and then the power is restored, the certain reserved storage information is displayed before the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display of the pre-target fluctuation) corresponding to the certain reserved storage information. The variation display corresponding to the target variation (variation display of the target variation) is configured so that the execution ratio of the operation effect is relatively low. Further, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target fluctuation A is the pre-target fluctuation that is two fluctuations before the target fluctuation, the power interruption occurred in the pre-target fluctuation A in which the look-ahead effect B was executed, and the power was restored. In this case, the target variation is higher than the target variation B, which is the next variation of the target variation A, so that the button image with the effect set appears at a higher rate when the button presentation is executed, and The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation in the case where the power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which the pre-reading effect C is executed and the power is restored is the pre-target variation A in which the pre-reading effect C is executed. , the rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the button effect is executed is lower for the target change than for the pre-target change B (look-ahead effect B is executed, the rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the button effect is executed in the pre-target variation B when the power failure occurs and the power is restored in the pre-target variation A, and the look-ahead 0% of the appearance of the button image accompanied by the set of effects when the button presentation is executed in the target variation in the case where the power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which the presentation C is executed and the power is restored. ) may be configured as follows. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed (or the target of the next variation of the pre-target variation A The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation in the case where the power failure occurs in the previous variation B) and the power is restored is the before-target variation A (or the before-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect B is executed. Pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed so as to be higher than the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power failure does not occur in . The rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power failure occurs and the power is restored is the power failure in the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is performed. The input number related to the lottery for the button effect may be determined so as to be lower than the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target change when B does not occur (pre-target change A (or pre-target variation B), the rate at which the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power failure does not occur, or the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is executed ), the ratio of execution of the button effect in the target variation when the power failure occurs and the power is restored is 0%). Further, if the above-mentioned certain pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, or if the above-described certain pre-target variation A is a pre-target variation that is two variations before the target variation, A button effect is executed in the target change when the power is restored after the power failure occurs in the pre-target variation A in which the look-ahead effect B is executed (or the pre-target variation B which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A). The rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the In the pre-target variation A (or pre-target variation B) in which the look-ahead effect C is being performed, so that the rate of appearance of the button image with the set of effects is higher when the button effect is executed The rate at which the button image appears with the set of effects when the button effect is executed in the target variation when the power is restored after the power failure occurs is the pre-target variation A (or , the rate of appearance of the button image with the set of effects is lower than the rate at which the button image appears with the effect group when the button effect in the target change is executed in the case where the power failure does not occur in the pre-target change B) (the pre-reading effect B is executed) The ratio of appearance of the button image with the set of effects when the button presentation in the target variation is executed in the case where the power failure does not occur in the pre-target variation A (or the pre-target variation B), the look-ahead When the power interruption occurs in the before-target fluctuation A (or the before-target fluctuation B) in which the production C is executed and the power is restored, the button production in the target fluctuation is executed with a set of effects. (including that the percentage of images appearing is 0%)

Here, FIG. 39(b) illustrates a situation where the pre-target variation A is resumed after the power is restored, but the look-ahead effect B (or C) is not resumed. Furthermore, FIG. 39(b) illustrates a situation in which there is target variation after pre-target variation B that follows pre-target variation A. In FIG. Also, the button effect appears during the pre-target variation B.

By doing so, it is possible to vary the occurrence frequency of the button effect after the power is turned off and back according to the type of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect B or the look-ahead effect C). Then, the player (or the store clerk) can guess what the effect was before the power failure (immediately before the power failure occurred) by visually observing the state of the button effect after the power is restored. becomes possible.

In addition, as one of the indicators related to game characteristics, it is possible to produce "differences in the tendency of button effects after the power is restored according to the type of look-ahead". As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Furthermore, from the state of the look-ahead effect before the power is turned off, it is possible to infer to some extent the difference in the tendency of the button effect after the power is restored. Become.

It should be noted that the sub-main CPU 521 determines whether "prefetching effect B was executed before the power was turned off" based on the command sent again from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 after the power is restored. can be considered. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine on the side of the sub-main board 301 that "prefetching effect B was executed before the power was turned off" without backing up the data.

Also, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to back up effect data on the side of the sub-main board 301 when the power is turned off, and the sub-main CPU 521 checks the backed-up data when the power is restored. be done.
<<Additional consideration 7 (relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 2 (button effect 1 before target change))>>

Next, the button effect before the target change will be examined. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 7, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least two types of look-ahead effect A and look-ahead effect B. Of these, the look-ahead effect A is a kind of suspended look-ahead effect, and here, it is assumed to be a suspended look-ahead effect with a relatively low degree of expectation in the whole, like blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode of the hold display is white, for example, it may be colored (eg, blue, red, etc.) indicating the degree of expectation of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect B is a background look-ahead effect, similar to the additional consideration item 6 described above. Here, too, the look-ahead effect B is assumed to be a "heat background look-ahead effect" with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 80% or more).

Then, the case where the prefetching effect A (here, the blue pending prefetching effect) is performed and the case where the prefetching effect B (here, the intense heat background prefetching effect) is performed are compared, and the prefetch effect A is performed. In this case, the button effect (here, single-shot button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent "pre-target variation" than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. For example, when the pre-target effect A is performed with the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation is performed. A button performance (here, single-shot button performance) is more likely to occur in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, than when the look-ahead performance B is performed. Furthermore, when the pre-target effect A is performed with the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation is performed. When the button effect (here, single-shot button effect) occurs in the pre-target variation B, which is the next variation of the pre-target variation A, than when the pre-reading effect B is performed, the button image appears with the set of effects. You may make it easy to do. Regarding these, when the pre-target effect B is performed with the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the button If the performance (here, one-shot button performance) does not occur, or if the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation is performed, the pre-reading performance B is performed, the next variation of the pre-target variation A When a button effect (here, a single button effect) occurs in the pre-target variation B of , the button image does not appear with the set of effects.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, single-shot button effect) is more likely to occur in the "target change" after that than when the look-ahead effect A is performed. do. For example, when the pre-target effect A is performed with the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation is performed. A button performance (here, single-shot button performance) is more likely to occur in the target variation of the successive variation of the pre-target variation A than in the case where the look-ahead performance B is performed. Furthermore, when the pre-target effect A is performed with the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the pre-target variation A that is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation is performed. When a button effect (one-shot button effect in this case) is generated by the target variation of the target-previous variation A, the button image is more likely to appear with the set of effects than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. You may make it Regarding these, if the pre-target effect B is performed with the pre-target variation A, which is the pre-target variation two variations before the target variation, the button effect ( Here, if the single-shot button effect) does not occur, or if the pre-target effect B is performed in the pre-target change A, which is the pre-target change two changes before the target change, the target of the one after another change in the pre-target change A It also includes the fact that button images do not appear with a set of effects when a button effect (here, a single button effect) occurs due to variation.

By doing so, depending on the type of look-ahead, whether the button effect (here, single-shot button effect) is more likely to be executed with "pre-target variation" or "target variation". Such a difference occurs. Then, as one of the indicators related to game characteristics, it is possible to produce "differences in the tendency of button effects according to the type of look-ahead". As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Note that the above-mentioned "difference in tendency of button effects" is a difference in tendency such that button effects are likely to be performed with "pre-target variation" or button effects are likely to be performed with "target variation". Also, the "difference in tendency of button effects" referred to here can also be expressed as "difference in probability of occurrence of button effects". More specifically, the following examples can be given for the "difference in occurrence probability related to button effects".

For example, in the target variation for the pre-target look-ahead effect A (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect), the pre-reach button effect (here, a single button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the post-reach button effect ( Here, it is assumed that the auto repeated button effect) occurs at 5% (Pattern 1 related to "difference in occurrence probability related to button effect"). In addition, button images are more likely to appear with a set of effects in the post-reach button presentation than in the pre-reach button presentation. It should be noted that "before reach" may be the timing before developing into the SP reach performance, and "after reach" may be the timing during the SP reach performance (the second half of the SP reach performance). This also applies to the following.

On the other hand, in the target change for the pre-target look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, a single button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button after the reach. It is assumed that the effect (in this case, auto repeated button effect) occurs at 50% (Pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence associated with button effect"). In addition, button images are more likely to appear with a set of effects in the post-reach button presentation than in the pre-reach button presentation.

In this way, the rate of occurrence of the button effects before and after reaching the target in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A (execution ratio, 30% and 5%), and before and after the reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B It is possible to provide a difference (difference in probability of occurrence) between the rate of occurrence of button effects (percentage of execution, 40% and 50%).

Here, for example, the rate of occurrence of the button effects before reach and after reach in the target variation related to look-ahead effect A is 30% and 5%, and the button effects before and after reach in the target change related to look-ahead effect B are assumed to be 30% and 5%. It is also possible to set the rate of occurrence of to 30% and 50%.
<<Additional consideration 8 (relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 3 (button effect 1 with target change))>>

Next, we will consider the button effects in target variation. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 8, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect). Then, the "target variation" is set so that the button effect is more likely to occur than the "pre-reading target pre-variation". This includes the fact that no button effects are generated in the "pre-read target pre-variation". Further, the type of button effect is at least one of auto repeated hit effect and single button effect.

In addition, as an index related to game characteristics, ``the difference in the probability of occurrence of automatic repeated hits when comparing the fluctuation before the target and the target fluctuation'', and ``the single button when comparing the fluctuation before the target and the target fluctuation Consider the difference in the probability of occurrence of the production. All of these mean the difference in the occurrence probability of the button effect in the case of "comparing the pre-reading target fluctuation and the target fluctuation". In the former, the button effect is set to "auto repeated hit effect", and in the latter, the button effect is set to "single button effect". The occurrence probability is set between 0% and 100%.

Then, as this additional study item 8, "difference in probability of occurrence of automatic continuous hit effect" and "difference of probability of occurrence of single button effect" in "when comparing pre-reading target fluctuation and target fluctuation" make them different from each other.

In other words, as this additional consideration item 8, the difference (B1-A1 ) and the difference (B2-A2), which is the difference between the "occurrence probability A2 of the single button effect in the pre-reading target change" and the "occurrence probability B2 of the single button effect in the target change".

By doing this, depending on whether or not the lookahead is in progress (depending on the difference between the lookahead target pre-target variation and the target variation), the frequency of occurrence of the button effect (here, each of the auto repeated hit effect and the one-shot button effect) (probability of occurrence) and the tendency of button effects to occur can be varied. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of combination of the presence/absence of the effect display related to the button effect and the display mode. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of the button effect to occur" refers to the tendency indicated by the automatic repeated hitting effect or the tendency indicated by the single button effect. The 'tendency of generated button effects' also includes whether it is a button effect and what effect content is generated by pressing the button when the button effect is generated.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation is 4 contains a short fluctuation time compared to the specific special figure fluctuation pattern during time saving As previously described (paragraph 0168 of this specification, etc.). In this way, it is common practice to change the variable time depending on the number of holds at the start of the variable.

Then, when the number of pending at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), compared to when it is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1), the fluctuation time Generally, control is performed to determine the variation pattern so that . Adoption of such control is also assumed in the description of each invention of the present application.

Then, as another embodiment related to this additional study item 8, the following can be considered. For example, since the variation time may change depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation, the variation time may (can change) also in pre-target variation depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation. In order to optimize this, control is performed with priority given to the execution of the single-shot button performance over the automatic repeated-hit performance, and the execution ratio of the single-shot button performance is set higher (larger, more) than the automatic repeated-hit performance. However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, the execution ratio of auto repeated hitting effect and single button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is different.

Alternatively, only when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively small (for example, when it is 2 or 1), the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed. Then, when the holding number at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3, etc.), the execution ratio of the automatic continuous hit effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%, etc.). However, in the target fluctuation, since the fluctuation time does not change depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation, the execution ratio of auto repeated hitting effect and single button effect does not change even if the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is different.

By doing so, it is possible to further optimize the button function in response to the change in the change time depending on the number of holds at the start of the change. And it becomes possible to create new and diverse game properties.
<<Additional consideration 9 (relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 4 (button effect 2 before target change))>>

Next, in relation to the above-described additional study item 7, another example of the button effect before the target change will be studied. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 9, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least two types of look-ahead effect A and look-ahead effect B. Of these, the look-ahead effect A is a kind of suspended look-ahead effect, and here, it is assumed to be a suspended look-ahead effect with a relatively low degree of expectation in the whole, like blue. Here, as described above, when the basic display mode of the hold display is white, for example, it may be colored (eg, blue, red, etc.) indicating the degree of expectation of the next stage or the next stage.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect B is a background look-ahead effect, similar to the additional consideration item 6 described above. Here, too, the look-ahead effect B is assumed to be a "heat background look-ahead effect" with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, 80% or more).

Then, the case where the prefetching effect A (here, the blue pending prefetching effect) is performed and the case where the prefetching effect B (here, the intense heat background prefetching effect) is performed are compared, and the prefetch effect A is performed. In this case, the button effect (here, front button effect) is more likely to occur in the subsequent "pre-target variation" than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. Here, the "front button effect" is a button effect accompanied by a guide display such as a button image, as described above. Also, when the look-ahead effect A is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with the set of effects than when the look-ahead effect B is performed. (Including the fact that when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the button image does not appear with the set of effects when the button effect is generated in the subsequent "pre-target variation").

On the other hand, when the look-ahead effect B is performed, the above-mentioned button effect (here, the back button effect) is more likely to occur in the "target change" after that than when the look-ahead effect A is performed. do. Here, the "back button effect" is, as described above, a button effect in which guide display such as button images is not performed or guide display is restricted. Further, when the look-ahead performance B is performed, the button image is more likely to appear with the effect group when the button performance is generated in the "target variation" after that than when the look-ahead performance A is performed.

By doing so, depending on the type of look-ahead, the button effect (here, the front button effect or the back button effect) will be more likely to be executed in the "pre-target variation" or will be executed in the "target variation". Differences such as whether it will be easier or not will arise. Then, as one of the indicators related to game characteristics, it is possible to produce "differences in the tendency of button effects according to the type of look-ahead". Furthermore, it is possible to create a game feature such that the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the back button effect is changed according to the kind of look-ahead. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Note that the above-mentioned "difference in tendency of button effects" is a difference in tendency such that button effects are likely to be performed with "pre-target variation" or button effects are likely to be performed with "target variation". Also, the "difference in tendency of button effects" referred to here can also be expressed as "difference in probability of occurrence of button effects". More specifically, the following examples can be given for the "difference in occurrence probability related to button effects".

For example, in the target change for the pre-target look-ahead effect A (here, the blue pending look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 30%, and the button effect after the reach ( It is assumed here that the back button effect) occurs at 5% (Pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence associated with button effect"). In addition, button images are more likely to appear with a set of effects in the post-reach button presentation than in the pre-reach button presentation.

On the other hand, in the target change for the look-ahead effect B before the target change (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect), the button effect before the reach (here, the front button effect) occurs at a rate of 40%, and the button after the reach. It is assumed that the effect (here, the back button effect) occurs at 50% (Pattern 1 related to "difference in probability of occurrence associated with button effect"). In addition, button images are more likely to appear with a set of effects in the post-reach button presentation than in the pre-reach button presentation.

In this way, the rate of occurrence of the button effects before and after reaching the target in the target change related to the look-ahead effect A (execution ratio, 30% and 5%), and before and after the reach in the target change related to the look-ahead effect B It is possible to provide a difference (difference in probability of occurrence) between the rate of occurrence of button effects (percentage of execution, 40% and 50%).

Here, for example, the rate of occurrence of the button effects before reach and after reach in the target variation related to look-ahead effect A is 30% and 5%, and the button effects before and after reach in the target change related to look-ahead effect B are assumed to be 30% and 5%. It is also possible to set the rate of occurrence of to 30% and 50%.
<<Additional consideration 10 (relationship between look-ahead effect and button effect 5 (button effect 2 in target change))>>

Next, in relation to the above-described additional study item 8, another example of button effects in target variation will be studied. As long as there is no particular problem, the same items as the above-mentioned additional consideration items can be applied, but the description of the similar items will be omitted as appropriate.

In this additional study item 10, for example, the look-ahead effect includes at least the look-ahead effect B (here, the intense heat background look-ahead effect). Then, the "target variation" is set so that the button effect is more likely to occur than the "pre-reading target pre-variation". Further, the types of button effects are back button effects and front button effects. In addition, ``target variation'' is more likely than ``pre-reading target before variation'' to cause a button image to appear with a set of effects when a button effect occurs. (including the fact that the button image does not appear with an effect set).

In addition, as an index related to game characteristics, ``the difference in the probability of occurrence of automatic repeated hits when comparing the fluctuation before the target and the target fluctuation'', and ``the single button when comparing the fluctuation before the target and the target fluctuation Consider the difference in the probability of occurrence of the production. All of these mean the difference in the occurrence probability of the button effect in the case of "comparing the pre-reading target fluctuation and the target fluctuation". In the former, the button effect is the "back button effect", and in the latter, the button effect is the "back button effect".

Then, as this additional study item 10, "the difference in the occurrence probability of the back button effect" and the "difference in the occurrence probability of the front button effect" in the case of "comparing the pre-reading target change and the target change". make them different from each other.

In other words, as this additional study item 10, the difference (D1-C1 ) and the difference (D2-C2), which is the difference between the "occurrence probability C2 of a single button effect in the pre-reading target change" and the "occurrence probability D2 of a single button effect in the target change".

By doing this, depending on whether or not it is in the process of prefetching (according to the difference between prefetching target pre-variation and target variation), the frequency of occurrence of button effects (here, back button effects and front button effects, respectively) (probability of occurrence) and the tendency of button effects to occur can be varied. Then, it is possible to improve the diversity of combination of the presence/absence of the effect display related to the button effect and the display mode. As a result, the button functions can be further optimized, and new and diverse game features can be created.

Here, the above-mentioned "tendency of generated button effect" refers to the tendency indicated by the back button effect and the tendency indicated by the front button effect.

In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation is 4 contains a short fluctuation time compared to the specific special figure fluctuation pattern during time saving As previously described (paragraph 0168 of this specification, etc.). In this way, it is common practice to change the variable time depending on the number of holds at the start of the variable.

Then, when the number of pending at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), compared to when it is relatively small (for example, 2 or 1), the fluctuation time Generally, control is performed to determine the variation pattern so that . Adoption of such control is also assumed in the description of each invention of the present application.

As another embodiment of this additional study item 10, the following can be considered. For example, since the variation time may change depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation, the variation time may (can change) also in pre-target variation depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation. In order to optimize this, control is performed with priority given to the execution of the front button performance over the back button performance, and the execution ratio of the front button performance is set higher (larger, more) than the back button performance. However, in the target variation, since the variation time does not change depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation, the execution ratio of the back button effect and the front button effect does not change even if the number of reservations at the start of variation is different.

Alternatively, the back button effect is executed only when the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is relatively small (for example, two or one). Then, when the pending number at the start of fluctuation is relatively large (for example, 4 or 3), the execution ratio of the back button effect is set to 0% (or less than 5%, etc.). However, in the target variation, since the variation time does not change depending on the number of reservations at the start of variation, the execution ratio of the back button effect and the front button effect does not change even if the number of reservations at the start of variation is different.

By doing so, it is possible to further optimize the button function in response to the change in the change time depending on the number of holds at the start of the change. And it becomes possible to create new and diverse game properties.

10 pachinko game machine, 20 launch handle, 50 game board, 52 game area,
53 main control display device, 62 first start winning opening, 63 second starting winning opening,
70 first special symbol display unit, 71 second special symbol display unit, 90 big winning device,
102 main board, 104 sub-board, 113 first propriety determination means,
117 second propriety determination means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 501 main board CPU, 521 sub-main board CPU,
401 button image, 402 indicator image, 404 glitter image.

Claims (1)

A game using the game medium is performed, and as an effect related to the game, the symbols can be variably displayed and then stop-displayed, and when the stopped-displayed symbols are in a predetermined display mode, the player receives a profit. A gaming machine that performs a special game that can be granted,
a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
a sub-control means communicably connected to the main control means and performing control processing according to transmission information transmitted from the main control means;
effect display output means for outputting a effect display under the control of the sub-control means;
production sound output means for outputting production sound under the control of the sub control means;
a first operating means operable by a player;
a second operation means which is operable by a player and is an operation means different from the first operation means;
with
It is possible to execute an operation effect that can cause an effect display to be executed with the player's operation of the first operation means as a trigger,
As the types of operation effects, there are a single operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a single time and a repeated operation effect capable of accepting the player's operation of the first operation means a plurality of times,
It is possible to execute a promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the first operation means ,
when the player operates the first operating means a plurality of times in the repeated hitting operation effect , an effect display corresponding to the player's operation of the first operating means a plurality of times can be executed;
Even if the player's operation of the first operation means is not performed a plurality of times in the repeated hit operation presentation, when the player's operation of the first operation means is performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer, the player's operation is performed a plurality of times. It is assumed that the player's operation of the first operation means has been performed, and an effect display is executed in response to the player's operation of the first operation means being performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer. is possible and
The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted with the player's operation of the second operation means as a trigger,
When adjusting the volume level of the effect sound, the volume level display can be executed so that the player can grasp the current volume level of the effect sound,
It is assumed that the player has operated the first operating means a plurality of times by continuously performing the player's operating the first operating means a single time in the continuous hitting operation presentation for a predetermined time or longer. Triggered by the player's operation of the second operation means under a situation in which an effect display is executed in response to the player's operation of the first operation means being performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or longer. The volume level of the effect sound can be adjusted, and the effect display and the sound volume level display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more are displayed in parallel. is executable and
During the execution of the volume level display, both displays can be executed simultaneously by executing the performance display corresponding to the player's operation of the first operation means for a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. can be,
Both displays can be executed simultaneously by executing the volume level display during the execution of the effect display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more. can be,
The volume level display has a higher display priority than the performance display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more,
The sound volume level display is switched from non-execution to execution when the player operates the second operation means during the variable display of the symbols,
When a specific time has passed since the execution of the sound volume level display during the pattern fluctuation, the sound volume level display is not executed, but if the player operates the second operating means before the specific time passes, the above-mentioned The specific time is set again,
The specific time is the first operation set in the predetermined repeat operation effect capable of executing an effect display in response to the player's operation of the first operation means being performed a single time continuously for a predetermined time or more. shorter than the operational validity period of the means,
In the situation where the sound volume level display is being performed, even if the player continues to operate the second operation means a single time, the sound volume level changes only by one step,
When the player's operation of the second operation means is continuously performed a single time before the power is turned on, the state of the signal indicating the player's operation of the second operation means continues after the power is turned on. The volume does not change in the situation,
Even if the effect display corresponding to the player's single operation of the first operation means being continuously performed for a predetermined time or more is executed in a situation where the sound volume level display is executed first, the sound volume level is displayed. Display execution can continue without termination, and
A third operation means, which is an operation means different from the first operation means and the second operation means, is provided, and the initial sound volume level after the power is turned on is adjusted based on the setting operation by the third operation means before the power is turned on. It is possible to differentiate which stage to use,
Predetermined standby performance can be executed in a game standby state after the stop of pattern variation, and execution of the volume level display and volume by operating the second operating means even during execution of the predetermined standby performance. While the level can be adjusted, the predetermined standby performance is not terminated even if the operation is performed, and the volume level display has a higher display priority than the predetermined standby performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images